ran+network+optimization+parameter+reference ran6.1 (2)

RAN

6.1

Network Optimization Parameter Reference

Issue 01

Date 2007-08-30

Part Number

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. For anyassistance, please contact our local office or company headquarters.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.Address: Huawei Industrial Base

Bantian, LonggangShenzhen 518129People's Republic of China

Website: http://www.huawei.com

Email: [email protected]

Copyright © 2007 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All rights reserved.No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior writtenconsent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are the property of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders. NoticeThe information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in thepreparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but the statements, information, andrecommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

http://www.huawei.com

mailto:[email protected]

Contents

About This Document.....................................................................................................................1

1 Power Control Parameters........................................................................................................1-11.1 Uplink Power Control Parameters...................................................................................................................1-2

1.1.1 Power Offset Between Access Preamble and Message Control Part.....................................................1-41.1.2 PRACH Initial Transmit Power Constant..............................................................................................1-51.1.3 PRACH Power Ramp Step.....................................................................................................................1-61.1.4 Maximum Preamble Retransmit Attempts.............................................................................................1-61.1.5 Maximum Preamble Loop......................................................................................................................1-71.1.6 Default DPCCH Transmit Power Constant............................................................................................1-81.1.7 Maximum Allowed Uplink Transmit Power of the UE.........................................................................1-81.1.8 RRC/HHO Process SRB Delay............................................................................................................1-101.1.9 RRC/HHO Process DPCCH Power Control Preamble Length............................................................1-11

1.2 Downlink Power Control Parameters............................................................................................................1-111.2.1 Maximum Downlink Transmit Power of the Radio Link....................................................................1-131.2.2 Minimum Downlink Transmit Power of the Radio Link.....................................................................1-141.2.3 Cell PCPICH Transmit Power..............................................................................................................1-151.2.4 Maximum PCPICH Transmit Power....................................................................................................1-161.2.5 Minimum PCPICH Transmit Power....................................................................................................1-16

2 Handover Parameters................................................................................................................2-12.1 Intra-Frequency Handover Parameters............................................................................................................2-2

2.1.1 Softer Handover Combination Indication Switch..................................................................................2-42.1.2 Intra-Frequency Measurement L3 Filter Coefficient.............................................................................2-42.1.3 Weighting Factor....................................................................................................................................2-62.1.4 Soft Handover Relative Thresholds.......................................................................................................2-72.1.5 Event 1F Absolute Thresholds...............................................................................................................2-82.1.6 Hysteresis Related to Soft Handover.....................................................................................................2-92.1.7 Time to Trigger Related to Soft Handover...........................................................................................2-112.1.8 Minimum Quality Threshold of Soft Handover...................................................................................2-132.1.9 Affect 1A and 1B Event Thresholds Flag............................................................................................2-142.1.10 Cell Individual Offset.........................................................................................................................2-14

2.2 Inter-Frequency Handover Parameters..........................................................................................................2-152.2.1 Inter-Frequency Measurement Report Mode.......................................................................................2-19

RANNetwork Optimization Parameter Reference Contents

Issue 01 (2007-08-30) Huawei Technologies Proprietary i

2.2.2 Inter-Frequency Measurement Item.....................................................................................................2-202.2.3 Inter-Frequency Measurement Layer 3 Filter Coefficients..................................................................2-222.2.4 Frequency Weighting Factor................................................................................................................2-232.2.5 Hysteresis Related to Inter-Frequency Handover................................................................................2-242.2.6 Time to Trigger Related to Inter-Frequency Hard Handover...............................................................2-252.2.7 RSCP-Based Inter-Frequency Measurement Start/Stop Thresholds....................................................2-262.2.8 EC/No-based Inter-Frequency Measurement Start/Stop Thresholds...................................................2-272.2.9 Target Frequency Trigger Threshold of Inter-Frequency Coverage....................................................2-282.2.10 Current Used Frequency Quality Threshold of Inter-Frequency Handover.......................................2-292.2.11 Inter-Frequency Measurement Minimum Access Thresholds...........................................................2-302.2.12 Cell Individual Offset.........................................................................................................................2-312.2.13 Inter-Frequency/Inter-RAT Algorithm Switches...............................................................................2-322.2.14 Inter-Frequency/Inter-RAT Measurement Threshold Choice............................................................2-332.2.15 Inter-Frequency Measure Timer Length............................................................................................2-34

2.3 Coverage-Based Inter-RAT Handover Management Parameters.................................................................2-342.3.1 Inter-RAT Measurement L3 Filter Coefficients...................................................................................2-392.3.2 Inter-RAT Measurement Report Mode................................................................................................2-392.3.3 Frequency Weighting Factor................................................................................................................2-412.3.4 Inter-RAT Period Report Interval........................................................................................................2-422.3.5 BSIC Verify Selection Switch..............................................................................................................2-422.3.6 Inter-RAT Measurement Quantity.......................................................................................................2-432.3.7 RSCP-Based Inter-RAT Measurement Start/Stop Thresholds.............................................................2-442.3.8 Ec/No-Based Inter-RAT Measurement Start/Stop Thresholds............................................................2-452.3.9 Inter-RAT Handover Judging Thresholds............................................................................................2-462.3.10 Time to Trigger Related to Inter-RAT Handover..............................................................................2-472.3.11 Hysteresis Related to Coverage-Based Inter-RAT Handover............................................................2-482.3.12 Time to Trigger for Verified GSM Cell.............................................................................................2-492.3.13 Time to Trigger for Non-verified GSM Cell......................................................................................2-502.3.14 Penalty Time for Inter-RAT Handover..............................................................................................2-512.3.15 Cell Individual Offset.........................................................................................................................2-512.3.16 Current Used Frequency Quality Threshold of Inter-RAT Handover...............................................2-522.3.17 Inter-RAT Measure Timer Length.....................................................................................................2-53

2.4 Non Coverage-Based Inter-RAT Handover Management Parameters.........................................................2-542.4.1 Inter-RAT Service Handover Switches................................................................................................2-562.4.2 Inter-RAT Measurement L3 Filter Coefficient....................................................................................2-572.4.3 Hysteresis of Event 3C.........................................................................................................................2-572.4.4 Time to Trigger for Event 3C...............................................................................................................2-592.4.5 BSIC Verify Selection Switch..............................................................................................................2-592.4.6 Non Coverage-Based Inter-RAT Handover Judging Thresholds.........................................................2-602.4.7 Penalty Time for Inter-RAT Handover................................................................................................2-612.4.8 Inter-RAT Handover Max Attempt Times...........................................................................................2-622.4.9 Inter-RAT Measure Timer Length.......................................................................................................2-62

ContentsRAN


ii Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-08-30)

2.5 Blind Handover Management Parameters.....................................................................................................2-632.5.1 Blind Handover Flag............................................................................................................................2-642.5.2 Blind Handover Priority.......................................................................................................................2-65

2.6 Cell Selection and Reselection......................................................................................................................2-662.6.1 Measurement Hysteresis Parameters....................................................................................................2-692.6.2 Load Level Offsets...............................................................................................................................2-702.6.3 Minimum Quality Criterion.................................................................................................................2-712.6.4 Minimum Access Level.......................................................................................................................2-722.6.5 Cell Reselection Start Thresholds........................................................................................................2-722.6.6 Reselection Hysteresis Time................................................................................................................2-732.6.7 Minimum Access Level for Inter-RAT Cell........................................................................................2-742.6.8 2G Idle Mode MS's Searching for 3G Cell Signal Level Threshold....................................................2-752.6.9 3G Cell Reselection Signal Level Offset.............................................................................................2-762.6.10 3G Cell Reselection Signal Level Threshold.....................................................................................2-77

2.7 Neighbor Management Parameters...............................................................................................................2-772.7.1 Neighbor Priority Flag.........................................................................................................................2-782.7.2 Neighbor Priority..................................................................................................................................2-78

3 Admission Control Parameters................................................................................................3-13.1 Uplink and Downlink Initial Access Rates of BE Service..............................................................................3-53.2 Intelligent Admission Algorithm Switch........................................................................................................3-53.3 Uplink Total Equivalent User Number...........................................................................................................3-73.4 Downlink Total NonHSDPA Equivalent User Number.................................................................................3-83.5 AMR Voice Uplink Threshold for Conversation Service...............................................................................3-83.6 Non AMR Voice Uplink Threshold of Conversation Service........................................................................3-93.7 AMR Voice Downlink Threshold for Conversation Service........................................................................3-103.8 Non AMR Voice Downlink Threshold of Conversation Service.................................................................3-113.9 Uplink Threshold for Other Services............................................................................................................3-123.10 Downlink Threshold for Other Services.....................................................................................................3-133.11 Uplink Handover Admission Threshold.....................................................................................................3-143.12 Downlink Handover Admission Threshold.................................................................................................3-153.13 Downlink Total Power Threshold...............................................................................................................3-163.14 Uplink Handover Credit Reserved SF.........................................................................................................3-173.15 Downlink Handover Credit and Channel Code Resource Reserved SF.....................................................3-173.16 Resources Reserved for Common Channel Load.......................................................................................3-18

4 Load Control Parameters..........................................................................................................4-14.1 Cell Load Reshuffling Algorithm Parameters.................................................................................................4-2

4.1.1 Uplink and Downlink LDR Algorithm Switches...................................................................................4-64.1.2 LDR Period Timer Length.....................................................................................................................4-74.1.3 Uplink and Downlink LDR Trigger Thresholds and Release Thresholds.............................................4-84.1.4 Uplink or Downlink LDR Actions.........................................................................................................4-94.1.5 Uplink/Downlink LDR Action Handing User Number.......................................................................4-104.1.6 Uplink and Downlink Inter-Frequency Cell Load Handover Load Space Thresholds........................4-13


Issue 01 (2007-08-30) Huawei Technologies Proprietary iii

4.1.7 Uplink and Downlink Inter-Frequency Cell Load Handover Maximum Band Width.........................4-134.1.8 Cell SF Reserved Threshold.................................................................................................................4-144.1.9 Uplink or Downlink Credit SF Reserved Threshods...........................................................................4-154.1.10 LDR Code Priority Indicator..............................................................................................................4-164.1.11 MBMS Power Control Service Priority Threshold............................................................................4-16

4.2 Cell Overload Congestion Control Algorithm Parameters...........................................................................4-174.2.1 Uplink and Downlink OLC Algorithm Switches.................................................................................4-194.2.2 OLC Period Timer Length...................................................................................................................4-204.2.3 Uplink and Downlink OLC Trigger Threshold and Release Threshold..............................................4-214.2.4 Uplink and Downlink OLC Fast TF Restriction Times.......................................................................4-224.2.5 Uplink and Downlink OLC Fast TF Restrict RAB Number................................................................4-224.2.6 OLC Fast TF Restrict Data Rate Restrict Timer Length And Recover Timer Length........................4-234.2.7 OLC Fast TF Restrict Data Rate Restrict Coefficient..........................................................................4-244.2.8 Uplink and Downlink Release RAB Number......................................................................................4-24

5 PS Service Rate Control Parameters.......................................................................................5-15.1 BE Service Related Threshold Parameters......................................................................................................5-2

5.1.1 BE Service Handover Rate Threshold................................................................................................... 5-35.1.2 Uplink/Downlink BE Service Insured Rate...........................................................................................5-45.1.3 UpLink and Downlink BE traffic DCH decision threshold...................................................................5-55.1.4 DL Streaming Threshold on HSDPA.....................................................................................................5-65.1.5 DL BE Traffic Threshold on HSDPA....................................................................................................5-65.1.6 UL BE Traffic Threshold on HSUPA....................................................................................................5-75.1.7 UL Streaming Traffic Threshold on HSUPA.........................................................................................5-75.1.8 Streaming Service HSUPA Transmission Mode................................................................................... 5-8

5.2 Dynamic Channel Configuration Control Parameters.................................................................................... 5-85.2.1 Traffic Upper Threshold.......................................................................................................................5-105.2.2 Traffic Lower Threshold......................................................................................................................5-115.2.3 Time to Trigger Event 4A....................................................................................................................5-125.2.4 Time to Trigger Event 4B....................................................................................................................5-125.2.5 Pending Time after Trigger Event 4A..................................................................................................5-135.2.6 Pending time after trigger Event 4B.....................................................................................................5-145.2.7 Uplink and Downlink DCCC Rate Thresholds....................................................................................5-155.2.8 Uplink and Downlink Middle Rate Thresholds...................................................................................5-155.2.9 Uplink and Downlink Rate Adjust Levels...........................................................................................5-165.2.10 Low activity bitrate threshold............................................................................................................5-17

5.3 Link Stability Parameters..............................................................................................................................5-175.3.1 Event Ea Relative Threshold................................................................................................................5-185.3.2 Event Eb Relative Threshold................................................................................................................5-195.3.3 Uplink Full Coverage Rate...................................................................................................................5-195.3.4 Downlink Full Coverage Rate..............................................................................................................5-20

5.4 State Transfer Parameters..............................................................................................................................5-215.4.1 DCH to FACH State Transition Timer................................................................................................5-22

ContentsRAN


iv Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-08-30)

5.4.2 DCH to FACH / FACH to PCH State Transition Traffic 4B Threshold..............................................5-235.4.3 FACH to PCH State Transition Timer.................................................................................................5-235.4.4 Cell ReSelection Timer........................................................................................................................5-245.4.5 FACH to DCH Traffic Report Threshold............................................................................................5-255.4.6 FACH to DCH Traffic Time to trigger................................................................................................5-25

5.5 PS Inactive.....................................................................................................................................................5-265.5.1 Interactive Service T1..........................................................................................................................5-275.5.2 Interactive Service T2..........................................................................................................................5-285.5.3 Background Service T1........................................................................................................................5-285.5.4 Background Service T1........................................................................................................................5-295.5.5 IMS Service T1....................................................................................................................................5-305.5.6 IMS Service T2....................................................................................................................................5-30

5.6 RLC Retransmission Monitor Algorithm Parameters...................................................................................5-315.6.1 Time to Start Re-TX Monitor...............................................................................................................5-325.6.2 Re-Tx Monitor Period..........................................................................................................................5-335.6.3 Retransmission Filter Coefficient.........................................................................................................5-345.6.4 Event A threshold.................................................................................................................................5-345.6.5 Event A Time to Trigger......................................................................................................................5-355.6.6 Event A Pending Time after Trigger....................................................................................................5-355.6.7 Event A Report Period.........................................................................................................................5-365.6.8 Event B Threshold................................................................................................................................5-365.6.9 Event B Time to Trigger......................................................................................................................5-375.6.10 Event B Pending Time after Trigger..................................................................................................5-38

6 Miscellaneous Topic Parameters.............................................................................................6-16.1 Cell Channel Power Distribution Parameters..................................................................................................6-2

6.1.1 Maximum Cell Transmit Power.............................................................................................................6-36.1.2 Cell PCPICH Transmit Power................................................................................................................6-46.1.3 PSCH and SSCH Transmit Power.........................................................................................................6-46.1.4 BCH Transmit Power.............................................................................................................................6-56.1.5 Maximum FACH Transmit Power.........................................................................................................6-66.1.6 PCH Transmit Power.............................................................................................................................6-76.1.7 PICH Transmit Power............................................................................................................................6-76.1.8 AICH Transmit Power...........................................................................................................................6-8

6.2 Paging Parameters...........................................................................................................................................6-96.2.1 Paging Cycle Coefficient.......................................................................................................................6-96.2.2 Number of Paging Retransmit..............................................................................................................6-10

6.3 RRC Connection Setup Parameters...............................................................................................................6-116.3.1 T300 and N300.....................................................................................................................................6-11

6.4 Synchronization Parameters..........................................................................................................................6-126.4.1 Number of Successive In-sync Indications..........................................................................................6-146.4.2 Number of Successive Out-of-sync Indications...................................................................................6-146.4.3 Radio Link Failure Timer Duration.....................................................................................................6-15


Issue 01 (2007-08-30) Huawei Technologies Proprietary v

6.4.4 N312 and T312.....................................................................................................................................6-166.4.5 N313, N315, and T313.........................................................................................................................6-17

6.5 Location Update Parameters.........................................................................................................................6-176.5.1 Periodic Location Update Timer..........................................................................................................6-18

6.6 User Priority Related Parameters..................................................................................................................6-186.6.1 User Priority of Allocation/Retension Priority 1~14...........................................................................6-196.6.2 Integrate Priority Configured Reference..............................................................................................6-206.6.3 Indicator of Carrier Type Priority........................................................................................................6-21

7 HSDPA Parameters....................................................................................................................7-17.1 HSDPA Power Resource Management Parameters........................................................................................7-2

7.1.1 HS-DPCCH Power Management Parameters........................................................................................7-27.1.2 Total Power of HSDPA and Measurement Power Offset Constant.....................................................7-10

7.2 HSDPA Code Resource Management Algorithm Parameters......................................................................7-127.2.1 HSDPA Code Resource Distribution Mode.........................................................................................7-137.2.2 Number of HS-PDSCH Codes.............................................................................................................7-137.2.3 Number of Maximum HS-PDSCH Codes...........................................................................................7-147.2.4 Number of Minimum HS-PDSCH Codes............................................................................................7-147.2.5 Number of HS-SCCH Codes................................................................................................................7-15

7.3 HSDPA Mobility Management Parameters..................................................................................................7-167.3.1 HSPA Handover Protection Length.....................................................................................................7-16

7.4 HSDPA Direct Retry and Switch of Channel Types Parameters..................................................................7-187.4.1 D2H Retry Timer Length.....................................................................................................................7-197.4.2 Timer Length of D2H Intra-Handover.................................................................................................7-197.4.3 Timer Length of D2H Inter-Handover.................................................................................................7-207.4.4 Timer Length of Multi-Carrier Handover............................................................................................7-217.4.5 Compress Mode Permission Indication on HSDPA............................................................................7-21

7.5 HSDPA Admission Control Algorithm.........................................................................................................7-227.5.1 Maximum HSDPA Users of NodeB....................................................................................................7-237.5.2 UL HS-DPCCH Reserve Factor...........................................................................................................7-247.5.3 HSDPA Streaming PBR Threshold......................................................................................................7-247.5.4 HSDPA Best Effort PBR Threshold....................................................................................................7-257.5.5 Maximum HSDPA User Number........................................................................................................7-25

8 HSUPA Parameters....................................................................................................................8-18.1 HSUPA MAC-e Scheduling Algorithm Parameters.......................................................................................8-2

8.1.1 Maximum Target Uplink Load Factor...................................................................................................8-28.1.2 Target Non-Serving E-DCH to Total E-DCH Power Ratio...................................................................8-3

8.2 HSUPA Admission Control Algorithm...........................................................................................................8-48.2.1 Maximum HSUPA User Number.......................................................................................................... 8-48.2.2 DL HSUPA Reserved Factor ................................................................................................................ 8-58.2.3 NodeB Maximum HSUPA User Number..............................................................................................8-6

9 MBMS Parameters.....................................................................................................................9-1

ContentsRAN


vi Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-08-30)

9.1 MBMS Admission and Load Control Parameters...........................................................................................9-29.1.1 Maximum Transmit Power of the FACH...............................................................................................9-39.1.2 Minimum Coverage Percentage of the MBMS Service with the Highest Priority................................9-49.1.3 Minimum Coverage Percentage of the MBMS Service with the Lowest Priority.................................9-59.1.4 Service Priority Threshold for Decreasing Power..................................................................................9-59.1.5 MBMS Preempt Algorithm Switch........................................................................................................9-6

9.2 FLC/FLD Algorithm Parameters....................................................................................................................9-79.2.1 FLC Algorithm Switch...........................................................................................................................9-7

10 Algorithm Switches...............................................................................................................10-110.1 Connection-Oriented Algorithm Switches in RNC.....................................................................................10-2

10.1.1 Channel Algorithm Switches.............................................................................................................10-210.1.2 Handover Algorithm Switches...........................................................................................................10-610.1.3 Power Control Algorithm Switches.................................................................................................10-1110.1.4 HSPA Algorithm Switches...............................................................................................................10-1310.1.5 DRD Algorithm Switches................................................................................................................10-15

10.2 Cell Algorithm Switches...........................................................................................................................10-1610.2.1 Cell Algorithm Switches..................................................................................................................10-1610.2.2 Uplink Admission Control Algorithm Switch ................................................................................10-1810.2.3 Downlink Admission Control Algorithm Switch.............................................................................10-19

10.3 Other Algorithm Switches.........................................................................................................................10-2010.3.1 Iub CAC Algorithm Switches..........................................................................................................10-2010.3.2 Iub Bandwidth Congestion Control Algorithm Switch....................................................................10-2010.3.3 Intra-Frequency Measurement Control Information Indication.......................................................10-2110.3.4 Inter-Frequency/Inter-RAT Measurement Indication......................................................................10-2210.3.5 FACH Measurement Indicator ........................................................................................................10-22

11 Transmission Resource Management Parameters...........................................................11-111.1 Transmission Common Parameters.............................................................................................................11-2

11.1.1 AAL2 Path Type................................................................................................................................11-211.1.2 IP Path Type.......................................................................................................................................11-311.1.3 Per-Hop Behavior...............................................................................................................................11-3

11.2 Iub Admission Control Parameters.............................................................................................................11-411.2.1 Reserved Bandwidth for Forward/Backward Handover....................................................................11-4

11.3 Iub Congestion Control Parameters............................................................................................................11-511.3.1 Forward/Backward Congestion Threshold.........................................................................................11-811.3.2 Forward/Backward Congestion Clear Threshold...............................................................................11-911.3.3 Iub Bandwidth Congestion Control Algorithm Switch......................................................................11-911.3.4 Timer Length for Iub Bandwidth Restriction Service Rate Reduction............................................11-1011.3.5 Iub Congestion Factors.....................................................................................................................11-11

12 Parameters Configured on NodeB LMT............................................................................12-112.1 HSDPA Flow Control Parameters...............................................................................................................12-2

12.1.1 HSDPA Bandwidth Adjustment Switch............................................................................................12-2


Issue 01 (2007-08-30) Huawei Technologies Proprietary vii

12.1.2 Frame Discard Rate Threshold on Iub Interface................................................................................12-312.1.3 Time Delay Threshold on Iub Interface.............................................................................................12-4

12.2 HSDPA MAC-hs Scheduling Algorithm Parameters.................................................................................12-512.2.1 Resource Allocate Method.................................................................................................................12-812.2.2 Scheduling Method............................................................................................................................12-912.2.3 Maximum Retransmission Count.....................................................................................................12-1012.2.4 Power Margin...................................................................................................................................12-1012.2.5 HS-SCCH Power Control Method...................................................................................................12-1112.2.6 HS-SCCH Fixed Power or Initial Transmit Power..........................................................................12-1212.2.7 Target HS-SCCH FER.....................................................................................................................12-1212.2.8 Initial BLER of Data Transfer .........................................................................................................12-1312.2.9 Resource Limiting Switch................................................................................................................12-1412.2.10 HSDPA Dynamic Code Switch......................................................................................................12-1412.2.11 16QAM Switch..............................................................................................................................12-1512.2.12 CQI Filter Alpha.............................................................................................................................12-1612.2.13 GBR for SPI...................................................................................................................................12-1612.2.14 Weight for SPI................................................................................................................................12-1812.2.15 Resource Limiting Ratio for SPI....................................................................................................12-18

12.3 HSUPA MAC-e Scheduling Algorithm Parameters.................................................................................12-1912.3.1 AG Threshold...................................................................................................................................12-2012.3.2 Average Rate Initial Value...............................................................................................................12-2012.3.3 GBR Schedule Switch......................................................................................................................12-2112.3.4 Sort Rate Weight..............................................................................................................................12-2212.3.5 Sort Rate RSN Weight.....................................................................................................................12-22

12.4 HSUPA Power Control Parameters...........................................................................................................12-2312.4.1 Power Control Algorithm Switches for Downlink Control Channel...............................................12-2312.4.2 Fixed Power Control Mode Algorithm Parameters..........................................................................12-2812.4.3 Dynamic Power Control Mode Algorithm Parameters....................................................................12-32

12.5 Local Cell Management Parameters..........................................................................................................12-3612.5.1 Cell Radius.......................................................................................................................................12-3612.5.2 Cell Handover Radius......................................................................................................................12-37

ContentsRAN


viii Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-08-30)

Figures

Figure 7-1 Impact from over long HSPA protection length...............................................................................7-17

RANNetwork Optimization Parameter Reference Figures

Issue 01 (2007-08-30) Huawei Technologies Proprietary ix

Tables

Table 1-1 List of uplink power control parameters..............................................................................................1-2Table 1-2 List of downlink power control parameters.......................................................................................1-12Table 1-3 Maximum and minimum downlink transmit powers.........................................................................1-13Table 2-1 List of intra-frequency handover parameters.......................................................................................2-2Table 2-2 List of inter-frequency handover parameters.....................................................................................2-15Table 2-3 List of coverage-based inter-RAT handover management parameters..............................................2-35Table 2-4 List of non-coverage-based inter-RAT handover management parameters.......................................2-55Table 2-5 List of blind handover management parameters................................................................................2-63Table 2-6 List of cell selection and reselection parameters................................................................................2-66Table 2-7 List of neighbor management parameters..........................................................................................2-77Table 3-1 List of admission control parameters...................................................................................................3-1Table 4-1 List of cell load reshuffling (LDR) algorithm parameters................................................................... 4-2Table 4-2 List of smart load control parameters.................................................................................................4-17Table 5-1 List of BE service related threshold parameters...................................................................................5-2Table 5-2 List of dynamic channel configuration parameters..............................................................................5-9Table 5-3 List of link stability parameters..........................................................................................................5-17Table 5-4 List of state transfer parameters.........................................................................................................5-21Table 5-5 List of PS inactive parameters............................................................................................................5-26Table 5-6 List of RLC retransmission monitor algorithm parameters...............................................................5-31Table 6-1 List of cell channel power distribution parameters..............................................................................6-2Table 6-2 List of paging parameters.....................................................................................................................6-9Table 6-3 List of RRC connection setup parameters..........................................................................................6-11Table 6-4 List of synchronization parameters....................................................................................................6-13Table 6-5 List of location update parameters.....................................................................................................6-18Table 6-6 List of user priority related parameters..............................................................................................6-19Table 7-1 List of HS-DPCCH power control parameters.....................................................................................7-2Table 7-2 List of total power of HSDPA and measurement power offset constant...........................................7-10Table 7-3 List of HSDPA code resource management algorithm parameters....................................................7-12Table 7-4 List of HSDPA mobility management parameters.............................................................................7-16Table 7-5 List of HSDPA direct retry and switch of channel types parameters.................................................7-18Table 7-6 List of HSDPA admission control algorithm parameters..................................................................7-22Table 8-1 List of HSUPA MAC-e scheduling algorithm parameters.................................................................. 8-2Table 8-2 List of HSUPA admission control algorithm parameters.................................................................... 8-4

RANNetwork Optimization Parameter Reference Tables

Issue 01 (2007-08-30) Huawei Technologies Proprietary xi

Table 9-1 List of MBMS admission and preempt algorithm parameters.............................................................9-2Table 9-2 List of FLC/FLD algorithm parameters...............................................................................................9-7Table 10-1 List of channel algorithm switches..................................................................................................10-3Table 10-2 List of handover algorithm switches................................................................................................10-6Table 10-3 List of power control algorithm switches.......................................................................................10-12Table 10-4 List of HSPA algorithm switches...................................................................................................10-13Table 10-5 List of DRD algorithm switches....................................................................................................10-15Table 10-6 List of cell algorithm switches.......................................................................................................10-16Table 10-7 CAC algorithm switches................................................................................................................10-20Table 11-1 List of transmission common parameters........................................................................................11-2Table 11-2 List of Iub admission control parameters.........................................................................................11-4Table 11-3 List of Iub congestion control parameters........................................................................................11-6Table 11-4 Iub Congestion Factor Configuration.............................................................................................11-12Table 12-1 List of HSDPA flow control parameters..........................................................................................12-2Table 12-2 List of HSDPA MAC-hs scheduling algorithm parameters.............................................................12-5Table 12-3 GBR, weight and resource limiting ratio for SPI...........................................................................12-17Table 12-4 List of HSUPA MAC-e scheduling algorithm parameters............................................................12-19Table 12-5 List of power control algorithm switches for downlink control channel.......................................12-23Table 12-6 List of fixed power control mode algorithm parameters................................................................12-28Table 12-7 List of dynamic power control mode algorithm parameters..........................................................12-32Table 12-8 List of local cell management parameters......................................................................................12-36

TablesRAN


xii Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-08-30)

About This Document

PurposeThis document provides the engineering technician of commercial office with a parameter settingbaseline and parameter adjustment instructions.

Related VersionsThe following table lists the product versions related to this document.

Product Name Version

RNC V200R009

NodeB V100R008

Intended AudienceThis document is intended for:

l RNP engineers

l RNO engineers

Update HistoryRefer to Changes in RAN Network Optimization Parameter Reference.

Organization1 Power Control Parameters

Power control is a key WCDMA technique, through which near and far effect, shadow fadingand fast fading can be overcome to ensure uplink and downlink network performance, reducenetwork interference and improve the system quality and capacity. As a result, power controlparameter values have great impact on the network.

2 Handover Parameters

Handover aims to ensure communication continuity and good communication quality.Handovers in WCDMA system are of the following types: soft handover, softer handover, intra-frequency hard handover, inter-frequency hard handover, inter-RAT hard handover and so on.Handover emerges as the important factor affecting network performance, and handover

RANNetwork Optimization Parameter Reference About This Document

Issue 01 (2007-08-30) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1

optimization is also significant in network optimization. Handover parameters are describedaccording to the handover classification.

3 Admission Control Parameters

Admission control is a way for coordinating the WCDMA system capacity, coverage and quality,and it ensures the system stability and QoS requirement by control over user access.

4 Load Control Parameters

Load control is another very important function in WCDMA system. It maintains the systemload within the normal range to ensure that the system’s overall QoS is in the normal range. Theload control includes LDR (Load Reshuffling) and OLC (Overload Control).

5 PS Service Rate Control Parameters

The PS Service rate control includes dynamic channel configuration, state transfer.

6 Miscellaneous Topic Parameters

Special topic parameters include parameters for cell channel power distribution, paging, RRCconnection setup, synchronization and location updating.

7 HSDPA Parameters

HSDPA parameters include HSDPA power resource management parameters, HSDPA coderesource management algorithm parameters, HSDPA mobility management parameters,HSDPA direct retry and switch of channel types parameters, and HSDPA call admission controlalgorithm parameters.

8 HSUPA Parameters

HSUPA parameters include HSUPA MAC-e scheduling algorithm parameters, HSUPA powercontrol parameters, and HSUPA admission control parameters.

9 MBMS Parameters

MBMS parameters mainly include MBMS admission and load control parameters.

10 Algorithm Switches

In the RNC, algorithm switches are divided into two classes: connection-oriented algorithmswitches and cell-oriented algorithm switches.

11 Transmission Resource Management Parameters

The common configurable transmission parameters are listed here.

12 Parameters Configured on NodeB LMT

The parameters configured on the NodeB LMT described here mainly consist of the HSDPAflow control parameters, the HSDPA MAC-hs scheduling algorithm parameters, the HSUPAMAC-e scheduling algorithm parameters, the HSUPA power control parameters and the localcell management parameters.

Conventions1. Symbol Conventions

The following symbols may be found in this document. They are defined as follows

About This DocumentRAN


2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-08-30)

Symbol Description

DANGERIndicates a hazard with a high level of risk that, if not avoided,will result in death or serious injury.

WARNINGIndicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk which, ifnot avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.

CAUTIONIndicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided,could cause equipment damage, data loss, and performancedegradation, or unexpected results.

TIP Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save yourtime.

NOTE Provides additional information to emphasize or supplementimportant points of the main text.

2. General Conventions

Convention Description

Times New Roman Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman.

Boldface Names of files,directories,folders,and users are in boldface. Forexample,log in as user root .

Italic Book titles are in italics.

Courier New Terminal display is in Courier New.

3. Command Conventions


Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic Command arguments are in italic.

[ ] Items (keywords or arguments) in square brackets [ ] are optional.

{x | y | ...} Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by verticalbars.One is selected.

[ x | y | ... ] Optional alternative items are grouped in square brackets andseparated by vertical bars.One or none is selected.

{ x | y | ... } * Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by verticalbars.A minimum of one or a maximum of all can be selected.

RANNetwork Optimization Parameter Reference About This Document

Issue 01 (2007-08-30) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 3


[ x | y | ... ] * Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by verticalbars.A minimum of zero or a maximum of all can be selected.

4. GUI Conventions


Boldface Buttons,menus,parameters,tabs,window,and dialog titles are inboldface. For example,click OK.

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs.For example,choose File > Create > Folder .

5. Keyboard Operation


Key Press the key.For example,press Enter and press Tab.

Key1+Key2 Press the keys concurrently.For example,pressing Ctrl+Alt+Ameans the three keys should be pressed concurrently.

Key1,Key2 Press the keys in turn.For example,pressing Alt,A means the twokeys should be pressed in turn.

6. Mouse Operation

Action Description

Click Select and release the primary mouse button without moving thepointer.

Double-click Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quicklywithout moving the pointer.

Drag Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointerto a certain position.

About This DocumentRAN


4 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-08-30)

1 Power Control Parameters

About This Chapter

Power control is a key WCDMA technique, through which near and far effect, shadow fadingand fast fading can be overcome to ensure uplink and downlink network performance, reducenetwork interference and improve the system quality and capacity. As a result, power controlparameter values have great impact on the network.

1.1 Uplink Power Control ParametersThe common configurable uplink power control parameters are listed here.

1.2 Downlink Power Control ParametersThe common configurable downlink power control parameters are listed here.

RANNetwork Optimization Parameter Reference 1 Power Control Parameters

Issue 01 (2007-08-30) Huawei Technologies Proprietary 1-1

1.1 Uplink Power Control ParametersThe common configurable uplink power control parameters are listed here.

Table 1-1 List of uplink power control parameters

No.

Parameter ID

ParameterMeaning

DefaultValue

Relevant Command Level

1 PowerOffsetPpm

Power offsetbetween thelast accesspreamble andmessagecontrol part

Signalling: -3dBServices: -2 dB

Set: ADD PRACHTFCModify: The PRACH TFCneeds to be deleted beforebeing reconfigured.

Cell

2 ConstantValue

Constant forPRACHinitialtransmitpower

-20, that is, -20dB

Set: ADD PRACHBASICModify: The PRACH needsto be deleted before beingreconfigured.

Cell

3 PowerRampStep

Powerincrease stepof randomaccesspreamble

2, that is, 2 dB

4 PreambleRetransMax

Maximum ofpreambleretransmission

8 times

5 Mmax Maxpreambleloop

8 times Set: ADD RACHQuery: LST RACHModify: MOD RACH

Cell

6 DefaultConstantValue

Defaultconstant forinitialDPCCHtransmitpower

-27, that is, -27dB

Set or modify: SET FRCQuery: LST FRC

RNC

1 Power Control ParametersRAN


1-2 Huawei Technologies Proprietary Issue 01 (2007-08-30)

No.

Parameter ID

ParameterMeaning

DefaultValue


7 MaxAllowedUlTxPowerMaxUlTxPowerForConvMaxUlTxPowerForStrMaxUlTxPowerForIntMaxUlTxPowerForBac

MaximumUE uplinktransmitpower perservice

24, that is, 24dBm

MaxAllowedUlTxPowerSet: ADDCELLSELRESELQuery: LSTCELLSELRESELModify: MODCELLSELRESELService-OrientedParametersSet: ADD CELLCACQuery: LST CELLCACModify: MOD CELLCAC

Cell

8 RRCPROCSRBDELAYHHOPROCSRBDELAY

Delay of SRBin DCH RRCprocess[Frame]Delay of SRBin DCH HHOprocess[Frame]

7 Set: ADD CELLCACQuery: LST CELLCACModify: MOD CELLCAC

Cell

9 RRCPROCPCPREAMBLEHHOPROCPCPREAMBLE

RRC ProcDPCCH PCpreamblelength[Frame]HHO ProcDPCCH PCpreamblelength[Frame]

RRC: 0HHO: 7

1.1.1 Power Offset Between Access Preamble and Message Control PartThis parameter is the power offset between the last access preamble and the message controlpart. The access preamble power plus this offset equals the power of the control part.

1.1.2 PRACH Initial Transmit Power ConstantThis parameter is the constant for the UE to estimate the initial PRACH transmit power in theopen loop power control process.

1.1.3 PRACH Power Ramp StepThis parameter is the power increase step of the random access preambles transmitted beforethe UE which receives the acquisition indicator in the random access process.

1.1.4 Maximum Preamble Retransmit Attempts



This parameter is the maximum number of preambles retransmission of the UE in a preambleramping cycle.

1.1.5 Maximum Preamble LoopThis parameter defines the maximum number of random access preamble loops. When the UEhas transmitted the access preamble and the number of retransmission times has reachedPreambleRetransMax, if the UE still has not received the capture indication, it repeats the accessattempt after the specified waiting time. The maximum number of recycle cannot exceed Mmax.

1.1.6 Default DPCCH Transmit Power ConstantThis parameter is used by the RNC to compute the DPCCH power offset which is used by theUE to compute the initial transmit power of UL DPCCH during the open loop power controlprocess.

1.1.7 Maximum Allowed Uplink Transmit Power of the UEThe MaxAllowedULTxPower parameter determines the maximum transmit power of an UEwhen the UE gains access to a specific cell. This means that the cell selectsUE_TXPWR_MAX_RACH in the S rule. In addition, there are four maximum UE transmitpower parameters oriented to different QoS services.

1.1.8 RRC/HHO Process SRB DelayThis parameter defines the delay of SRB in DCH RRC/HHO process.

1.1.9 RRC/HHO Process DPCCH Power Control Preamble LengthThis parameter defines the DPCCH power control preamble length in DCH RRC/HHO process.

1.1.1 Power Offset Between Access Preamble and Message ControlPart

This parameter is the power offset between the last access preamble and the message controlpart. The access preamble power plus this offset equals the power of the control part.

Parameter ID

PowerOffsetPpm

Value Range

–5 to 10

Physical Value Range

–5 dB to 10 dB, step 1 dB

Parameter Setting

According to the field test results, the recommended value during signaling transmission is setto –3 dB, and that during service transmission to –2 dB.

Impact on the Network Performancel If the parameter value is set too low, it is likely that the signaling and the service data carried

over the RACH cannot be received by UTRAN, which affects the uplink coverage.




l If the value is too high, the uplink interference is increased, and the uplink capacity isaffected.

Relevant Commands

Set the parameter through ADD PRACHTFC, delete the PRACH TFC through RMVPRACHTFC before reconfiguring it.

It is necessary to deactivate PRACH (DEA PRACH) and the cell (DEA CELL) before RMVPRACHTFC is executed.

1.1.2 PRACH Initial Transmit Power ConstantThis parameter is the constant for the UE to estimate the initial PRACH transmit power in theopen loop power control process.

Parameter ID

ConstantValue

Value Range

-35 to -10


-35 dB to -10 dB， step 1 dB

Parameter Setting

The default value is -20, that is, -20 dB.

This parameter is used to calculate the transmit power of the first preamble in the random accessprocess. The formula is as follows:

Preamble_Initial_Power = PCPICH DL TX power - CPICH_RSCP + UL_interference +Constant_Value

where

l Preamble_Initial_Power is the preamble initial transmit power of the UE.

l PCPICH DL TX power is downlink transmit power of the PCPICH.

l CPICH_RSCP is the received signaling code power of the PCPICH measured by the UE.

l UL_interference is the uplink interference, which is obtained by the UE receiving datafrom the broadcast channel. It is calculated at the network side and broadcast to the UE.This value is kept in the background record of the UE under test.

l Constant_Value is obtained by the UE receiving data from the broadcast channel.

Impact on the Network Performancel If the parameter value is set too high, the initial transmit power becomes higher, whereas

the duration of the access process becomes shorter.



l If the value is too low, to satisfy the requirement of access power, it requires more rampsand lengthens the access period.

Relevant CommandsSet this parameter through ADD PRACHBASIC and modify it through MODPRACHUUPARAS.

1.1.3 PRACH Power Ramp StepThis parameter is the power increase step of the random access preambles transmitted beforethe UE which receives the acquisition indicator in the random access process.

Parameter IDPowerRampStep

Value Range1 to 8

Physical Value Range1 dB to 8 dB, step 1 dB

Parameter SettingThe default value is 2, that is 2 dB.

Impact on the Network Performancel If this value is too high, the access process is shortened, but the probability of power waste

is higher.l If it is too low, the access process is lengthened, but the transmitting power is saved.

It is a value should be weighed.

Relevant CommandsSet this parameter through ADD PRACHBASIC， modify it through MODPRACHUUPARAS, and query it through LST PRACH.

1.1.4 Maximum Preamble Retransmit AttemptsThis parameter is the maximum number of preambles retransmission of the UE in a preambleramping cycle.

Parameter IDPreambleRetransMax

Value Range1 to 64





1 to 64 times

Parameter Setting

The default value is 8 times.

The product of this parameter and the previous PRACH Power Ramp Step determines themaximum ramp power of the UE within a preamble ramping cycle.

Impact on the Network Performancel If this value is too low, the preamble power may fail to ramp to the required value, resulting

in UE access failure.l If it is too high, the UE may repeatedly make access attempts by increasing the transmit

power, resulting in interference to other users.

Relevant Commands

Set this parameter through ADD PRACHBASIC, modify it through MODPRACHUUPARAS, and query it through LST PRACH.

1.1.5 Maximum Preamble LoopThis parameter defines the maximum number of random access preamble loops. When the UEhas transmitted the access preamble and the number of retransmission times has reachedPreambleRetransMax, if the UE still has not received the capture indication, it repeats the accessattempt after the specified waiting time. The maximum number of recycle cannot exceed Mmax.

Parameter ID

Mmax

Value Range

1 to 32


None.

Parameter Setting

The default value is 8.

Impact on the Network Performancel If this parameter is too low, the UE access success rate is influenced.

l If it is too high, the UE probably tries access attempt repeatedly within a long time, whichincreases the uplink interference.



Relevant CommandsSet this parameter through ADD RACH, query it through LST RACH, and modify it throughMOD RACH.

1.1.6 Default DPCCH Transmit Power ConstantThis parameter is used by the RNC to compute the DPCCH power offset which is used by theUE to compute the initial transmit power of UL DPCCH during the open loop power controlprocess.

Parameter IDDefaultConstantValue

Value Range-35 to -10

Physical Value Range-35 dB to -10 dB

Parameter SettingThe default value is -27, that is -27 dB.

The formula given in the protocol 25.331 is as follows:

DPCCH_Initial_power = DPCCH_Power_offset - CPICH_RSCP

Where, CPICH_RSCP is the received signaling code power of the PCPICH measured by theUE.

Impact on the Network Performancel If this parameter is too low, the uplink synchronization at the cell verge may fail during

initial link setup, which influences the uplink coverage.l If it is too high, it leads to instant interference to the uplink receiving, decreasing uplink

receiving performance.

Relevant CommandsSet or modify this parameter through SET FRC and query it through LST FRC.

1.1.7 Maximum Allowed Uplink Transmit Power of the UEThe MaxAllowedULTxPower parameter determines the maximum transmit power of an UEwhen the UE gains access to a specific cell. This means that the cell selectsUE_TXPWR_MAX_RACH in the S rule. In addition, there are four maximum UE transmitpower parameters oriented to different QoS services.

Parameter IDMaxAllowedUlTxPower




MaxUlTxPowerForConv (maximum transmit power for the session service)

MaxUlTxPowerForStr (maximum transmit power for the stream service)

MaxUlTxPowerForInt (maximum transmit power for the exchange service)

MaxUlTxPowerForBac (maximum transmit power for the background service)

Value Range-50 to +33

Physical Value Range-50 dBm to +33 dBm, with step length as 1 dBm

Parameter SettingThe setting of this parameter is based on the planned uplink network coverage.

The default setting of MaxAllowedULTxPower is 21, which stands for 21 dBm. The values ofthe other four parameters cannot be greater than the value of MaxAllowedULTxPower.

By default, the parameters MaxUlTxPowerForConv, MaxUlTxPowerForStr,MaxUlTxPowerForInt, and MaxUlTxPowerForBac are set to 24 dBm.

If the capacity of a cell is restricted, this group of parameters are not a constraint for the cell.The reason is that the rapid power control function can dynamically adjust the transmit powerof an UE. If the coverage of a cell is restricted, the following formula is provided according to

the requirement of full coverage: You can infer that

Noiserise = Itotal/PN.

Where:l PUE,max represents the maximum transmit power of the UE.

l Lmax represents the maximum path loss.

l The character v represents the activation factor of a service.

l Gp represents the processing gain of a service. The formula is: Gp = W/R, where Wrepresents signal bandwidth and R represents the data transmission rate of a service.

l Ga represents antenna gain, which is the sum of the actual antenna gain and the cable lossgain.

l Gd represents the sum of diversity gains, such as multi-path diversity gain and receiverantenna gain.

l PN represents the background noise.

l Eb/Io represents the target SIR value of a service.

For the services that do not require full cell coverage, you can also use the previous formula tomeasure the transmit power of the UE that meets the special requirement for coverage area. If



the transmit power of an UE has reached the maximum, you can use the previous formula tomeasure the uplink coverage area.

Impact on Network PerformanceIf coverage area is restricted, the uplink coverage area is affected if this parameter is set to avery small value.

Relevant CommandsMaxAllowedUlTxPower: use the ADD CELLSELRESEL command for configuration, theLST CELLSELRESEL command for query, and the MOD CELLSELRESEL command formodification.

Service-oriented parameters: use the ADD CELLCAC command for configuration, the LSTCELLCAC command for query, and the MOD CELLCAC command for modification.

1.1.8 RRC/HHO Process SRB DelayThis parameter defines the delay of SRB in DCH RRC/HHO process.

Parameter IDRRCPROCSRBDELAY

HHOPROCSRBDELAY

Value Range0 to 7

Physical Value Range0 to 7 frames, step is 1

Parameter SettingThe default value of each parameter is 7.

The delay of SRB involves the following signalling: PHYSICAL CHANNELRECONFIGURATION, RADIO BEARER ESTABLISHMENT, RADIO BEARERRECONFIGURATION, RADIO BEARER RELEASE, TRANSPORT CHANNELRECONFIGURATION, HANDOVER TO UTRAN COMMAND, RRC CONNECTIONSETUP and CELL UPDATE CONFIRM.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe improper setting of this parameter will result in data loss and retransmission delay, whichmay have a negative effect on service rate and transmission delay.

Relevant CommandsSet this parameter through ADD CELLCAC, query it through LST CELLCAC and modify itthrough MOD CELLCAC.




1.1.9 RRC/HHO Process DPCCH Power Control Preamble LengthThis parameter defines the DPCCH power control preamble length in DCH RRC/HHO process.

Parameter IDRRCPROCPCPREAMBLE

HHOPROCPCPREAMBLE

Value Range0 to 7

Physical Value Range0 to 7 times, step is 1

Parameter SettingRRCPROCPCPREAMBLE is set to 0 by default, and the default value ofHHOPROCPCPREAMBLE is 7.

The power control preamble involves the following signalling: PHYSICAL CHANNELRECONFIGURATION, RADIO BEARER ESTABLISHMENT, RADIO BEARERRECONFIGURATION, RADIO BEARER RELEASE, TRANSPORT CHANNELRECONFIGURATION, HANDOVER TO UTRAN COMMAND, RRC CONNECTIONSETUP and CELL UPDATE CONFIRM.

This parameter is initially used for uplink/downlink power control convergence, preventing UEfrom using an uncontrollable power at the beginning. When the UE transmits signals on theDPCCH, the NodeB needs a period of time to recognize the uplink signals. The length of thisperiod of time depends on the search implementation and the transmission delay. It is useless tostart the uplink transmission on DPDCH before the above process is completed. Because at thattime, the data can not be correctly received and will be lost. If the AM mode is used, theretransmission may lead to a much longer delay for data transmission.

The power control algorithm 1 is the only selection during the preamble period. This parameteris closely related to the DPCCH initial transmit power, the initial SIR target, the power controlalgorithm itself and the NodeB search ability, so it should be properly adjusted in reality.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe improper setting of this parameter will result in data loss and retransmission delay, whichmay have a negative effect on service rate and transmission delay.

Relevant CommandsSet this parameter through ADD CELLCAC, query it through LST CELLCAC and modify itthrough MOD CELLCAC.

1.2 Downlink Power Control ParametersThe common configurable downlink power control parameters are listed here.



Table 1-2 List of downlink power control parameters

No. Parameter ID

ParameterMeaning

Default Value RelevantCommand

Level

1 RlMaxDlPwr

Maximumdownlinktransmitpower ofthe radiolink

Refer to the tableMaximum andminimumdownlink transmitpowers

Set: ADDCELLRLPWRQuery: LSTCELLRLPWRModify: MODCELLRLPWR

Cell

2 RlMinDlPwr

Minimumdownlinktransmitpower ofthe radiolink

3 PCPICHPower

CellPCPICHtransmitpower

330, that is, 33 dBm Set: ADD PCPICHQuery: LSTPCPICHModify: MODCELL

4 MaxPCPICHPower

MaximumPCPICHtransmitpower

346, that is, 34.6dBm

Set: ADD PCPICHQuery: LSTPCPICHModfy: MODPCPICHPWR5 MinPCP

ICHPower

MinimumPCPICHtransmitpower

313, that is, 31.3dBm

1.2.1 Maximum Downlink Transmit Power of the Radio LinkThis parameter is the maximum downlink transmit power of radio link. It should fulfill thecoverage requirement of the network planning, and the value is relative to PCPICH transmitpower.

1.2.2 Minimum Downlink Transmit Power of the Radio LinkThis parameter is the minimum transmit power of downlink radio link. It should be consideredwith the maximum downlink transmit power and the dynamic range of power control, and itsvalue is relative to PCPICH transmit power.

1.2.3 Cell PCPICH Transmit PowerIt is used to determine the power of Primary CPICH of a cell. The reference point is the antennaconnector of NodeB. Its value is related to the downlink coverage in the network planning.

1.2.4 Maximum PCPICH Transmit PowerIt is used to determine the maximum transmit power of primary CPICH of a cell. The referencepoint is the antenna connector of NodeB. Its value is related to the downlink coverage in thenetwork planning.

1.2.5 Minimum PCPICH Transmit Power




It is used to determine the minimum transmit power of primary CPICH of a cell. The referencepoint is the antenna connector of NodeB. Its value is related to the downlink coverage in thenetwork planning.

1.2.1 Maximum Downlink Transmit Power of the Radio LinkThis parameter is the maximum downlink transmit power of radio link. It should fulfill thecoverage requirement of the network planning, and the value is relative to PCPICH transmitpower.

Parameter ID

RlMaxDlPwr

Value Range

-350 to 150


-35 dB to 15 dB, step 0.1 dB

Parameter Setting

The service type and the service rate should be considered in parameter configuration. For anindividual service, the configuration values are listed in Table 1-3.

Table 1-3 Maximum and minimum downlink transmit powers

Service Type (uint: bit/s) Max. Downlink TransmitPower (in the parenthesesis the dB value)

Min. DownlinkTransmit Power (in theparentheses is the dBvalue)

CS

12.2K AMR 0(0) -150(-15)

64K transparent data 30(3) -120(-12)

56K transparent data 0(0) -150(-15)

32K transparent data -20(-2) -170(-17)

28.8K transparent data -20(-2) -170(-17)

57.6K controllable stream -10(-1) -160(-16)

PS

0 stream (unidirectional) -20(-2) -170(-17)

384K 40(4) -110(-11)

256K 20(2) -130(-13)



Service Type (uint: bit/s) Max. Downlink TransmitPower (in the parenthesesis the dB value)

Min. DownlinkTransmit Power (in theparentheses is the dBvalue)

144K 0(0) -150(-15)

128K 0(0) -150(-15)

64K 0(0) -150(-15)

32K -40(-4) -190(-19)

16K -60(-6) -210(-21)

8K -80(-8) -230(-23)

For combined services, the maximum and minimum transmit power is computed by the RNCaccording to the configuration of individual services.

Impact on the Network Performancel If this parameter is too high, downlink interference may occur.

l If it is too low, it may influence the normal functioning of downlink power control.

Relevant CommandsSet this parameter through ADD CELLRLPWR, query it through LST CELLRLPWR andmodify it through MOD CELLRLPWR.

1.2.2 Minimum Downlink Transmit Power of the Radio LinkThis parameter is the minimum transmit power of downlink radio link. It should be consideredwith the maximum downlink transmit power and the dynamic range of power control, and itsvalue is relative to PCPICH transmit power.

Parameter IDRlMinDlPwr

Value Range-350 to 150

Physical Value Range-35 dB to 15 dB, step 0.1 dB

Parameter SettingSince the dynamic range of power control is set to 15 dB, this parameter is recommended as RLMax DL TX power -15 dB and refer to the related description of the sub clause MaximumDownlink Transmit Power of the Radio Link.




Impact on the Network Performancel If this parameter is too low, the transmit power may become too low because of incorrect

estimation of SIR.

l If it is too high, it may influence the normal functioning of downlink power control.

Relevant Commands

Set this parameter through ADD CELLRLPWR, query it through LST CELLRLPWR andmodify it through MOD CELLRLPWR.


Parameter ID

PCPICHPower

Value Range

-100 to 500


-10 dBm to 50 dBm, step 0.1 dBm

Parameter Setting

The default setting is 330, namely 33 dBm.

This parameter should be set based on the actual system environment such as cell coverage(radius) and geographical environment. For the cells to be covered, the downlink coverageshould be guaranteed as a premise. For the cells requiring soft handover area, this parametershould satisfy the proportion of soft handover areas stipulated in the network planning.

For a cell with large coverage, the value of this parameter should be relatively high; otherwise,it should be relatively low. In a planned multi-cell environment, this parameter is definite If thevalue of this parameter is smaller than the planned value, coverage holes may occur when thecells are under heavy load.

Impact on the Network Performancel If this parameter is too low, it influences directly the downlink pilot coverage range.

l If it is too high, the downlink interference increases, and the cell capacity is decreasedbecause a lot of system resources are occupied and the interference with the downlink trafficchannels are increased.

In addition, the configuration of this parameter also has direct influence on the distribution ofhandover areas.



Relevant CommandsSet this parameter through ADD PCPICH, query it through LST PCPICH and modify itthrough MOD CELL.

1.2.4 Maximum PCPICH Transmit PowerIt is used to determine the maximum transmit power of primary CPICH of a cell. The referencepoint is the antenna connector of NodeB. Its value is related to the downlink coverage in thenetwork planning.

Parameter IDMaxPCPICHPower


Physical Value Range-10 dBm to 50 dBm, step 0.1 dBm

Parameter SettingThe default setting is 34.6 dBm.

This parameter sets the upper limit of the pilot channel transmit power. When modifying thePCPICH transmit power according to the actual requirement, ensure that this parameter is greaterthan the actually required PCPICH power.

Impact on the Network PerformanceNone.

Relevant CommandsSet this parameter through ADD PCPICH, query it through LST PCPICH and modify itthrough MOD PCPICHPWR.

1.2.5 Minimum PCPICH Transmit PowerIt is used to determine the minimum transmit power of primary CPICH of a cell. The referencepoint is the antenna connector of NodeB. Its value is related to the downlink coverage in thenetwork planning.

Parameter IDMinPCPICHPower





Physical Value Range-10 dBm to 50 dBm, step 0.1 dBm

Parameter SettingThe default setting is 31.3 dBm.

This parameter sets the lower limit of the pilot channel transmit power. When modifying thePCPICH transmit power according to the actual requirement, ensure that this parameter issmaller than the actually required PCPICH power.

The actual system environment, such as the cell coverage range (radius) and the geographicalenvironment should be considered while setting this parameter. If the minimum transmit powerof the main common pilot physical channel is configured too small, the cell coverage will beinfluenced. Ensure that this parameter is set under the condition of definite soft handover areaproportion, or under the condition that no coverage hole exists.


Relevant CommandsSet this parameter through ADD PCPICH, query it through LST PCPICH and modify itthrough MOD PCPICHPWR.



2 Handover Parameters

About This Chapter

Handover aims to ensure communication continuity and good communication quality.Handovers in WCDMA system are of the following types: soft handover, softer handover, intra-frequency hard handover, inter-frequency hard handover, inter-RAT hard handover and so on.Handover emerges as the important factor affecting network performance, and handoveroptimization is also significant in network optimization. Handover parameters are describedaccording to the handover classification.

2.1 Intra-Frequency Handover ParametersThe common configurable intra-frequency handover parameters are listed here.

2.2 Inter-Frequency Handover ParametersThe common configurable inter-frequency handover parameters are listed here.

2.3 Coverage-Based Inter-RAT Handover Management ParametersThe common configurable coverage-based inter-RAT handover management parameters arelisted here.

2.4 Non Coverage-Based Inter-RAT Handover Management ParametersThe common configurable non-coverage-based inter-RAT handover management parametersare listed here.

2.5 Blind Handover Management ParametersThe common configurable blind handover management parameters are listed here.

2.6 Cell Selection and ReselectionThe common configurable cell selection and reselection parameters are listed here.

2.7 Neighbor Management ParametersThe configurable neighbor management parameters are listed here.

RANNetwork Optimization Parameter Reference 2 Handover Parameters


2.1 Intra-Frequency Handover ParametersThe common configurable intra-frequency handover parameters are listed here.

Table 2-1 List of intra-frequency handover parameters

No. ParameterID

ParameterMeaning

DefaultValue

RelevantCommand

Level

1 DivCtrlField Softer handovercombinationindication switch

MAY Set or modify: SETHOCOMMQuery: LSTHOCOMM

RNC

2 IntraFreqFilterCoef

Intra-Frequencymeasurement L3filter coefficient

D3 For RNCSet or modify: SETINTRAFREQHOQuery: LSTINTRAFREQHOFor CellSet: ADDCELLINTRAFREQHOQuery: LSTCELLINTRAFREQHOModify: MODCELLINTRAFREQHO

RNCCell

3 Weight Weighting factor 0 dB

4 IntraRelThdFor1ACSIntraRelThdFor1APSIntraRelThdFor1BCSIntraRelThdFor1BPS

Soft handoverrelative thresholdsfor event 1A andevent 1B

1A: 6 (3dB)1B: 12 (6dB)

5 IntraAblThdFor1FEcNoIntraAblThdFor1FRSCP

Soft handoverabsolute thresholdsfor event 1F

EcNo: -24dBRSCP:-115 dBm

6 HystFor1AHystFor1BHystFor1CHystFor1DHystFor1F

Hysteresis related tosoft handover forevents 1A, 1B, 1C,1D and 1F

1A and1B: 0 (0dB)1C/1D/1F:8 (4 dB)

7 TrigTime1ATrigTime1BTrigTime1CTrigTime1DTrigTime1F

Time-to-Triggerparameters related tosoft handover forevents 1A, 1B, 1C,1D and 1F

1A: D320(320 ms)1B/1C/1D/1F:D640 (640ms)

8 SHOQualmin Minimum qualitythreshold of softhandover

-24 dB

2 Handover ParametersRAN



No. ParameterID

ParameterMeaning

DefaultValue

RelevantCommand

Level

9 CellsForbidden1ACellsSorbidden1B

Affect 1A thresholdflag

AFFECT Set: ADDINTRAFREQNCELLQuery: LSTINTRAFREQNCELLModify: MODINTRAFREQNCELL

NCell

10 CellIndividalOffset

Cell individualoffset

0

2.1.1 Softer Handover Combination Indication SwitchThis parameter determines whether the NodeB implements softer combination of radio links insoft handover.

2.1.2 Intra-Frequency Measurement L3 Filter CoefficientIt is the measurement smoothing factor used for filtering the L3 intra-frequency measurementreport.

2.1.3 Weighting FactorThis parameter is used to identify the threshold for triggering event 1A and 1B according to themeasured value of each cell in the active set.

2.1.4 Soft Handover Relative ThresholdsThese parameters define the difference between the quality of a cell (evaluated with the Ec/Noof PCPICH at present) and the comprehensive quality of the active set (the best cell quality incase that W=0). The soft handover relative threshold parameters include IntraRelThdFor1ACS,IntraRelThdFor1APS (relative threshold for 1A) and IntraRelThdFor1BCS,IntraRelThdFor1BPS (relative threshold for 1B).

2.1.5 Event 1F Absolute ThresholdsThese parameters correspond to the guarantee signal strength that satisfies the basic service QoS.The absolute thresholds of soft handover include IntraAblThdFor1FEcNo andIntraAblThdFor1FRSCP (Correspond to Ec/Io and RSCP).

2.1.6 Hysteresis Related to Soft HandoverThese parameters represent the hysteresis values of the event 1A, 1B, 1C, 1D and 1F.

2.1.7 Time to Trigger Related to Soft HandoverThese parameters represent the trigger delay time of the event 1A, 1B, 1C, 1D and 1F.

2.1.8 Minimum Quality Threshold of Soft HandoverWhen the RNC receives event 1A, 1C and 1D, it can be added to the active set only when CPICHEc/Io of the target cell is greater than this absolute threshold.

2.1.9 Affect 1A and 1B Event Thresholds FlagSwitch CellsForbidden1A affects the relevant threshold of event 1A and SwitchCellsForbidden1B affects the relevant threshold of event 1B.

2.1.10 Cell Individual OffsetIt is the CPICH measured value offset of intra-frequency handover cells.



2.1.1 Softer Handover Combination Indication SwitchThis parameter determines whether the NodeB implements softer combination of radio links insoft handover.

Parameter ID

DivCtrlField

Value Range

MAY, MUST, MUST_NOT


l Softer combination may be implemented.

l Softer combination must be implemented.

l Softer combination must not be implemented.

Parameter Setting

The default value is MAY.

There are two combination methods for uplink combination of soft handover: one is maximumratio combination at the NodeB Rake receiver, which gives the highest combination gain; theother is selective combination at the RNC, which gives a relatively smaller combination gain.

l The default value of the indication switch is MAY, which means the NodeB decideswhether to implement maximum ratio combination according to its own physical conditions

l When MUST is selected, the NodeB is forced to carry out maximum ratio combinationwhich is usually used in tests.

l When MUST_NOT is selected, the NodeB is forbidden to carry out maximum ratiocombination, and this method is adopted when maximum ratio combination performanceof softer handover is poor.

The working status (test/normal operation) and the propagation environment should beconsidered when deciding whether to implement softer combination and to adopt which kind ofsofter combination.

Impact on the Network Performance

None.

Relevant Commands

Set this parameter through SET HOCOMM, and query it through LST HOCOMM.

2.1.2 Intra-Frequency Measurement L3 Filter CoefficientIt is the measurement smoothing factor used for filtering the L3 intra-frequency measurementreport.




Parameter ID

IntraFreqFilterCoef

Value Range

Enum (D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8, D9, D11, D13, D15, D17, D19), working range:Enum (D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8)


Enum (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19)

Parameter Setting

The default value is D3.

The filtering of the measurement is calculated by means of the following formula:

Fn = (1 - α) · Fn - 1 + α · Mn

Where,

l Fn: the updated measurement result after filtering processing.

l Fn - 1: the old measurement result of the previous moment after filtering processing.

l Mn: the latest measured value received from the physical layer.

l α= (1/2)(k/2), where, k comes from filter coefficient, namely the local FilterCoef. When αis set to 1, it means there is no Layer 3 filtering.

The Layer 3 filtering should filter the random impact capability so that the filtered measuredvalue can reflect the basic change trend of the actual measurement. Because the measured valueinput to Layer 3 filter is after the Layer 1 filtering, the influence of fast fading has been basicallyfiltered; therefore, the Layer 3 filter should carry out smoothing filtering on the shadow fadingand small quantity of fast fading burrs, so as to provide better measurement data for eventdecisions.

Impact on the Network Performancel The greater this parameter, the stronger the smoothing effect on the signal, and the stronger

the fast fading resistance capability, but the weaker the tracing capability of the signalchange. If handover is not implemented in time, call drop occurs.

l If this parameter is too low, the possibility of unnecessary soft handover and ping-ponghandover increases.

NOTE

As adjustment of this parameter seriously affects the entire handover performance, be cautious while settingthis parameter.

Relevant Commands

For the RNC-oriented intra-frequency handover algorithm parameter: set it through SETINTRAFREQHO, and query it through LST INTRAFREQHO.



For the cell-oriented intra-frequency handover algorithm parameter: add it through ADDCELLINTRAFREQHO, query it through LST CELLINTRAFREQHO, and modify itthrough MOD CELLINTRAFREQHO.

2.1.3 Weighting FactorThis parameter is used to identify the threshold for triggering event 1A and 1B according to themeasured value of each cell in the active set.

Parameter IDWeight

Value Range0 to 20

Physical Value Range0 to 2, step 0.1

Parameter SettingThe default value is 0.

According to the Protocol TS25.331, in event 1A and 1B, W is defined as follows:

l When W=0, the formula is actually the measured value of the best cell, and thedetermination of the relative threshold of soft handover is only related to the best cell inthe active set.

l when W=1, it can be approximately considered as the equivalent signal strength whenmaximum ratio combination of down links of all cells in the active is implemented.

Impact on the Network Performancel The greater this parameter, the higher events 1A and 1B triggering thresholds obtained

under the same condition, the more difficult to join the active set, and the easier to leavethe active set.

l the less this parameter, the easier to join the active set, and the more difficult to leave theactive set.

Relevant CommandsFor RNC-oriented intra-frequency handover algorithm parameter: Set it through SETINTRAFREQHO, and query it through LST INTRAFREQHO.




For cell-oriented intra-frequency handover algorithm parameter: Add it through ADDCELLINTRAFREQHO, query it through LST CELLINTRAFREQHO, and modify itthrough MOD CELLINTRAFREQHO.

2.1.4 Soft Handover Relative ThresholdsThese parameters define the difference between the quality of a cell (evaluated with the Ec/Noof PCPICH at present) and the comprehensive quality of the active set (the best cell quality incase that W=0). The soft handover relative threshold parameters include IntraRelThdFor1ACS,IntraRelThdFor1APS (relative threshold for 1A) and IntraRelThdFor1BCS,IntraRelThdFor1BPS (relative threshold for 1B).

Parameter ID

IntraRelThdFor1ACS

IntraRelThdFor1APS

IntraRelThdFor1BCS

IntraRelThdFor1BPS

Value Range

0 to 29


0 to 14.5 dB, step 0.5 dB

Parameter Setting

l The default values of IntraRelThdFor1ACS and IntraRelThdFor1APS are 6, namely 3 dB.

l The default values of IntraRelThdFor1BCS and IntraRelThdFor1BPS are 12, namely 6 dB.

As specified in Protocol 25.331, when CPICH Ec/No value is adopted as the measured value,the following formula is adopted for the event 1A trigger decision:

Where,

l MNew is the measured value of the cell that enters the report range;

l CIONew is the offset of this cell;

l Mi is the measured value of the cells in the active set;

l NA is the number of cells in the current active set;

l MBest is the measured value of the best cell in the active set;

l W is the weighting value which is used for weighting the comprehensive quality of the bestcell and the active set;



l R1a is report range, namely the relative threshold for soft handover;

l H1a is the hysteresis value of event 1A.

The following event is taken as the trigger condition of event 1B:

Where,

l MOld is the measured value of the cell that leaves the report range;

l CIOOld is the offset of this cell;

l Mi is the measured value of the cells in the active set;

l NA is the number of cells in the current active set;

l MBest is the measured value of the best cell in the active set;

l W is the weighting value used for weighing the comprehensive quality of the best cell andthe active set;

l R1b is report range, namely the relative threshold for soft handover;

l H1b is the hysteresis value of event 1B.

The selection of a relative threshold for handover corresponds directly to the soft handoverproportion, and it should ensure the trouble-free implementation of smoothing handover.


The parameter setting determines the size of the soft handover area and the user proportioninvolved in soft handover.

l If the thresholds are high, the target cell joins the active set more easily, call drop occursmore difficultly, and the UE proportion in the state of soft handover increases, but theforward resources are seriously occupied.

l If the thresholds are low, the target cell joins the active set more difficultly, thecommunication quality cannot be guaranteed, and the implementation of smoothinghandover is affected.

Relevant Commands

For RNC-oriented intra-frequency handover algorithm parameters: set them through SETINTRAFREQHO, and query them through LST INTRAFREQHO.

For cell-oriented intra-frequency handover algorithm parameters: add them through ADDCELLINTRAFREQHO, query them through LST CELLINTRAFREQHO, and modifythem through MOD CELLINTRAFREQHO.

2.1.5 Event 1F Absolute ThresholdsThese parameters correspond to the guarantee signal strength that satisfies the basic service QoS.The absolute thresholds of soft handover include IntraAblThdFor1FEcNo andIntraAblThdFor1FRSCP (Correspond to Ec/Io and RSCP).




Parameter IDIntraAblThdFor1FEcNo

IntraAblThdFor1FRSCP

Value RangeIntraAblThdFor1FEcNo: -24 to 0

IntraAblThdFor1FRSCP: -155 to 25

Physical Value RangeIntraAblThdFor1FEcNo: -24 dB to 0 dB, step 1 dB

IntraAblThdFor1FFRSCP: -155 dBm to 25 dBm, step 1 dBm

Parameter Settingl The default value for IntraAblThdFor1FEcNo is -24 dB.

l The default value for IntraAblThdFor1FRSCP is -115 dBm.

Event 1F means the PCPICH measured value is less than the absolute threshold.

These values are the absolute thresholds used for 1F reports in the soft handover algorithm,corresponding to the guarantee signal strength that satisfies the basic service QoS and affectingthe triggering of event 1F.

Event 1F is used to trigger emergency blind handover. If the optimal cell of active set reportsevent 1F, it indicates the active set quality is rather poor, and blind handover is triggered at thismoment to make the final attempt before call drops.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe higher these thresholds, the more easily blind handover is triggered, and vice versa. Inpractice, adjust the values in accordance with the handover policy and network coverage.

Relevant CommandsFor RNC-oriented intra-frequency handover algorithm parameters: set them through SETINTRAFREQHO, and query them through LST INTRAFREQHO.


2.1.6 Hysteresis Related to Soft HandoverThese parameters represent the hysteresis values of the event 1A, 1B, 1C, 1D and 1F.

Parameter IDHystFor1A

HystFor1B



HystFor1C

HystFor1D

HystFor1F

Value Range0 to 15

Physical Value Range0 to 7.5 dB, step 0.5 dB

Parameter SettingThe default values:l The 1A and event 1B hysteresis parameters are set to 0 (0 dB).

l The others are set to 8 (4 dB).

Event 1C: cell replacement in the active set.

Event 1D: In case of an active set cell, the best cell is modified; in case of a monitored set cell,it is added into the active set and the best cell is modified.

l Event 1A

The first formula is used to trigger 1A, and the second one is used to cancel 1A. Therefore,the hysteresis range is the signal fluctuation range under usual conditions, or the fluctuationrange of the slow fading under the same condition.

l Event 1B

The first formula is used to trigger 1B, and the second one is used to cancel 1B.l Event 1C

MNew ≥ MInAS + H1c/2

MNew ≤ MInAS - H1c/2

The range of this value can be adjusted within 3 dB to 5 dB. Because 1C is triggered whenthe active set size reaches the maximum value, and the delay of handover at this time does




not lead to bad result, the signaling interaction caused by the ping-pong effect should bereduced to the minimum in the parameter configuration. The parameter can be increasedappropriately in the adjustment.

l Event 1D

MNotBest ≥ MBest + H1d/2

The event cancellation formula has not been given in the protocol. According to thecancellation definitions of other events, the 1D cancellation definition can be deduced asfollows:

MNotBest ≤ MBest - H1d/2

The range of this value can be adjusted within 3 dB to 5 dB. Because all the handoverpolicies are based on the best cell and the change of the best cell usually leads to the updateof the measurement control, the ping-pong change and mis-decision should be reduced tothe minimum in report of event 1D. The parameter can be increased appropriately in theadjustment.

l Event 1F

MNew ≤ T1f - H1f/2

MNew ≥ T1f + H1f/2

The range of this value can be adjusted within 3 dB to 5 dB. The value of this parameter isconsistent with the hysteresis value for 1B.

Impact on the Network Performancel For a UE that has entered to the soft handover area, increased hysteresis is equivalent to a

reduced soft handover range.

l For a UE that has left the soft handover area, increased hysteresis is equivalent to anincreased soft handover range.

If the number of users entering the soft handover area is the same as the number of users leavingthe soft handover area, there is no influence on the actual proportion of soft handover. The greaterthe hysteresis, the stronger the signal fluctuation resistance capability, and the better the ping-pong effect suppressed. However, the response speed of the handover algorithm on signalchanges is decreased.

Therefore, the radio environment (slow fading characteristics), the actual handover distance andthe user moving speed should be fully considered for the setting of these parameters.

Relevant Commands



2.1.7 Time to Trigger Related to Soft HandoverThese parameters represent the trigger delay time of the event 1A, 1B, 1C, 1D and 1F.



Parameter ID

TrigTime1A

TrigTime1B

TrigTime1C

TrigTime1D

TrigTime1F

Value Range

Enum (D0, D10, D20, D40, D60, D80, D100, D120, D160, D200, D240, D320, D640, D1280,D2560, D5000), work range Enum (D0, D200, D240, D640, D1280, D2560, D5000)


Enum (0, 10, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 160, 200, 240, 320, 640, 1280, 2560, 5000)ms

Parameter Setting

The default value for 1A is D320 （320 ms）, and the default values for other events are D640(640 ms).

The time-to-trigger mechanism is mainly used:

l To reduce the number of wrong event reports caused by burst signals.

l To suppress ping-pong handover to some degree.

l To reduce the influence of shadow fading on event decisions.

Layer 3 filter coefficient, hysteresis and time-to-trigger jointly overcome the interference(mainly slow fading) effect. They are used to prevent the ping-pong effect (including eventreports, and active set and best cell update) caused by slow fading.

In order to obtain the approximate performance, we can use different combinations of the threeparameters. The interferences overcome by the three parameters are of different types:

l Filter coefficient can well overcome weak signal interference under strong signals.

l Hysteresis is mainly used to overcome interference with the strength within a certain range,especially ping-pong handover at the verge of a cell.

l Time-to-trigger can overcome burst signal interference effectively.


The greater the value of the hysteresis, the more difficult the handover occurs. However, if thevalue of hysteresis increases, the call drop risk increases.

Relevant Commands






2.1.8 Minimum Quality Threshold of Soft HandoverWhen the RNC receives event 1A, 1C and 1D, it can be added to the active set only when CPICHEc/Io of the target cell is greater than this absolute threshold.

Parameter ID

SHOQualmin

Value Range

-24 to 0


-24 dB to 0 dB, step 1 dB

Parameter Setting

The default value is -24, namely, -24 dB.

Purpose of setting this parameter is that:

If the signal added to the cell is too poor in quality, there is no apparent contribution to generalquality of the active set, more downlink resources are occupied, and more TPC bit errors areintroduced. On the contrary, the soft handover performance is deteriorated. Therefore, a basicquality requirement should be worked out for the added radio link.

Setting of this parameter is related with the power distribution rate of public channels and thedemodulation capability of UEs.


Adjust this parameter according to the Ec/Io that the cell soft handover area reaches as expectedat network planning.l The greater this parameter is set, the more difficult for the neighboring cell to join in the

active set, but the service quality of the joining cell can be ensured.l The less this parameter is set, the easier for the neighboring cell to join in the active set,

but a too-low parameter cannot restrict the service quality of the cell.

Relevant Commands

For RNC-oriented intra-frequency handover algorithm parameter: set it through SETINTRAFREQHO, and query it through LST INTRAFREQHO.

For cell-oriented intra-frequency handover algorithm parameter: add it through ADDCELLINTRAFREQHO, query it through LST CELLINTRAFREQHO, and modify itthrough MOD CELLINTRAFREQHO.



2.1.9 Affect 1A and 1B Event Thresholds FlagSwitch CellsForbidden1A affects the relevant threshold of event 1A and SwitchCellsForbidden1B affects the relevant threshold of event 1B.

Parameter IDCellsForbidden1A

CellsForbidden1B

Value RangeNOT_AFFECT, AFFECT

Physical Value RangeNone.

Parameter SettingThe default value is AFFECT.

See the following relative threshold computation formulas of event 1A and 1B. This parameter

determines whether the measurement value Mi of corresponding cell i appears at . If itis AFFECT, then Mi takes part in sum at computation, or else it does not.

Impact on the Network PerformanceWhen the value of W is 0, the state (On or Off) of this switch has no influence on the computationresult.

Relevant CommandsAdd it through ADD INTRAFREQNCELL, query it through LST INTRAFREQNCELL,and modify it through MOD INTRAFREQNCELL.

2.1.10 Cell Individual OffsetIt is the CPICH measured value offset of intra-frequency handover cells.

Parameter IDCellIndividalOffset






Parameter SettingThe default value is 0 dB.

The sum of this value and the actual measured value is used in the UE event estimation. The UEuses the sum of the original cell measured value and this offset as the measurement result forthe UE intra-frequency handover decision. It plays the role of shifting the cell boarder in thehandover algorithm. This parameter is configured according to the actual environment in thenetwork planning. In the neighboring cell configuration, set this parameter to a positive value ifhandover is expected to occur easily; otherwise, set it to a negative value.

The function of this parameter is to move the cell edge and configured according to actualenvironment.

Impact on the Network Performancel The greater this parameter, the more easily soft handover occurs, and the more UEs in the

soft handover state, but the more forward resources occupied.l The less this parameter is, the more difficultly soft handover occurs, which is likely to affect

the receiving quality.

Relevant CommandsAdd it through ADD INTRAFREQNCELL, query it through LST INTRAFREQNCELL,and modify it through MOD INTRAFREQNCELL.

2.2 Inter-Frequency Handover ParametersThe common configurable inter-frequency handover parameters are listed here.

Table 2-2 List of inter-frequency handover parameters

No. Parameter ID ParameterMeaning

DefaultValue

RelevantCommand

Level

1 InterFreqReportMode

Inter-Frequencymeasurementreport mode

Periodical_reporting

For RNCSet or modify:SETINTERFREQHOCOVQuery: LSTINTERFREQHOCOVFor Cell

RNCCell

2 InterFreqMeasQuantity

Inter-Frequencymeasurementquantity

BOTH




DefaultValue

RelevantCommand

Level

3 InterFreqFilter-Coef

Inter-Frequencymeasurementfilter coefficient

Set: ADDCELLINTERFREQHOCOVQuery: LSTCELLINTERFREQHOCOVModify: MODCELLINTERFREQHOCOV

D3

4 WeightForUsedFreq

Frequencyweighting factor

0

5 Hystfor2BHystfor2DHystfor2FHystforHHO

Hysteresis relatedto inter-frequencyhandover

Hystfor2B,Hystfor2D,Hystfor2F: 4(2 dB)HystforHHO: 0 (0 dB)

6 TrigTime2BTrigTime2DTrigTime2FTrigTimeHHO

Time-to-Triggerrelated to inter-frequency hardhandover

TrigTime2B:D0TrigTime2D:D320TrigTime2F:D1280TrigTimeHHO: 0

7 InterFreqCSThd2FRSCPInterFreqPSThd2FRSCPInterFreqCSThd2DRSCPInterFreqPSThd2DRSCP

RSCP-Basedinter-frequencymeasurementstart/stopthresholds

2D: -95 dBm;2F: -92 dBm

8 InterFreqCSThd2FEcNoInterFreqPSThd2FEcNoInterFreqCSThd2DEcNoInterFreqPSThd2DEcNo

Ec/No-basedinter-frequencymeasurementstart/stopthresholds

2D: -16 dB2F: -12 dB





DefaultValue

RelevantCommand

Level

9 InterFreqCovHOCSThdRSCPInterFreqCovHOPSThdRSCPInterFreqCovHOCSThdEcN0InterFreqCovHOPSThdEcN0

Target frequencytrigger thresholdof inter-frequencycoverage

RSCP: -92dBmEc/No: -12dB

10 IFHOUsedFreqCSThdRSCPIFHOUsedFreqCSThdRSCPIFHOUsedFreqCSThdEcNoIFHOUsedFreqPSThdEcNo

Current usedfrequency qualitythreshold of inter-frequencyhandover


11 HHORSCPminHHOEcNomin

Inter-frequencymeasurementminimum accessthresholds




0 dB Set: ADDINTERFREQNCELLQuery: LSTINTERFREQNCELLModify: MODINTERFREQNCELL

NCell

13 INTERFREQRATSWITCH

Inter-Freq andInter-RAT coexistswitch

InterFreq Set: ADDCELLHOCOMMQuery: LSTCELLHOCOMMModify: MODCELLHOCOMM

Cell




DefaultValue

RelevantCommand

Level

14 CoExistMeasThdChoice

InterFreq andInterRAT coexistmeasure thresholdchoice

COEXIST_MEAS_THD_CHOICE_INTERFREQ

For RNC: SETINTERFREQHOCOVLSTINTERFREQHOCOVFor Cell:ADDCELLHOCOMMLSTCELLHOCOMMMODCELLHOCOMM

RNC/Cell

15 INTERFREQMEASTIME

Inter-freq measuretimer length[s]

60 s Set: ADDCELLINTERFREQHOCOVQuery: LSTCELLINTERFREQHOCOVModify: MODCELLINTERFREQHOCOV

Cell

2.2.1 Inter-Frequency Measurement Report ModeIn the inter-frequency handover based on coverage, this parameter is used to select the periodicalreport or event trigger mode for inter-frequency measurement report.

2.2.2 Inter-Frequency Measurement ItemThis parameter is used to determine whether to select Ec/No or RSCP as the measurement item.The selection is performed when the inter-frequency measurement, such as 2D/2F event andperiodic measurement, is conducted in a cell.

2.2.3 Inter-Frequency Measurement Layer 3 Filter CoefficientsIt is the measurement smoothing factor adopted in Layer 3 inter-frequency filtering.

2.2.4 Frequency Weighting FactorThis parameter is used to determine proportions of the optimal cell and other cells in the activeset at calculation of the frequency integrated quality.

2.2.5 Hysteresis Related to Inter-Frequency HandoverThese parameters are trigger hysteresis for events 2B, 2D, 2F and hard handover (HHO).

2.2.6 Time to Trigger Related to Inter-Frequency Hard HandoverThese parameters are trigger delay time for events 2B, 2D, 2F and hard handover (HHO) incoverage-oriented inter frequency handover.

2.2.7 RSCP-Based Inter-Frequency Measurement Start/Stop Thresholds




In the coverage-based inter-frequency handover, when the periodical inter-frequencymeasurement reporting mode is adopted, this parameter corresponds to inter-frequencymeasurement event absolute thresholds when RSCP is used for measurement, including event2D absolute threshold and event 2F absolute threshold.

2.2.8 EC/No-based Inter-Frequency Measurement Start/Stop ThresholdsIn the coverage-based inter-frequency handover, this parameter corresponds to inter-frequencymeasurement event absolute thresholds when Ec/No is used for measurement.

2.2.9 Target Frequency Trigger Threshold of Inter-Frequency CoverageWhen the event reporting mode is adopted for inter-frequency handover in the coverage-basedinter-frequency handover, this parameter is used as the mandatory threshold requirementsatisfied by target frequency quality when event 2B is triggered, and it is one of the mandatoryconditions for triggering event 2B. If the periodical reporting mode is adopted, this parameteris used as the absolute threshold of inter-frequency hard handover event.

2.2.10 Current Used Frequency Quality Threshold of Inter-Frequency HandoverWhen the event reporting mode is adopted for inter-frequency handover, these parameters areused for measurement control of event 2B. Only when the quality of used frequency is poorerthan this threshold, one of the mandatory conditions for triggering event 2B is satisfied.

2.2.11 Inter-Frequency Measurement Minimum Access ThresholdsWhen the periodical reporting mode is selected for inter-frequency coverage handover, thequality measurement value of inter-frequency cell should satisfy the inter-frequency handoverabsolute value. Moreover, its RSCP and EcNo quality must satisfy the minimum accessthreshold, so inter-frequency handover may take place. The minimum access thresholdcorresponding to RSCP is HHORSCPmin, and that corresponding to EcNo is HHOEcNomin.

2.2.12 Cell Individual OffsetIt is the cell offset for inter-frequency handover.

2.2.13 Inter-Frequency/Inter-RAT Algorithm SwitchesThis describes how to perform neighbor measurement if a cell has both inter-frequency and inter-RAT cells as its neighbors.

2.2.14 Inter-Frequency/Inter-RAT Measurement Threshold ChoiceThis parameter determines what configuration parameters for events 2D and 2F should be chosenbased on measurement types when a cell has both inter-frequency and inter-RAT neighbors.

2.2.15 Inter-Frequency Measure Timer LengthThis parameter determines what configuration parameters for events 2D and 2F should be chosenbased on measurement types when a cell has both inter-frequency and inter-RAT neighbors.

2.2.1 Inter-Frequency Measurement Report ModeIn the inter-frequency handover based on coverage, this parameter is used to select the periodicalreport or event trigger mode for inter-frequency measurement report.

Parameter ID

InterFreqReportMode

Value Range

Enum (Periodical_reporting, Event_trigger)



Physical Value RangePeriodical_reporting indicates adoption of the periodical reporting mode.

Event_trigger indicates adoption of the event trigger mode.

Parameter SettingThe default value is Periodical_reporting.

There are two optional inter-frequency handover report modes in RNC: event report andperiodical report, which are selected through the inter-frequency report mode switch. Thisalgorithm switch is oriented to RNC configuration.

l Event report:To prevent ping-pong before and after inter-frequency handover, use 2B event (when thecurrent in-use frequency quality is less than the absolute threshold used frequency qualitythreshold, the non-used frequency quality is greater than the other absolute thresholdtarget frequency trigger threshold) as the trigger event for judging origination of inter-frequency handover. As the 2B event has no event transfer period, the retry function afterhandover failure is not implemented, unless this cell can trigger 2B event again.

l Periodical report:Use events 2D and 2F as the compressed mode to start and stop event, and periodicallyreport the measurement result of inter-frequency neighboring cell in the compressed modeperiod. When the cell quality reported by UE is greater than the sum of an absolute thresholdand the relative hysteresis, the delay trigger timer starts. If the requirement is alwayssatisfied when the timer is expired, inter-frequency handover is started after the delaytrigger timer is expired. If handover fails, handover judging continues in accordance withthe inter-frequency measurement periodical report.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe periodical report and event report modes have their own advantages and disadvantages. Atpresent, the traditional periodical report mode is still adopted.

Relevant CommandsParameter oriented to RNC inter-frequency handover algorithm: set it through SETINTERFREQHOCOV, and query it through LST INTERFREQHOCOV.

Parameter oriented to cell inter-frequency handover algorithm: add it through ADDCELLINTERFREQHOCOV, query it through LST CELLINTERFREQHOCOV, andmodify it through MOD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV.

2.2.2 Inter-Frequency Measurement ItemThis parameter is used to determine whether to select Ec/No or RSCP as the measurement item.The selection is performed when the inter-frequency measurement, such as 2D/2F event andperiodic measurement, is conducted in a cell.

Parameter IDInterFreqMeasQuantity




Value RangeEnum (CPICH Ec_No, CPICH_RSCP, and BOTH)

Physical Value RangeNone

Parameter SettingThe default setting is BOTH.

This parameter indicates the inter-frequency measurement items that are used for inter-frequencyhard handover evaluation. These items are the 2D event, the 2F event, the 2B event, and theinter-frequency measurement item used for periodic measurement.

In addition, this parameter determines the measurement items used for evaluating the quality offrequencies. These frequencies are used for the 2D or 2F event stopped during the start of inter-system measurement and the 3A event. On the primary stage of the 3G coverage, the fullcoverage is difficult to fulfill. Some areas such as indoor area still require the GSM system tocover. Thus, the recommended value for this parameter is CPICHRSCP in this situation.

In the measurement policy of the intra-frequency soft handover, the Ec/N0 of the pilot channelserves as the measurement item for handover. In the cells on the edge of bearer coverage,however, it is improper to still use Ec/N0 as the measurement item for inter-frequency hardhandover. The value of the measurement item Ec/N0 is determined by the RSCP strength of thepilot signal and the downlink interference.

The downlink interference of the WCDMA system are mainly the background noise and thedownlink signal interference of intra-frequency cells such as local cells and neighboring cells.The downlink interference strength of intra-frequency cells are affected by path loss and slowfading, which is analogous to the fading of the signals (such as CPICHRSCP) received by anUE. On the edge of the coverage area of a bearer, the fading speed of CPICHRSCP is basicallythe same as the fading speed of interference when an UE in the current bearer cell moves toanother bearer cell that is related to the cell currently used by the UE. Because the backgroundnoise is not affected by path loss, the fading speed of CPICH RSCP is slightly faster, dependingon the strength of background noise. Thus, the UE receives the change of CPICH Ec/I0 veryslowly. Both the simulation result and the actual test result prove that CPICH Ec/I0 can reach-12 dB when CPICH RSCP received by an UE reaches about -110 dBm. According to therelevant protocol, the minimum demodulation sensitivity of an UE is -117 dBm. Therefore, ifonly Ec/I0 is used, inter-frequency measurement may not be started in the event of a call drop.

To solve this problem, you must add the selection control of the inter-frequency measurementitems of cells. That is, you must use CPICH RSCP as the measurement items of inter-frequencycells for the cells on the edge of bearer coverage. For the central area of bearer coverage, youcan still use CPICHEc/N0 as an inter-frequency measurement item. This can enable instant inter-frequency handover to avoid call drop in the event of an intra-frequency handover failure.



CAUTIONThe value BOTH ensures the higher adaptability for triggering the 2D event. It can also be usedfor measuring RSCP and EcN0. Thus, BOTH is regarded as the default setting. Two active setsof measurement items are delivered simultaneously. One 2D/2F measurement item is set toCPICH_EcN0. The other item is set to CPICH_RSCP. The 2D event report of eithermeasurement item can trigger the delivery of inter-frequency measurement control.

Impact on Network Performance

This parameter is set on the basis of cell location in the network and whether the inter-systemneighboring cells exist.

Relevant Commands

RNC-oriented inter-frequency handover algorithm parameters: use the SETINTERFREQHOCOV command for configuration and use the LSTINTERFREQHOCOV command for query.

Cell-oriented inter-frequency handover algorithm parameters: use theADDCELLINTERFREQHOCOV command for addition, the LSTCELLINTERFREQHOCOV command for query, and theMODCELLINTERFREQHOCOV command for modification.

2.2.3 Inter-Frequency Measurement Layer 3 Filter CoefficientsIt is the measurement smoothing factor adopted in Layer 3 inter-frequency filtering.

Parameter ID

InterFreqFilterCoef

Value Range

Enum (D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8, D9, D11, D13, D15, D17, D19), working range:Enum(D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8)


Enum (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19)

Parameter Setting

The default value is D3，namely 3.

The physical meaning and measurement model of this parameter are the same as those of intra-frequency measurement; what is different is that the report cycle of inter-frequency measurementis 480 ms, while the report cycle of intra-frequency measurement is 200 ms. In inter-frequencymeasurement, according the different types of cells, the CPICH RSCP or CPICH Ec/No is likelyto be adopted. Filter coefficient corresponding to different measurement has little difference.




Impact on the Network Performancel The greater this parameter, the stronger the signal smoothing effect, and the stronger the

fast fading resistance capability, but the weaker the signal change tracing capability, whichmay result in call drop if handover is not implemented timely.

l If the setting of this parameter is too low, the probability of unnecessary hard handover andping-pong handover increases.

Relevant CommandsFor RNC-oriented inter-frequency handover algorithm parameter: set it through SETINTERFREQHOCOV, and query it through LST INTERFREQHOCOV.

For cell-oriented inter-frequency handover algorithm parameter: add it through ADDCELLINTERFREQHOCOV, query it through LST CELLINTERFREQHOCOV, andmodify it through MOD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV.


Parameter IDWeightForUsedFreq

Value Range0 to 20

Physical Value Range0 to 2, step 0.1

Parameter SettingThe default value is 0, that is, only the best cell quality in the active set is used as the currentfrequency quality.

WeightForUsedFreq is used for evaluation of events 2B, 2C, 2D and 2F. The carrier qualityevaluation formula is as follows:

Where,

l Qfrequencyj is the estimated quality (dB value) of frequency j;

l Mfrequencyj is the estimated quality (linear value) of frequency j;

l Mij is the measurement result of cell i in the active set of frequency j;

l NA j is the number of cells in the active set of frequency j;



l MBestj is the measurement result of optimal cell in the active set of frequency j;

l Wj is the frequency weighting factor.

To set this parameter, refer to the setting method for intra-frequency handover weighting factorWeight.

Impact on the Network Performancel The greater this parameter, the higher the current frequency quality estimated value under

the same condition, and the more difficult inter-frequency handover occurs.l The less this parameter, the lower the current frequency quality estimated value, and the

easier inter-frequency handover triggered.

Relevant CommandsParameter oriented to RNC inter-frequency handover algorithm: set it through SETINTERFREQHOCOV, and query it through LST INTERFREQHOCOV.

Parameter oriented to cell inter-frequency handover algorithm: add it through ADDCELLINTERFREQHOCOV, query it through LST CELLINTERFREQHOCOV, andmodify it through MOD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV.

2.2.5 Hysteresis Related to Inter-Frequency HandoverThese parameters are trigger hysteresis for events 2B, 2D, 2F and hard handover (HHO).

Parameter IDHystfor2B

Hystfor2D

Hystfor2F

HystforHHO

Value Range0 to 29

Physical Value Range0 to 14.5 dB, step 0.5 dB

Parameter SettingThe default values for Hystfor2B, Hystfor2D and Hystfor2F are 4, namely 2 dB. The defaultvalue for HystforHHO is 0.

Under periodic report mode, the inter-frequency measurement hysteresis is mainly used toovercome the occurrence of ping-pong handover of events 2D (the estimated quality of thecurrent frequency is lower than the threshold) and 2F (the estimated quality of the currentfrequency is higher than the threshold).




Under event report mode, the inter-frequency measurement hysteresis is mainly used to decreasethe frequently handover triggered by event 2B because of radio signal changing.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe greater the hysteresis values, the stronger the signal fluctuation resistance capability, andthe better the ping-pong effect depressed. However, the response speed of the handoveralgorithm to signal changes is weakened at the same time.

Relevant CommandsFor RNC-oriented inter-frequency handover algorithm parameters: set them through SETINTERFREQHOCOV and query them through LST INTERFREQHOCOV.

For cell-oriented inter-frequency handover algorithm parameters: add them through ADDCELLINTERFREQHOCOV, query them through LST CELLINTERFREQHOCOV, andmodify them through MOD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV.

2.2.6 Time to Trigger Related to Inter-Frequency Hard HandoverThese parameters are trigger delay time for events 2B, 2D, 2F and hard handover (HHO) incoverage-oriented inter frequency handover.

Parameter IDTrigTime2B

TrigTime2D

TrigTime2F

TrigTimeHHO

Value RangeValue range of TrigTime2B, TrigTime2D, TrigTime2F is Enum (D0, D10, D20, D40, D60, D80,D100, D120, D160, D200, D240, D320, D640, D1280, D2560, D5000), working range : Enum(D0, D200, D240, D640, D1280, D2560, D5000)

Value range of TrigTimeHHO is 0 to 64000.

Physical Value RangeEnum (0, 10, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 160, 200, 240, 320, 640, 1280, 2560, 5000)ms

Physical value range of TrigTimeHHO is 0 to 64000ms

Parameter SettingThe default values are as follows:l TrigTime2B: D0;

l TrigTime2D: D320;

l TrigTime2F: D1280;



l TrigTimeHHO:0


The greater the time-to-trigger values, the smaller the average handover frequency; but theincrease of the time-to-trigger setting increases the risk of call drop.

Relevant Commands

For RNC-oriented inter-frequency handover algorithm parameters: set them through SETINTERFREQHOCOV and query them through LST INTERFREQHOCOV.


2.2.7 RSCP-Based Inter-Frequency Measurement Start/StopThresholds

In the coverage-based inter-frequency handover, when the periodical inter-frequencymeasurement reporting mode is adopted, this parameter corresponds to inter-frequencymeasurement event absolute thresholds when RSCP is used for measurement, including event2D absolute threshold and event 2F absolute threshold.

Current FrequencyMeasurement Value

UE RNC

lower than the event 2Dabsolute threshold

reports event 2D sends signaling to start thecompressed mode and begininter-frequencymeasurement

higher than the event 2Fabsolute threshold

repots event 2F sends signaling to close thecompressed mode and stopinter-frequencymeasurement

Parameter ID

Based on different bearer data domains, it can be:

InterFreqCSThd2DRSCP (the CS inter-frequency measurement start threshold indicated byRSCP)

InterFreqCSThd2FRSCP (the CS inter-frequency measurement close threshold indicated byRSCP)

InterFreqPSThd2DRSCP (the PS inter-frequency measurement start threshold indicated byRSCP)

InterFreqPSThd2FRSCP (the PS inter-frequency measurement close threshold indicated byRSCP)





Physical Value Range-115 dBm to -25 dBm, step 1 dBm

Parameter Settingl The default values of InterFreqCSThd2DRSCP, InterFreqPSThd2DRSCP are -95, namely

-95 dBm.l The default values of InterFreqCSThd2FRSCP, InterFreqPSThd2FRSCP are -92, namely

-92 dBm.

The inter-frequency measurement start threshold (which is the compressed mode start threshold)is the most critical parameter in the inter-frequency handover policy. This set of parametersinfluence the proportion of users in cells entering the compressed mode and the success rate ofhard handover. The following factors should be considered in the setting of this set of parameters:

l UE moving speed

l cell radius

l path loss

Impact on the Network PerformanceEvents 2D and 2F are the start and stop switches of the compressed mode. When the cell is atthe verge of carrier coverage, the RSCP measured values are used as the decision criterion for2D and 2F. Therefore, lower the 2D thresholds if the compressed mode is expected to start asearly as possible. To reduce the ping-pong start and stop of the compressed mode, increaseappropriately the difference between the thresholds of the 2D and 2F.



2.2.8 EC/No-based Inter-Frequency Measurement Start/StopThresholds

In the coverage-based inter-frequency handover, this parameter corresponds to inter-frequencymeasurement event absolute thresholds when Ec/No is used for measurement.

Parameter IDInterFreqCSThd2DEcNo (CS inter-frequency measurement start threshold indicated by Ec/No)

InterFreqCSThd2FEcNo (CS inter-frequency measurement close threshold indicated by Ec/No)

InterFreqPSThd2DEcNo (PS inter-frequency measurement start threshold indicated by Ec/No)



InterFreqPSThd2FEcNo (PS inter-frequency measurement close threshold indicated by Ec/No)

Value Range-24 to 0

Physical Value Range-24 dB to 0 dB, step 1 dB

Parameter Settingl The default values of InterFreqCSThd2DecNo and InterFreqPSThd2DecNo are -16,

namely -16 dBl The default values for InterFreqCSThd2FEcNo and InterFreqPSThd2FecNo are -12,

namely -12 dB.

For the detailed descriptions, refer to 2.2.7 RSCP-Based Inter-Frequency MeasurementStart/Stop Thresholds.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe events 2D and 2F are the compressed mode start/stop switches. When the cell is at the carriercoverage center, Ec/No measured value is taken as the decision criterion for events 2D and 2F.Therefore, set the event 2D threshold to a relatively greater value if the compressed mode isexpected to start as early as possible; otherwise, set it to a relatively less value. To control theping-pong effect of the compressed mode start/stop, increase appropriately the differencebetween the thresholds for events 2D and 2F.



2.2.9 Target Frequency Trigger Threshold of Inter-FrequencyCoverage

When the event reporting mode is adopted for inter-frequency handover in the coverage-basedinter-frequency handover, this parameter is used as the mandatory threshold requirementsatisfied by target frequency quality when event 2B is triggered, and it is one of the mandatoryconditions for triggering event 2B. If the periodical reporting mode is adopted, this parameteris used as the absolute threshold of inter-frequency hard handover event.

Parameter IDInterFreqCovHOCSThdEcNo (target frequency Ec/No trigger threshold of CS service)

InterFreqCovHOCSThdRSCP (target frequency RSCP trigger threshold of CS service)

InterFreqCovHOPSThdEcNo (target frequency Ec/No trigger threshold of PS service)




InterFreqCovHOPSThdRSCP (target frequency RSCP trigger threshold of PS service)

Value RangeInterFreqCovHOCSThdEcNo and InterFreqCovHOPSThdEcNo: -24 to 0

InterFreqCovHOCSThdRSCP and InterFreqCovHOPSThdRSCP: -115 to -25

Physical Value RangeInterFreqCovHOCSThdEcNo and InterFreqCovHOPSThdEcNo: -24 dB to 0 dB

InterFreqCovHOCSThdRSCP and InterFreqCovHOPSThdRSCP: -115 dBm to -25 dBm

Parameter SettingThe default values of InterFreqCovHOCSThdEcNo and InterFreqCovHOPSThdEcNo are -12dB.

The default values of InterFreqCovHOCSThdRSCP and InterFreqCovHOPSThdRSCP are -92dBm.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe greater the parameters are, the more difficult hard handover occurs.

Relevant CommandsFor parameters oriented to RNC inter-frequency handover algorithm: set them through SETINTERFREQHOCOV, and query them through LST INTERFREQHOCOV.

For parameters oriented to cell inter-frequency handover algorithm: add them through ADDCELLINTERFREQHOCOV, query them through LST CELLINTERFREQHOCOV, andmodify them through MOD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV.

2.2.10 Current Used Frequency Quality Threshold of Inter-Frequency Handover

When the event reporting mode is adopted for inter-frequency handover, these parameters areused for measurement control of event 2B. Only when the quality of used frequency is poorerthan this threshold, one of the mandatory conditions for triggering event 2B is satisfied.

Parameter IDBased on different inter-frequency measurement quantities in use and different borne services,it can be:

IFHOUsedFreqCSThdEcNo (used frequency Ec/No quality threshold of CS service)

IFHOUsedFreqPSThdEcNo (used frequency Ec/No quality threshold of PS service)

IFHOUsedFreqCSThdRSCP (used frequency RSCP quality threshold of CS service)

IFHOUsedFreqCSThdRSCP (used frequency RSCP quality threshold of PS service)



Value Range

IFHOUsedFreqCSThdEcNo and IFHOUsedFreqPSThdEcNo: -24 to 0

IFHOUsedFreqCSThdRSCP and IFHOUsedFreqCSThdRSCP: -115 to -25


IFHOUsedFreqCSThdECNo and IFHOUsedFreqPSThdECNo: -24 dB to 0 dB, step 1 dB

IFHOUsedFreqCSThdRSCP and IFHOUsedFreqCSThdRSCP: -115 dBm to -25 dBm, step 1dBm

Parameter Setting

The default values of IFHOUsedFreqCSThdEcNo and IFHOUsedFreqPSThdEcNo are -12 dB.

The default values of IFHOUsedFreqCSThdRSCP and IFHOUsedFreqCSThdRSCP are -92dBm.

Factors to be considered while setting these parameters:

The cell signal quality of current frequency is poor and cannot better satisfy the coveragerequirement of current service. After handover is completed, it is hard to hand over to the currentused frequency cell again even inter-frequency measurement is started again. In other words,these parameters should be set less than the trigger threshold of event 2F, or equal to the thresholdof event 2D.


Higher values of these parameters get event 2B to be more easily triggered.

Relevant Commands

For parameters oriented to RNC inter-frequency handover algorithm: set them through SETINTERFREQHOCOV, and query them through LST INTERFREQHOCOV.


2.2.11 Inter-Frequency Measurement Minimum Access ThresholdsWhen the periodical reporting mode is selected for inter-frequency coverage handover, thequality measurement value of inter-frequency cell should satisfy the inter-frequency handoverabsolute value. Moreover, its RSCP and EcNo quality must satisfy the minimum accessthreshold, so inter-frequency handover may take place. The minimum access thresholdcorresponding to RSCP is HHORSCPmin, and that corresponding to EcNo is HHOEcNomin.

Parameter ID

HHORSCPmin

HHOEcNomin




Value RangeHHOEcNomin: -24 to 0

HHORSCPmin: -115 to -25

Physical Value RangeHHOEcNomin: -24 dB to 0 dB, step 1 dB

HHORSCPmin: -115 dBm to -25 dBm, step 1 dBm

Parameter SettingThe default value of HHOEcNomin is -16 dB, and the default value of HHORSCPmin is -115dBm.

The minimum quality requirements for EcNo and RSCP ensure that the target cell quality is nottoo poor.

Impact on the Network Performancel The greater these parameters, the more difficult the inter-frequency handover occurs, but

the quality after handover can be ensured.l The less these parameters, the looser the inter-frequency handover requirement, but it may

lead to handover to a poor cell and occurrence of ping-pong handover.

Relevant CommandsFor parameters oriented to RNC inter-frequency handover algorithm: set them through SETINTERFREQHOCOV, and query them through LST INTERFREQHOCOV.


2.2.12 Cell Individual OffsetIt is the cell offset for inter-frequency handover.




Parameter SettingThe default value is 0 dB.



It is the CPICH measurement offset of neighboring cell. The UE uses the sum of the originalmeasurement value of the cell and this offset as the measurement result for the UE inter-frequency handover decision. This parameter plays the role of moving the cell boarder in thehandover algorithm.

This parameter is configured according to the actual environment in the network planning. Inthe neighboring cell configuration, set this parameter to a positive value if handover is expectedto occur easily; otherwise, set it to a negative value.

Impact on the Network Performancel The greater this parameter, the more easily inter-frequency hard handover occurs.

l The less this parameter, the more difficult hard handover occurs.

Relevant Commands

Set this parameter through ADD INTERFREQNCELL, query it through LSTINTERFREQNCELL, and modify it through MOD INTERFREQNCELL.

2.2.13 Inter-Frequency/Inter-RAT Algorithm SwitchesThis describes how to perform neighbor measurement if a cell has both inter-frequency and inter-RAT cells as its neighbors.

Parameter ID

InterFreqRATSwitch

Value Range

Enum(InterFreq, InterRAT, SimInterFreqRAT)


Only the inter-frequency neighbors are measured. Only the inter-RAT neighbors are measured.The inter-frequency neighbors and the inter-RAT neighbors are measured at the same time.

Parameter Setting

The default setting is InterFreq.

For a cell having both inter-frequency neighbors and inter-RAT neighbors, configure the cellbased on the actual handover policy.

InterFreq: measures only the inter-frequency cells and conducts inter-frequency handover.InterRAT: conducts only the inter-RAT handover for the cells only in the GSM network.SimInterFreqRAT: measures the inter-frequency and inter-RAT cells simultaneously. For theSimInterFreqRAT, the time for handover depends on what cells have the highest handoverpriority.

The algorithm switch is invalid when only inter-frequency cells or inter-RAT cells are available.




Impact on the Network PerformanceThis parameter determines the cell handover policy in case inter-frequency neighbors co-existwith inter-RAT neighbors. Configure this parameter for each cell.

Relevant CommandsThis parameter is a cell-oriented handover global parameter. Set this parameter through ADDCELLHOCOMM, query it through LST CELLHOCOMM, and modify it through MODCELLHOCOMM.

2.2.14 Inter-Frequency/Inter-RAT Measurement Threshold ChoiceThis parameter determines what configuration parameters for events 2D and 2F should be chosenbased on measurement types when a cell has both inter-frequency and inter-RAT neighbors.

Parameter IDCoExistMeasThdChoice

Value RangeCOEXIST_MEAS_THD_CHOICE_INTERFREQ,COEXIST_MEAS_THD_CHOICE_INTERRAT

Physical Value RangeCOEXIST_MEAS_THD_CHOICE_INTERFREQ: indicates that 2D and 2F measurementthreshold parameters orientated to inter-frequency are chosen as thresholds for cell subscribersto enable or disable the compress mode.

COEXIST_MEAS_THD_CHOICE_INTERRAT: indicates that 2D and 2F measurementthreshold parameters orientated to inter-RAT are chosen as thresholds for cell subscribers toenable or disable the compress mode.

Parameter SettingThe default setting is COEXIST_MEAS_THD_CHOICE_INTERFREQ.

During the setting, take into account the following items: Thresholds for 2D and 2F events ininter-frequency and inter-RAT systems, thresholds for the inter-frequency or inter-RAThandover, and current handover policies. For instance, you plan to choose inter-frequencyneighbors when the inter-frequency and inter-RAT neighbors coexist, you can choose themeasurement threshold parameters for the inter-frequency in case the threshold for an inter-RAT2D event is greater than that for an inter-frequency 2D event.

Impact on the Network PerformanceSet based on actual network handover policies.

Relevant CommandsParameter oriented to the RNC inter-frequency handover algorithm: set it through SETHOCOMM and query it through LST HOCOMM.



Parameter oriented to cell handover algorithm: add it through ADD CELLHOCOMM, queryit through LST CELLHOCOMM, and modify it through MOD CELLHOCOMM.

2.2.15 Inter-Frequency Measure Timer LengthThis parameter determines what configuration parameters for events 2D and 2F should be chosenbased on measurement types when a cell has both inter-frequency and inter-RAT neighbors.

Parameter ID

INTERFREQMEASTIME

Value Range

Integer: 1 to 512


Integer: 1 s to 512 s

Parameter Setting

The default value is 60 s.

The expiration length for inter-frequency measurement timer. The system stops inter-frequencymeasurement and disables the compressed mode if enabled, if no inter-frequency handoveroccurs upon expiry of the inter-frequency measurement timer.

This parameter is used to prevent a cell from being in inter-frequency measurement state for along time, for the cell cannot find a target cell that meets the measurement requirements.


This parameter is used to reduce the impact on serving cells by shortening the time for modecompression.

Closing the compress mode in advance results in UE's failure to initiate an inter-frequencyhandover. The coverage-based inter-frequency handover may lead to call drops.

Relevant Commands

Parameter oriented to the cell inter-frequency handover algorithm, add it through ADDCELLINTERFREQHOCOV, query it through LST CELLINTERFREQHOCOV, andmodify it through MOD CELLINTERFREQHOCOV.

2.3 Coverage-Based Inter-RAT Handover ManagementParameters

The common configurable coverage-based inter-RAT handover management parameters arelisted here.




Table 2-3 List of coverage-based inter-RAT handover management parameters

No. ParameterID

ParameterMeaning

DefaultValue

RelevantCommand

Level

1 InterRATFilterCoef2D2FFilterCoef

Inter-RATmeasurementfilter coefficient

D3 For RNCSet or modify: SETINTERRATHOCOVQuery: LSTINTERRATHOCOVFor CellSet: ADDCELLINTERRATHOCOVQuery: LSTCELLINTERRATHOCOVModify: MODCELLINTERRATHOCOV

RNCCell

2 InterRATReportMode

Inter-RATmeasurementreport mode

Periodical_reporting

3 WeightForUsedFreq

Frequencyweighting factor

0

4 InterPeriodReportInterval

Inter-RAT periodreport interval

D1000(1000 ms)

5 BSICVerify BSIC verifyselection switch

Require

6 2D2FMeasQuantity3AMeasQuantity

Inter-RATmeasurementquantity

2D2FMeasQuantity:BOTH3AMeasQuantity:CPICH_RSCP

7 InterRATCSThd2DRSCPInterRATPSThd2DRSCPInterRATCSThd2FRSCPInterRATPSThd2FRSCP

RSCP-Basedinter-RATmeasurementstart/stopthresholds

InterRatCSThd2DRscp: -100 (dBm)InterRatPSThd2DRscp:-110 (dBm)InterRatCSThd2FRscp:-97 (dBm)InterRatPSThd2FRscp:-107 (dBm)



No. ParameterID

ParameterMeaning

DefaultValue

RelevantCommand

Level

8 InterRATCSThd2DEcN0InterRATPSThd2DEcN0InterRATCSThd2FEcN0InterRATPSThd2FEcN0

Ec/No-Basedinter-RATmeasurementstart/stopthresholds

InterRATCSThd2DEcN0: -14 (dB)InterRATPSThd2DEcN0: -15 (dB)InterRATCSThd2FEcN0: -12 (dB)InterRATPSThd2FEcN0: -13 (dB)

9 InterRATCovHOCSThdInterRATCovHOPSThd

Inter-RAThandover judgingthresholds

16, that is,-95 dBm

10 TrigTime2DTrigTime2FTrigTime3A

Time-to-Triggerrelated to inter-RAT handoverevent

TRIGTIME2D: D320TRIGTIME2F: D1280TRIGTIME3A: D0

11 Hystfor3AHystfor2DHystfor2FHystforInterRAT

Hysteresis relatedwith inter-RAThandovercoverage

2D/2F/3A: 4(2 dB)HystforInterRAT: 0(0dB)

12 TimeToTrigForVerify

Time-to-Triggerfor verified GSMcell

0, that is,handoverimmediately

13 TimeToTrigForNonVerify

Time-to-Triggerfor non-verifiedGSM cell

65535, thatis, handoverto non-verifiedGSM cell isforbidden

14 PenaltyTimeforInterRATHO

Penalty time forinter-RAThandover

30 s




No. ParameterID

ParameterMeaning

DefaultValue

RelevantCommand

Level



0 dB Set: ADDGSMNCELLQuery: LSTGSMNCELLModify: MODGSMNCELL

NCell

16 IRHOUsedFreqCSThdEcN0IRHOUsedFreqPSThdEcN0IRHOUsedFreqCSThdRSCPIRHOUsedFreqPSThdRSCP

Inter-RAT CSused frequencytrigger Ec/NothresholdInter-RAT PSused frequencytrigger Ec/NothresholdInter-RAT CSused frequencytrigger RSCPthresholdInter-RAT PSused frequencytrigger RSCPthreshold

IRHOUsedFreqCsThdEcN0: -12(dB)IRHOUsedFreqPsThdEcN0: -13(dB)IRHOUsedFreqCsThdRscp: -97(dBm)IRHOUsedFreqPsThdRscp: -107(dBm)

For RNCSet or modify: SETINTERRATHOCOVQuery: LSTINTERRATHOCOVFor CellSet: ADDCELLINTERRATHOCOVQuery: LSTCELLINTERRATHOCOVModify: MODCELLINTERRATHOCOV

RNCCell

17 InterRATMeasTime

Inter-RATmeasure timerlength

60 s

2.3.1 Inter-RAT Measurement L3 Filter CoefficientsIn the inter-RAT handover based on coverage, these parameters refer to the measurement smoothcoefficient adopted at L3 inter-RAT measurement report filtering and the measurement smoothcoefficient adopted at events 2D and 2F report.

2.3.2 Inter-RAT Measurement Report ModeIn the coverage-based inter-RAT handover, this parameter is used to select the periodical reportor event trigger mode for inter-RAT measurement report.


2.3.4 Inter-RAT Period Report IntervalThe parameter is used to determine the measurement report interval when the inter-RATmeasurement report mode chooses Periodical_Reporting.

2.3.5 BSIC Verify Selection SwitchThis parameter is used to control the inter-RAT measurement report cell. If it is set to Require,report is allowed only after the measured GSM cell identity code (BSIC) is correctly decoded.If it is set to Not_Require, then all the measured cells can be reported so long as they satisfy theabove report condition, regardless of their BSICs correctly decoded or not.



2.3.6 Inter-RAT Measurement QuantityParameter 2D2FMeasQuantity is used to configure events 2D and 2F measurement quantityfor starting and stopping inter-RAT measurement, including EcNo and RSCP. Parameter3AMeasQuantity is used to configure event 3A measurement quantity for inter-RATmeasurement, including EcNo and RSCP.

2.3.7 RSCP-Based Inter-RAT Measurement Start/Stop ThresholdsThis set of parameters correspond to the absolute thresholds of the inter-RAT measurementevents when RSCP is used for measurement.

2.3.8 Ec/No-Based Inter-RAT Measurement Start/Stop ThresholdsThis set of parameters correspond to the absolute thresholds of the inter-RAT measurement eventwhen Ec/No is used for measurement.

2.3.9 Inter-RAT Handover Judging ThresholdsInter-RAT handover judging thresholds involve the inter-RAT CS service handover judgingthreshold InterRATCovHOCSThd and the inter-RAT PS service handover judging thresholdInterRATCovHOPSThd.

2.3.10 Time to Trigger Related to Inter-RAT HandoverIn coverage-oriented inter frequency handover, the time-to-trigger parameters include time-to-trigger for 2D (TrigTime2D), time-to-trigger for 2F (TrigTime2F) and time-to-trigger for 3A(TrigTime3A).

2.3.11 Hysteresis Related to Coverage-Based Inter-RAT HandoverIn the coverage-based inter-RAT handover, hystereses triggered by events include 3A hysteresisHystfor3A, 2D hysteresis Hystfor2D, 2F hysteresis Hystfor2F, and inter-RAT handoverhysteresis HystforInterRAT.

2.3.12 Time to Trigger for Verified GSM CellThis parameter refers to the delay trigger time of GSM cell verified already by the BS identitycode BSIC. If the signal quality of GSM neighboring cell always satisfies the inter-RAThandover judging condition in the time range stipulated by this parameter value, and the GSMneighboring cell is in the verified state, the network starts the inter-RAT handover process.

2.3.13 Time to Trigger for Non-verified GSM CellThis parameter represents the delay time for triggering a GSM cell unacknowledged by BSIC.In the period specified by this parameter, if the signal quality of an adjacent GSM cell meets therequirement for inter-RAT handover and this cell is unacknowledged, the network starts inter-RAT handover.

2.3.14 Penalty Time for Inter-RAT HandoverFor inter-RAT handover failure to the GSM cell, possibly it is refused because the load of thiscell is heavy. Therefore, no inter-RAT handover request is sent to this cell in the time rangestipulated by this parameter value.

2.3.15 Cell Individual OffsetThis parameter refers to the inter-RAT handover cell individual offset.

2.3.16 Current Used Frequency Quality Threshold of Inter-RAT HandoverThis parameter is used for measurement control of event 3A when the event reporting mode isadopted for the inter-RAT measurement. Only when the quality of used frequency is poorer thanthis threshold, one of the mandatory conditions for triggering event 3A is satisfied.

2.3.17 Inter-RAT Measure Timer LengthThis parameter defines the valid time for inter-RAT measurement. If the timer cannot find anappropriate inter-RAT cell to initiate the inter-RAT handover, for instance, the event 3A reportis not received or all period reports cannot satisfy the trigger condition for the inter-RAT




handover, the RNC disables the compress mode to release the resources for inter-RATmeasurement and waits for the inter-RAT measurement of the next round.

2.3.1 Inter-RAT Measurement L3 Filter CoefficientsIn the inter-RAT handover based on coverage, these parameters refer to the measurement smoothcoefficient adopted at L3 inter-RAT measurement report filtering and the measurement smoothcoefficient adopted at events 2D and 2F report.

Parameter ID

InterRATFilterCoef

2D2FFilterCoef

Value Range

Enum (D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8, D9, D11, D13, D15, D17, D19)


Enum (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19)

Parameter Setting

The default values for both InterRATFilterCoef and 2D2FFilterCoef are D3, namely 3.

The physical meaning and measurement model of these parameters are the same as those ofinter-frequency measurement, and the reporting periods are 480 ms. For the specific analysis,refer to 2.1.2 Intra-Frequency Measurement L3 Filter Coefficient and 2.2.3 Inter-Frequency Measurement Layer 3 Filter Coefficients.


The greater these parameter, the stronger the effect on signal smoothness, the stronger the fast-fading resistance capability, but the weaker the tracing capability for signal change, and calldrops due to handover failure. If these values are set too low, unnecessary inter-RAT handoveroccurs.

Relevant Commands

For parameters oriented to RNC inter-RAT handover algorithm: set them through SETINTERRATHOCOV, and query them through LST INTERRATHOCOV.

For parameters oriented to cell inter-RAT handover algorithm: add them through ADDCELLINTERRATHOCOV, query them through LST CELLINTERRATHOCOV, andmodify them through MOD CELLINTERRATHOCOV.

2.3.2 Inter-RAT Measurement Report ModeIn the coverage-based inter-RAT handover, this parameter is used to select the periodical reportor event trigger mode for inter-RAT measurement report.



Parameter ID

InterRATReportMode

Value Range

Enum (Periodical_reporting, Event_trigger)


Periodical_reporting indicates adoption of the periodical reporting mode.

Event_trigger indicates adoption of the event trigger mode.

Parameter Setting

The default value is Periodical_reporting.

There are two optional inter-frequency handover report modes in RNC: event report andperiodical report, which are selected through the inter-RAT report mode switch. This algorithmswitch is oriented to RNC configuration.

l Event report:

To prevent ping-pong before and after inter-RAT handover, event 3A (the current usedfrequency quality is lower than the absolute threshold, and the GSM cell level is higherthan the other absolute threshold) is used as the trigger event for judging origination ofinter-RAT handover. To improve the handover success ratio, the GSM cell BSIC of thetrigger event must be decoded correctly by EU. As the event 3A has no event transfer period,the retry function after handover failure is not implemented, unless this cell can triggerevent 3A again.

l Periodical report:

When the level of the GSM cell reported by UE is higher than the inter-RAT event 2Dabsolute threshold + hysteresis, it starts the delay trigger timer. If the clock satisfiesrequirement during timer expires, start the inter-frequency handover after the delay triggertimer is expires. If handover fails, retry in accordance with the inter-RAT measurementperiodical report.


The periodical report and event report modes have their own advantages and disadvantages. Atpresent, the traditional periodical report mode is still adopted.

Relevant Commands

For parameter oriented to RNC inter-RAT handover algorithm: set it through SETINTERRATHOCOV, and query it through LST INTERRATHOCOV.

For parameter oriented to cell inter-RAT handover algorithm: add it through ADDCELLINTERRATHOCOV, query it through LST CELLINTERRATHOCOV, and modifyit through MOD CELLINTERRATHOCOV.





Parameter ID

WeightForUsedFreq

Value Range

0 to 20


0 to 2, step 0.1

Parameter Setting

The default value is 0, that is, only the best cell quality in the active set is used as the currentfrequency quality.

WeightForUsedFreq is used for evaluation of events 2D and 2F. The carrier quality evaluationformula is as follows:

Here,

l Qfrequencyj is the estimated quality (dB value) of frequency j.

l Mfrequencyj is the estimated quality (linear value) of frequency j.

l Mij is the measurement result of cell i in the active set of frequency j.

l NAj is the number of cells in the active set of frequency j.

l MBestj is the measurement result of optimal cell in the active set of frequency j.

l Wj is the frequency weighting factor.

For setting this parameter, refer to the setting method for intra-frequency handover weightingfactor.


l The greater this parameter is, the higher the current frequency quality estimated value iscalculated under the same condition, and the more difficult the inter-frequency handoveroccurs.

l The lower the parameter is, the lower the current frequency quality estimated value is, andthe easier the inter-frequency handover is triggered.



Relevant CommandsParameter oriented to RNC inter-RAT handover algorithm: set it through SETINTERRATHOCOV, and query it through LST INTERRATHOCOV.

Parameter oriented to cell inter-RAT handover algorithm: add it through ADDCELLINTERRATHOCOV, query it through LST CELLINTERRATHOCOV, and modifyit through MOD CELLINTERRATHOCOV.

2.3.4 Inter-RAT Period Report IntervalThe parameter is used to determine the measurement report interval when the inter-RATmeasurement report mode chooses Periodical_Reporting.

Parameter IDInterRATPeriodReportInterval

Value RangeEnum (NON_PERIODIC_REPORT, D250, D500, D1000, D2000, D3000, D4000, D6000,D8000, D12000, D16000, D20000, D24000, D28000, D32000, D64000)

Physical Value RangeEnum (NON_PERIODIC_REPORT, 250 ms, 500 ms, 1000 ms, 2000 ms, 3000 ms, 4000 ms,6000 ms, 8000 ms, 12000 ms, 16000 ms, 20000 ms, 24000 ms, 28000 ms, 32000 ms, 64000 ms)

Parameter SettingThe default value is D1000, namely, 1000 ms.

For the GSM RSSI measurement period is 480 ms, this parameter shall be greater than 480 ms.If this parameter is too high, the handover judging time shall be long.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe bigger the report interval value is, the smaller the number of measurement report will be;but the increase of the report interval setting will increase the risk of call drop.

Relevant CommandsParameter oriented to RNC inter–RAT handover algorithm: set it through SETINTERRATHOCOV, and query it through LST INTERRATHOCOV.

Parameter oriented to cell inter–RAT handover algorithm: add it through ADDCELLINTERRATHOCOV, query it through LST CELLINTERRATHOCOV, and modifyit through MOD CELLINTERRATHOCOV.

2.3.5 BSIC Verify Selection SwitchThis parameter is used to control the inter-RAT measurement report cell. If it is set to Require,report is allowed only after the measured GSM cell identity code (BSIC) is correctly decoded.If it is set to Not_Require, then all the measured cells can be reported so long as they satisfy theabove report condition, regardless of their BSICs correctly decoded or not.




Parameter IDBSICVerify

Value RangeEnum (Require, Not_Require)


Parameter SettingThe default value is Require.

This parameter is valid for both periodical report and event report. To ensure handover reliability,it is recommended to make a report after BSIC verification.

Impact on the Network PerformanceWhen it is set to Not_Require, it is easier for handover to occur, but the handover is not as reliableas in the Require mode.

Relevant CommandsFor parameter oriented to RNC inter-RAT handover algorithm: set it through SETINTERRATHOCOV, and query it through LST INTERRATHOCOV.


2.3.6 Inter-RAT Measurement QuantityParameter 2D2FMeasQuantity is used to configure events 2D and 2F measurement quantityfor starting and stopping inter-RAT measurement, including EcNo and RSCP. Parameter3AMeasQuantity is used to configure event 3A measurement quantity for inter-RATmeasurement, including EcNo and RSCP.

Parameter ID2D2FMeasQuantity

3AMeasQuantity

Value Range2D2FMeasQuantity: Enum (CPICH_EcNo, CPICH_RSCP, BOTH)

3AMeasQuantity: Enum (CPICH_EcNo, CPICH_RSCP)




Parameter SettingThe default value for 2D2FMeasQuantity is BOTH. Both the CPICH_Ec/No and theCPICH_RSCP are criteria for the Active Set Quality. The RNC sends Active Set Measurementcontrol for each measurement quantity. Event 2D and Event 2F are only valid for correspondingmeasurement quantity.

The default value for 3AMeasQuantity is CPICH_RSCP, which means to use the RSCPmeasurement quantity for event 3A measurement. The physical unit is dBm.

Impact on the Network PerformanceSet it based on the cell location in the network.

Relevant CommandsFor parameters oriented to RNC inter-RAT handover algorithm: set them through SETINTERRATHOCOV, and query them through LST INTERRATHOCOV.


2.3.7 RSCP-Based Inter-RAT Measurement Start/Stop ThresholdsThis set of parameters correspond to the absolute thresholds of the inter-RAT measurementevents when RSCP is used for measurement.

Parameter IDInterRATCSThd2DRSCP (the CS inter-RAT measurement start threshold expressed withRSCP)

InterRATPSThd2DRSCP (the PS inter-RAT measurement start threshold expressed with RSCP)

InterRATCSThd2FRSCP (the CS inter-RAT measurement stop threshold expressed with RSCP)

InterRATPSThd2FRSCP (the PS inter-RAT measurement stop threshold expressed with RSCP)



Parameter SettingThe default values are as follows:l InterRatCSThd2DRSCP is -100 dBm;

l InterRatCSThd2FRSCP is -97 dBm;

l InterRatPSThd2DRSCP is -110 dBm;




l InterRatPSThd2FRSCP is -107dBm.

For the detailed descriptions, refer to 2.2.7 RSCP-Based Inter-Frequency MeasurementStart/Stop Thresholds. For multiRAB services, use the configuration of CS service if thereexits CS service.


Events 2D and 2F are the compressed mode start/stop switches. Because different service typesmay have different requirements on the signal quality and different inter-RAT handover policiesto be adopted, the inter-RAT measurement start/stop thresholds are classified here according toCS, PS and signaling.

When a cell is at the verger of carrier frequency coverage, it uses RSCP measurement values asthe decision criterion for 2D and 2F. Set the event 2D thresholds to a greater value if thecompressed mode is expected to start as early as possible; otherwise set it to a lower value. Toreduce ping-pong start/stop of the compressed mode, increase appropriately the differencebetween the 2D and 2F thresholds.

Relevant Commands



2.3.8 Ec/No-Based Inter-RAT Measurement Start/Stop ThresholdsThis set of parameters correspond to the absolute thresholds of the inter-RAT measurement eventwhen Ec/No is used for measurement.

Parameter ID

InterRATCSThd2DEcNo (the CS inter-RAT measurement start threshold expressed with Ec/No)

InterRATPSThd2DEcNo (the PS inter-RAT measurement start threshold expressed with Ec/No)

InterRATCSThd2FEcNo (the CS inter-RAT measurement stop threshold expressed with Ec/No)

InterRATPSThd2FEcNo (the PS inter-RAT measurement stop threshold expressed with Ec/No)

Value Range

-24 to 0


-24 dB to 0 dB, step 1 dB



Parameter SettingThe default values are as follows:l InterRATCSThd2DEcNo is -14 dB;

l InterRATCSThd2FEcNo is -12dB;

l InterRATPSThd2DEcNo is -15dB;

l InterRATPSThd2FEcNo is -13dB.

For the detailed descriptions, refer to 2.2.7 RSCP-Based Inter-Frequency MeasurementStart/Stop Thresholds. For multiRAB service, use the configuration of CS service if there existsCS service.

Impact on the Network PerformanceEvents 2D and 2F are the compressed mode start/stop switches. Because different service typesmay require different signal qualities and different inter-RAT handover policies, the inter-RATmeasurement start/stop thresholds are classified here according to CS, PS and signaling.

When a cell is at the center of carrier frequency coverage, the Ec/No measured value is used asthe decision criterion of 2D and 2F. Set the event 2D threshold to a greater value if the compressedmode is expected to start as early as possible; otherwise set it to a lower value. To eliminateping-pong start/stop of the compressed mode, increase appropriately the difference between the2D and 2F thresholds.


For parameter oriented to cell inter-RAT handover algorithm: add them through ADDCELLINTERRATHOCOV, query them through LST CELLINTERRATHOCOV, andmodify them through MOD CELLINTERRATHOCOV.

2.3.9 Inter-RAT Handover Judging ThresholdsInter-RAT handover judging thresholds involve the inter-RAT CS service handover judgingthreshold InterRATCovHOCSThd and the inter-RAT PS service handover judging thresholdInterRATCovHOPSThd.

Parameter IDInterRATCovHOCSThd

InterRATCovHOPSThd

Value Range0 to 63

Physical Value Range-110 dBmto -48 dBm




(0 corresponds to the value lower than -110 dBm; 1 corresponds to -110 dBm; 2 corresponds to-109 dBm; ...; 63 corresponds to -48 dBm)

Parameter Setting

The default values are 16, namely, -95 dBm.

This set of parameters are used for inter-RAT coverage handover evaluation at the RNC side,that is, Tother_RATin the formula introduced below. It is the absolute threshold of inter-RAT cellquality (RSSI) at the time of inter-RAT handover judging.

If the inter-RATquality in the inter-RAT measurement report obtained at a moment satisfies thefollowing condition:

Mother_RAT + CIO ≥ Tother_RAT + H/2

Then start the delay trigger timer Trigger-Timer, and handover judgment is made after the timerexpires. If the inter-RAT quality satisfies the following condition before the timer gets expired:

Mother_RAT + CIO < Tother_RAT - H/2

Then the timer stops timing, and the RNC goes on waiting for receiving of the inter-RATmeasurement report.


Configure these parameters differently according to different policies. If the MS can be handedover only after the GSM cell quality is good enough, this parameter can be increased properly,-85 dBm for example.

Relevant Commands


For parameter oriented to cell inter-RAT handover algorithm: add them through ADDCELLINTERRATHOCOV, query them through LST CELLINTERRATHOCOV, andmodify them through MOD CELLINTERRATHOCOV.

2.3.10 Time to Trigger Related to Inter-RAT HandoverIn coverage-oriented inter frequency handover, the time-to-trigger parameters include time-to-trigger for 2D (TrigTime2D), time-to-trigger for 2F (TrigTime2F) and time-to-trigger for 3A(TrigTime3A).

Parameter ID

TrigTime2D

TrigTime2F

TrigTime3A



Value RangeEnum(D0,D10,D20,D40,D60,D80,D100,D120,D160,D200,D240,D320,D640,D1280,D2560,D5000), working range: Enum(D0, D200, D240, D640, D1280, D2560, D5000)

Physical Value RangeEnum (0, 10, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 160, 200, 240, 320, 640, 1280, 2560, 5000) ms

Physical value range of TrigTimeHHO is 0 to 64,000 ms

Parameter SettingThe default values are TrigTime3A: D0; TrigTime2D: D320; and TrigTime2F: D1280.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe greater the time-to-trigger values are, the smaller the average handover frequency is; butthe increase of the time-to-trigger setting increases the risk of call drop.

Relevant CommandsParameters oriented to RNC inter-RAT handover algorithm: set them through SETINTERRATHOCOV, and query them through LST INTERRATHOCOV.

Parameters oriented to cell inter-RAT handover algorithm: add them through ADDCELLINTERRATHOCOV, query them through LST CELLINTERRATHOCOV, andmodify them through MOD CELLINTERRATHOCOV.

2.3.11 Hysteresis Related to Coverage-Based Inter-RAT HandoverIn the coverage-based inter-RAT handover, hystereses triggered by events include 3A hysteresisHystfor3A, 2D hysteresis Hystfor2D, 2F hysteresis Hystfor2F, and inter-RAT handoverhysteresis HystforInterRAT.

Parameter IDHystfor3A

Hystfor2D

Hystfor2F

HystforInterRAT

Value RangeHystfor2D and Hystfor2F: 0 to 29

Hystfor3A and HystforInterRAT: 0 to 15

Physical Value RangeHystfor2D and Hystfor2F: 0 dB to 14.5 dB, step 0.5 dB




Hystfor3A and HystforInterRAT: 0 dB to 7.5 dB, step 0.5 dB

Parameter SettingThe default values for Hystfor2D , Hystfor2F and Hystfor3A are 4 (2dB). The default value forHystforInterRAT is 0 (0 dB).

Here, HystforInterRAT is used to prevent wrong judgment caused by abrupt signal jitter duringinter-RAT handover judging, and it, together with the inter-RAT quality threshold, determineswhether to trigger an inter-RAT handover judgment.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe greater the hystereses values, the stronger the capability for resisting signal fluctuation, andthe ping-pong effect is suppressed, but the response speed to signal change by the handoveralgorithm is weakened. If the inter-RAT handover hysteresis is set too high, the requirement forinter-RAT quality is high, it is hard to trigger inter-RAT handover judging condition, and thecall drop ratio increases.



2.3.12 Time to Trigger for Verified GSM CellThis parameter refers to the delay trigger time of GSM cell verified already by the BS identitycode BSIC. If the signal quality of GSM neighboring cell always satisfies the inter-RAThandover judging condition in the time range stipulated by this parameter value, and the GSMneighboring cell is in the verified state, the network starts the inter-RAT handover process.

Parameter IDTimeToTrigForVerify

Value Range0 to 64000

Physical Value Range0 to 64000 ms

Parameter SettingThe default value is 0, namely, handover immediately.

Refer to the descriptions in the section about handover threshold. The trigger condition for inter-RAT handover judging:

Mother_RAT + CIO ≥ Tother_RAT + H/2



If inter-RAT quality satisfies the above trigger condition, then start the delay trigger timerTrigger-Timer, and inter-RAT handover judgment can be made after the timer gets expired. Thelength of this delay trigger timer is called delay trigger time. This parameter, together withhysteresis, is used to prevent wrong judgment caused by signal jitter during inter-RAT handoverjudging.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe longer the delay trigger time, the more difficult the handover occurs. The increase of thedelay trigger time increases the call drop risk.



2.3.13 Time to Trigger for Non-verified GSM CellThis parameter represents the delay time for triggering a GSM cell unacknowledged by BSIC.In the period specified by this parameter, if the signal quality of an adjacent GSM cell meets therequirement for inter-RAT handover and this cell is unacknowledged, the network starts inter-RAT handover.

Parameter IDTimeToTrigForNonVerify

Value Range0 to 64000, 65535

Physical Value Range0 to 64000 ms, the value 65535 means that the RNC does not hand over to an unacknowledgedGSM cell

Parameter SettingThe default value is 65535, namely, the RNC does not hand over to an unacknowledged GSMcell.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe longer the trigger is delayed , the more difficult the handover occurs. The increase of thedelay trigger time increases the call dropping risk.






2.3.14 Penalty Time for Inter-RAT HandoverFor inter-RAT handover failure to the GSM cell, possibly it is refused because the load of thiscell is heavy. Therefore, no inter-RAT handover request is sent to this cell in the time rangestipulated by this parameter value.

Parameter IDPenaltyTimeforInterRATHO

Value Range0 to 60

Physical Value Range0 to 60 s

Parameter SettingThe default value is 30 s.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe penalty time may be too short because the load status of the GSM cell is not changed, andhandover fails again. However, increase of the penalty trigger time increases the call droppingrisk.



2.3.15 Cell Individual OffsetThis parameter refers to the inter-RAT handover cell individual offset.






-50 dB to 50 dB

Parameter Setting

The default value is 0 dB.

This parameter is used for the inter-RAT handover judging process. Set it based on the landformfeature of the GSM cell. UE uses the original measurement value of this cell plus this offset asthe measurement result for UE handover judging. It functions as the mobile cell border in thehandover algorithm. The greater the parameter, the higher the handover priority of this GSMcell. Generally, configure it to 0 dB.


The greater this parameter, the easier to hand over to the GSM, and vice versa.

Relevant Commands

Set it through ADD GSMNCELL, query it through LST GSMNCELL, and modify it throughMOD GSMNCELL.

2.3.16 Current Used Frequency Quality Threshold of Inter-RATHandover

This parameter is used for measurement control of event 3A when the event reporting mode isadopted for the inter-RAT measurement. Only when the quality of used frequency is poorer thanthis threshold, one of the mandatory conditions for triggering event 3A is satisfied.

Parameter ID

Based on different inter-RAT measurement quantities in use and different borne services, thisparameter can be categorized as follows:l IRHOUsedFreqCSThdEcN0 (used frequency Ec/No quality threshold of CS service)

l IRHOUsedFreqPSThdEcN0 (used frequency Ec/No quality threshold of PS service)

l IRHOUsedFreqCSThdRSCP (used frequency RSCP quality threshold of CS service)

l IRHOUsedFreqPSThdRSCP (used frequency RSCP quality threshold of PS service)

Value Range

IRHOUsedFreqCSThdEcN0 and IRHOUsedFreqPSThdEcN0: -24 to 0

IRHOUsedFreqCSThdRSCP and IRHOUsedFreqPSThdRSCP: -115 to -25


IRHOUsedFreqCSThdEcN0 and IRHOUsedFreqPSThdEcN0: -24 dB to 0 dB

IRHOUsedFreqCSThdRSCP and IRHOUsedFreqPSThdRSCP: -115 dBm to -25 dBm




Parameter SettingThe default values for each parameter are as follows:l IRHOUsedFreqCsThdEcN0: -12 dB

l IRHOUsedFreqPsThdEcN0: -13 dB

l IRHOUsedFreqCsThdRscp: -97 dB

l IRHOUsedFreqPsThdRscp: -107 dB

Factors to be considered while setting these parameters:

Only when the quality of the current used frequency satisfies QUsed ≤ TUsed - H3a/2 and thequality of target frequency satisfies Mother_RAT + CIO ≥ Tother_RAT + H/2, delay the time fortriggering the timer when the event reporting mode is adopted for inter-RAT measurement. A3A event is report upon expiry of the timer.

where,l QUsed: estimated quality of the UTRAN frequency currently used.

l Tused: indicates the quality threshold for the inter-RAT frequency currently used.

l Mother_RAT: indicates the inter-RAT (GSM RSSI) measurement results.

l Tother_RAT: indicates the threshold for judging the inter-RAT handover.

l Cell individual offset (CIO): indicates the offset set by inter-RAT cells.

l H: indicates the hysteresis. The setting on the hysteresis reduces incorrect judgement causedby jitter signals.

When the cell signal quality of current frequency is poor and is lower than the threshold definedby this parameter, infer that the current frequency cannot better satisfy the coverage requirementof current service. The event 2F indicates that the current frequency quality is restored.Therefore, this parameter should be set less than the trigger threshold of event 2F or equal to thethreshold of event 2D.

For composite services, use the parameters configured for CS services.

Impact on the Network PerformanceHigher values of these parameters get event 3A to be more easily triggered. When the value ofthis parameter is too high, the UE may perform handover even when the signal quality is goodin current system.

Relevant CommandsParameter oriented to RNC inter-RAT handover algorithm: set it through SETINTERRATHOCOV and query it through LST INTERRATHOCOV.

Parameter oriented to the cell inter-RAT handover algorithm, add it through ADDCELLINTERRATHOCOV, query it through LST CELLINTERRATHOCOV, and modifyit through MOD CELLINTERRATHOCOV.

2.3.17 Inter-RAT Measure Timer LengthThis parameter defines the valid time for inter-RAT measurement. If the timer cannot find anappropriate inter-RAT cell to initiate the inter-RAT handover, for instance, the event 3A reportis not received or all period reports cannot satisfy the trigger condition for the inter-RAT



handover, the RNC disables the compress mode to release the resources for inter-RATmeasurement and waits for the inter-RAT measurement of the next round.

Parameter IDInterRATMeasTime

Value Range0 to 512

Physical Value Range0 means that the system does not start the inter-RAT measurement timer. 1 s to 512 s.

Parameter SettingThe default value is 60 s. Factors to be considered while setting these parameters:

This parameter is used to prevent the UE from being in compress mode for a long time whenthe UE stands still or moves slowly. The UE's being in compress mode not only disrupts theservice quality, but brings extra interference into the system and decreases the system capability.

Most of the inter-RAT handover can be complete within 60 seconds.

Impact on the Network PerformanceIf this parameter is set too small, the UE cannot perform the inter-RAT handover. If thisparameter is set too great, the UE performs the inter-RAT handover too frequently. In the actualnetwork, you can collect the statistics on the inter-RAT handover and adopt an appropriate valueat the convenience of most users.

Relevant CommandsParameter oriented to RNC inter-RAT handover algorithm: set it through SETINTERRATHOCOV and query it through LST INTERRATHOCOV.

Parameter oriented to the cell inter-RAT handover algorithm, add it through ADDCELLINTERRATHOCOV, query it through LST CELLINTERRATHOCOV, and modifyit through MOD CELLINTERRATHOCOV.

2.4 Non Coverage-Based Inter-RAT Handover ManagementParameters

The common configurable non-coverage-based inter-RAT handover management parametersare listed here.




Table 2-4 List of non-coverage-based inter-RAT handover management parameters


Default Value

RelevantCommand

Level

1 CSServiceHOSwitchPSServiceHOSwitch

Inter-RAT servicehandover switch

OFF Set: ADDCELLHOCOMMQuery: LSTCELLHOCOMMModify: MODCELLHOCOMM

CELL

2 InterRATFilterCoef

Inter-RATmeasurement filtercoefficient

D3 For RNCSet or modify:SETINTERRATHONCOVQuery: LSTINTERRATHONCOVFor CellSet: ADDCELLINTERRATHONCOVQuery: LSTCELLINTERRATHONCOVModify: MODCELLINTERRATHONCOV

RNCCell

3 Hystfor3C Hysteresis of event3C

0 dB

4 TrigTime3C Time-to-Triggerfor event 3C

D640(640ms)

5 BSICVerify BSIC verifyselection switch

Required

6 InterRATNCovHOCSThdInterRATNCovHOPSThd

Non-Coverage-Based inter-RAThandover judgingthresholds

21, thatis, -90dBm

7 PenaltyTimeforInterRATHO

Penalty Time forinter-RAThandover

30 s

8 InterRATHOAttempts

Inter-RAThandover maxattempt times

16times

9 InterRATMeasTime

Inter-RAT measuretimer length

60 s

2.4.1 Inter-RAT Service Handover SwitchesThese parameters decide whether the cell allows triggering CS and PS service handover.

2.4.2 Inter-RAT Measurement L3 Filter CoefficientThis parameter refers to the measurement smooth coefficient adopted for L3 inter-RATmeasurement report filter in the inter-RAT handover based on non-coverage.

2.4.3 Hysteresis of Event 3CThis parameter refers to the trigger hysteresis of event 3C of inter-RAT handover based on non-coverage.



2.4.4 Time to Trigger for Event 3CThis parameter refers to the delay trigger event of event 3C of inter-RAT handover based onnon-coverage.

2.4.5 BSIC Verify Selection SwitchThis parameter is used to control the inter-RAT measurement report cell in the inter-RAThandover based on non-coverage.

2.4.6 Non Coverage-Based Inter-RAT Handover Judging ThresholdsInter-RAT handover judging thresholds based on non-coverage involve the non-coverage inter-RAT CS service handover judging threshold InterRATNCovHOCSThd and the non-coverageinter-RAT PS service handover judging threshold InterRATNCovHOPSThd.

2.4.7 Penalty Time for Inter-RAT HandoverThis parameter refers to the penalty timer adopted when the non-coverage-based inter-RAThandover fails. This parameter is valid for both service and load handover.

2.4.8 Inter-RAT Handover Max Attempt TimesThis parameter is the maximum attempts of none-coverage-based inter-RAT handover.

2.4.9 Inter-RAT Measure Timer LengthThis parameter defines that the system will stop inter-RAT measurement and disables thecompressed mode if enabled if no inter-RAT handover occurs upon expiry of the inter-RATmeasurement timer.

2.4.1 Inter-RAT Service Handover SwitchesThese parameters decide whether the cell allows triggering CS and PS service handover.

Parameter ID

CSServiceHOSwitch

PSServiceHOSwitch

Value Range

Enum (ON, OFF)


None.

Parameter Setting

The default values are OFF.

The service handover refers to the service handover attribute of each service and configurationof related parameters at network side. Once the service is set up, the related measurement isimmediately triggered and inter-RAT handover is performed.

The two switches are just ON only when the service handover function is necessary. Normallythey are OFF.




Impact on the Network PerformanceSet the two switches according to the actual network handover strategies.

Relevant CommandsFor cell-oriented common handover parameters: add them through ADD CELLHOCOMM,query them through LST CELLHOCOMM, and modify them through MODCELLHOCOMM.

2.4.2 Inter-RAT Measurement L3 Filter CoefficientThis parameter refers to the measurement smooth coefficient adopted for L3 inter-RATmeasurement report filter in the inter-RAT handover based on non-coverage.

Parameter IDInterRATFilterCoef

Value RangeEnum (D0, D1, D2, D3, D4, D5, D6, D7, D8, D9, D11, D13, D15, D17, D19)

Physical Value RangeEnum (0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 11, 13, 15, 17, 19)

Parameter SettingThe default values is D3, namely 3.

The physical meaning and measurement model of this parameter are the same as those of theinter-RAT handover measurement filter coefficient based on coverage. For the detailed analysis,refer to 2.3.1 Inter-RAT Measurement L3 Filter Coefficients.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe greater this parameter, the stronger the effect on signal smoothness, the stronger the fast-fading resistance capability, but the weaker the tracing capability for signal change, and calldrops due to handover failure. If this value is set too low, unnecessary system handover occurs.

Relevant CommandsFor parameter oriented to the RNC non-coverage inter-RAT handover algorithm: set it throughSET INTERRATHONCOV, and query it through LST INTERRATHONCOV.

For parameter oriented to cell non-coverage inter-RAT handover algorithm: add it through ADDCELLINTERFREQHONCOV, query it through LST CELLINTERFREQHONCOV, andmodify it through MOD CELLINTERFREQHONCOV.

2.4.3 Hysteresis of Event 3CThis parameter refers to the trigger hysteresis of event 3C of inter-RAT handover based on non-coverage.



Parameter ID

Hystfor3C

Value Range

0 to 15


0 dB to 7.5 dB, step 0.5 dB

Parameter Setting

The default value for Hystfor3C is 0 (0 dB).

Event 3C means the GSM cell quality is greater than an absolute threshold.

Event 3C is used for inter-RAT load handover and service handover. When the inter-RAT cellsatisfies the following condition, event 3C report is triggered, and the corresponding cell isplaced in the event 3C trigger list. Report of event 3C is not repeated for the cell in the list.

MotherRAT + CIOotherRAT ≥ TotherRAT + H3C/2

Here,

l H3C is event 3C hysteresis, namely, the parameter Hystfor3C.

l TotherRAT is the report threshold of inter-RAT cell trigger event, and the correspondingparameter is based on non-coverage inter-RAT handover threshold.

When the cell in the list satisfies the following condition:

MotherRAT + CIOotherRAT ≤ TotherRAT - H3C/2

The corresponding cell is deleted from the list.


The greater the hysteresis, the stronger the capability for resisting signal fluctuation, and theping-pong effect is suppressed, but the response speed to signal change by the handoveralgorithm is weakened. If the inter-RAT handover hysteresis is set too high, the requirement forinter-RAT quality is high, it is hard to trigger inter-RAT handover judging condition, and thecall dropping ratio increases.

Relevant Commands

For parameter oriented to the RNC non-coverage inter-RAT handover algorithm: set it throughSET INTERRATHONCOV, and query it through LST INTERRATHONCOV.





2.4.4 Time to Trigger for Event 3CThis parameter refers to the delay trigger event of event 3C of inter-RAT handover based onnon-coverage.

Parameter IDTrigTime3C

Value RangeEnum (D0, D10, D20, D40, D60, D80, D100, D120, D160, D200, D240, D320, D640, D1280,D2560, D5000)

Physical Value RangeEnum (0, 10, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 160, 200, 240, 320, 640, 1280, 2560, 5000) ms

Parameter SettingThe default value is D640, that is 640 ms.

The delay trigger time aims to reduce excessive events reports triggered occasionally for ameasurement result. Considering that the period for reporting to its L3 by the physical layer ofinter-RAT measurement UE is 480 ms, set it as the default value here temporarily.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe longer the delay is triggered, the more difficult the handover occurs, but increase of thedelay trigger time increases the call dropping risk.



2.4.5 BSIC Verify Selection SwitchThis parameter is used to control the inter-RAT measurement report cell in the inter-RAThandover based on non-coverage.

Parameter IDBSICVerify

Value RangeEnum (Require, Not_Require)




Parameter SettingThe default value is Require.

If it is set as required, report is allowed only after the measured GSM cell identity code (BSIC)is correctly decoded. If it is set to Non_Require, all the measured cells can be reported so longas they satisfy the previous report condition, regardless of their BSICs whether correctly decodedor not.

Usually, the handover due to non-coverage has a lower requirement for handover timeliness,but has a higher requirement for the handover success rate. It is recommended to always set itto Require to ensure the handover reliability.

Impact on the Network PerformanceWhen it is set to Not_Require, the handover occurs easily, but the handover is not as reliable asthe Require mode.

Relevant CommandsParameter oriented to the RNC non-coverage inter-RAT handover algorithm: set it through SETINTERRATHONCOV, and it query through LST INTERRATHONCOV.

Parameter oriented to cell non-coverage inter-RAT handover algorithm: add it through ADDCELLINTERRATHONCOV, query it through LST CELLINTERRATHONCOV, andmodify it through MOD CELLINTERRATHONCOV.

2.4.6 Non Coverage-Based Inter-RAT Handover JudgingThresholds

Inter-RAT handover judging thresholds based on non-coverage involve the non-coverage inter-RAT CS service handover judging threshold InterRATNCovHOCSThd and the non-coverageinter-RAT PS service handover judging threshold InterRATNCovHOPSThd.

Parameter IDInterRATNCovHOCSThd

InterRATNCovHOPSThd

Value Range0 to 63

Physical Value Range-110 dBm to -48 dBm

(0 corresponds to the value lower than -110 dBm; 1 corresponds to -110 dBm; 2 correspondsto-109 dBm; ...; 63 corresponds to -48 dBm)




Parameter SettingAll the default values are 21, namely, -90 dBm.

See the judging formula in 3C hysteresis.

Impact on the Network PerformanceConfigure these parameters differently according to different policies. If the MS can be handedover only after the GSM cell quality is good enough, this parameter can be increased properly,-85 dBm for example.



2.4.7 Penalty Time for Inter-RAT HandoverThis parameter refers to the penalty timer adopted when the non-coverage-based inter-RAThandover fails. This parameter is valid for both service and load handover.

Parameter IDPenaltyTimeForInterRATHO


Physical Value Range0 to 65535 s


More devices take part in inter-RAT handover, the flow is complex, the delay is long, and theprobability corresponding to intra-system handover failure may be high. In addition, it may behard to recover the cause leading to failure in a short time. To reduce unnecessary handoverretries for the same cell and effect on processing of other flows, the penalty timer is added torestrict multiple retries for the same cell in a short time. The specific value can be adjustedaccording to the actual requirement.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe penalty time may be too short because the load status of the GSM cell is not changed, andthe handover fails again. However, increase of the penalty trigger time increases the call droppingrisk.





2.4.8 Inter-RAT Handover Max Attempt TimesThis parameter is the maximum attempts of none-coverage-based inter-RAT handover.

Parameter IDInterRATHOAttempts

Value Range0 to 16

Physical Value Range0 to 16 times

Parameter SettingThe default value is 16 times.

Since more devices take part in the inter-RAT handover which has a complex flow, the handovermay take a longer delay, and the probability that the handover fails is relatively higher.

If the inter-RAT handover fails too much, the network resource is wasted and the service qualityis not guaranteed. Such problems can be effectively controlled by setting this parameter.

Impact on the Network Performancel The higher the parameter is, the higher the probability is of the UE handover from one

system to another.l The lower the parameter is, the smaller influence is on the network quality.

Relevant CommandsParameter oriented to the RNC non-coverage inter-RAT handover algorithm: set it through SETINTERRATHONCOV, and query it through LST INTERRATHONCOV.


2.4.9 Inter-RAT Measure Timer LengthThis parameter defines that the system will stop inter-RAT measurement and disables thecompressed mode if enabled if no inter-RAT handover occurs upon expiry of the inter-RATmeasurement timer.




Parameter ID

InterRATMeasTime

Value Range

0 to 512


0 means the system does not start the inter-RAT measurement timer

1 s to 512 s

Parameter Setting


To close compress mode in coverage-based inter-RAT handover can trigger event 2F, since thereis not event 2F in non-coverage-based inter-RAT handover, it only depends on the measurementtimer.


The higher the parameter value is, the bigger the probability of the UE handover from one systemto another one is. However, the lower the parameter value is, the smaller the influence to networkquality is.

Relevant Commands

Parameter oriented to the RNC non-coverage inter-RAT handover algorithm: set it through SETINTERRATHONCOV, and query it through LST INTERRATHONCOV.


2.5 Blind Handover Management ParametersThe common configurable blind handover management parameters are listed here.

Table 2-5 List of blind handover management parameters

No. Parameter ID

ParameterMeaning

DefaultValue

RelevantCommand

Level

1 BlindHoFlag

Blind handoverflag

FALSE For Inter-FreqSet: ADDINTERFREQNCELL

NCell



No. Parameter ID

ParameterMeaning

DefaultValue

RelevantCommand

Level

2 BlindHOPrio

Blind handoverpriority

- Query: LSTINTERFREQNCELLModify: MODINTERFREQNCELLFor Inter-RATSet:ADDGSMNCELLQuery: LSTGSMNCELLModifyMODGSMNCELL

2.5.1 Blind Handover FlagThis parameter indicates whether the blind handover is performed to the neighboring cell. Blindhandover means UE can directly handover to the neighboring cell without measuring it.

2.5.2 Blind Handover PriorityIf the BlindHOFlag is TRUE, the BlindHOPrio is used to appoint the blind handover priority ofthe neighboring cell.

2.5.1 Blind Handover FlagThis parameter indicates whether the blind handover is performed to the neighboring cell. Blindhandover means UE can directly handover to the neighboring cell without measuring it.

Parameter ID

BlindHoFlag

Value Range

Enum (FALSE and TRUE)


None.

Parameter Setting

The default value of BlindHoFlag is FALSE.

If there is a same coverage inter-freq neighboring cell, it can be set to TRUE.





Set the parameter according to actual network handover strategies. It may affect KPIperformance concerning the cells if the blind handover is allowed in related cells, especially theemergent blind handover is.

Relevant Commands

For inter-frequency handover neighboring cell parameter: add it through ADDINTERFREQNCELL , query it through LST INTERFREQNCELL , and modify it throughMOD INTERFREQNCELL.

For inter-RAT handover neighboring cell parameter: add it through ADD GSMNCELL, queryit through LST GSMNCELL, and modify it through MOD GSMNCELL.

2.5.2 Blind Handover PriorityIf the BlindHOFlag is TRUE, the BlindHOPrio is used to appoint the blind handover priority ofthe neighboring cell.

Parameter ID

BlindHOPrio

Value Range

BlindHOPrio: 0 to 30


None.

Parameter Setting

For this parameter, 0 represents the highest priority. The value range corresponds to only onecell. Priorities 0 to 15 are assigned to concentric neighboring cells, which can ensure successfulhandover. Priorities 16 to 30 are assigned to neighboring cells for blind handover, which cannotensure successful handover.


Set the parameter according to actual network handover strategies.

Relevant Commands

For inter-frequency handover neighboring cell parameter: add it through ADDINTERFREQNCELL , query it through LST INTERFREQNCELL , and modify it throughMOD INTERFREQNCELL.

For inter-RAT handover neighboring cell parameter: add it through ADD GSMNCELL, queryit through LST GSMNCELL, and modify it through MOD GSMNCELL.



2.6 Cell Selection and ReselectionThe common configurable cell selection and reselection parameters are listed here.

Table 2-6 List of cell selection and reselection parameters


DefaultValue


1 IdleQhyst1sIdleQhyst2sConnQhyst1sConnQhyst2s

Measurementhysteresisparameters

Qhyst1s:2 (4 dB)Qhyst2s:1 (2 dB)

Set: ADD CELLSELRESELQuery: LST CELLSELRESELModify: MODCELLSELRESEL

Cell

2 IdleQoffset1snIdleQoffset2snConnQoffset1snConnQoffset2snQoffset1sn

Loadleveloffsets

0 dB For intra-reeqSet: ADD INTRAFREQNCELLQuery: LSTINTRAFREQNCELLModify:MODINTRAFREQNCELLFor inter-freqSet: ADD INTERFREQNCELLQuery: LSTINTERFREQNCELLModify: MODINTERFREQNCELLFor inter_RATSet: ADD GSMNCELLQuery: LST GSMNCELLModify: MOD GSMNCELL

3 Qqualmin Minimumqualitycriterion

-18 dB Set: ADD CELLSELRESELQuery: LST CELLSELRESELModify: MODCELLSELRESEL

4 Qrxlevmin Minimumaccesslevel

-58, thatis, -115dBm





DefaultValue


5 IdleSintrasearchConnSintrasearchIdleSintersearchConnSintersearchSsearchRat

Cellreselection startthresholds

IdleSintrasearchandConnSintrasearch:5 (10 dB)IdleSintersearchandConnSintersearch:4 (8 dB)Ssearchrat: 2 (4 dB)

6 Treselections Reselectionhysteresis time

1 s

7 Qrxlevmin Minimumaccesslevel forinter-RATcell

-58, thatis, -115dBm

Set: ADD GSMNCELLQuery: LST GSMNCELLModify: MOD GSMNCELL

NCell

8 Qsearch_I 2G IdlemodeMS'ssearching for 3Gcellsignallevelthreshold

7, that is,always

N/A GSM

9 FDD_Qoffset 3G cellreselectionsignalleveloffset

0 dB




DefaultValue


10 FDD_Qmin 3G cellreselectionsignallevelthreshold

–10 dB

2.6.1 Measurement Hysteresis ParametersThe measurement hysteresis parameters include measurement hysteresis 1 (Qhyst1s) andmeasurement hysteresis 2 (Qhyst2s), which are used for the UE to measure the service cellCPICH RSCP (Qhyst1s) and CPICH Ec/No (Qhyst2s) respectively . IdleQhyst1s andIdleQhyst2s are used in idle state, ConnQhyst1s and ConnQhyst2s are used in connecting state.

2.6.2 Load Level OffsetsThese parameters are cell offsets used for cell selection and reselection. In the cell selection /reselection process, when CPICH Ec/N0 is used for measurement, the cell offset is QOffset2sn;when CPICH RSCP is used for measurement, IdleQoffsets and IdleQoffset2s used to idle state,ConnQoffset1s and ConnQoffset2s used to connecting state. There exist ConnQoffset1s andConnQoffset2s only if SIB12 indication is set TRUE. In addition, there is only QOffset1sn ininter-RAT cell selection and reselection, namely, not idle, connect, or QOffset2sn.

2.6.3 Minimum Quality CriterionThis parameter is the minimum access threshold of PCPICH Ec/N0. The UE can reside in thecell only when CPICH Ec/N0 measured by the UE is bigger than this threshold.

2.6.4 Minimum Access LevelThis parameter is the minimum access level threshold of PCPICH RSCP. The UE can reside inthis cell only when CPICH RSCP measured by the UE is greater than this threshold.

2.6.5 Cell Reselection Start ThresholdsThese parameters include the intra-frequency cell reselection start threshold (Including Idle andconnecting state), the inter-frequency cell reselection start threshold (Including Idle andconnecting state) and the inter-RAT cell reselection start threshold (SsearchRat).

2.6.6 Reselection Hysteresis TimeIf the signal quality of other cells (CPICH Ec/No measured by the UE) is always better than thequality of the current cell within the time specified by this parameter, the UE will reselect thiscell to reside in.

2.6.7 Minimum Access Level for Inter-RAT CellThis parameter is the minimum access level threshold of inter-RAT cell. The UE can reside inthis cell only when GSM RSSI measured by the UE is greater than this threshold.

2.6.8 2G Idle Mode MS's Searching for 3G Cell Signal Level ThresholdA GSM MS in idle mode starts to search for 3G signal level threshold.

2.6.9 3G Cell Reselection Signal Level OffsetA 3G cell can be reselected when the average signal level of the target 3G cell is FDD_Qosffsetgreater than that of the current serving cell.




2.6.10 3G Cell Reselection Signal Level ThresholdOnly when the signal level in the target 3G cell is FDD_Qmin greater than the serving cell, thetarget 3G cell may become a candidate cell for reselection.

2.6.1 Measurement Hysteresis ParametersThe measurement hysteresis parameters include measurement hysteresis 1 (Qhyst1s) andmeasurement hysteresis 2 (Qhyst2s), which are used for the UE to measure the service cellCPICH RSCP (Qhyst1s) and CPICH Ec/No (Qhyst2s) respectively . IdleQhyst1s andIdleQhyst2s are used in idle state, ConnQhyst1s and ConnQhyst2s are used in connecting state.

Parameter IDIdleQhyst1s

IdleQhyst2s

ConnQhyst1s

ConnQhyst2s

Value Range0 to 20

Physical Value Range0 dB to 40 dB, step 2 dB

Parameter SettingThe default value of Qhyst1s is 2 (4 dB), and the default value of Qhyst2s is 1 (2 dB). Qhyst2sis optional. If it is not configured, Qhyst2s has the same value of measurement hysteresis 1.

According to the R criterion, the measured value of the current service cell participates in cellreselection sequencing after this hysteresis is added to it. The values of these parameters arerelated to the slow fading property of the area where the cell is located.

These parameters are used mainly to prevent the ping-pong effect of the cell reselection resultdue to the slow fading when the UE is at the cell verge. The ping-pong effect may cause frequentlocation updates (idle mode), URA updates (URA_PCH) or cell updates (CELL_FACH,CELL_PCH); which results in increased network signaling load and higher loss of UE batteryenergy.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe greater these hysteresis parameters, the less likely the various types of cell reselectionsoccur, and the better the slow fading resistance capability, but the slower the reaction to theenvironment changes.

Relevant CommandsSet these parameters through ADD CELLSELRESEL, query them through LSTCELLSELRESEL, and modify them through MOD CELLSELRESEL.



2.6.2 Load Level OffsetsThese parameters are cell offsets used for cell selection and reselection. In the cell selection /reselection process, when CPICH Ec/N0 is used for measurement, the cell offset is QOffset2sn;when CPICH RSCP is used for measurement, IdleQoffsets and IdleQoffset2s used to idle state,ConnQoffset1s and ConnQoffset2s used to connecting state. There exist ConnQoffset1s andConnQoffset2s only if SIB12 indication is set TRUE. In addition, there is only QOffset1sn ininter-RAT cell selection and reselection, namely, not idle, connect, or QOffset2sn.

Parameter IDIdleQoffset1sn

IdleQoffset2sn

ConnQoffset1sn

ConnQoffset2sn

Qoffset1sn



Parameter SettingThe default values are 0 dB.

These parameters are offsets of CPICH measured values of neighboring cells. QOffset1sn isused for the RSCP measurement and the neighboring cell measurement value participates in cellreselection sequencing after this offset is deducted from it. QOffset2sn is used for the Ec/Nomeasurement and the neighboring cell measurement value participates in cell reselectionsequencing after this offset is deducted from it.

These parameters play the role of moving the cell boarder in the cell selection and reselectionalgorithms. They are configured according to the actual environment in network planning.

Impact on the Network Performancel The greater these values, the lower the probability of selecting the neighboring cell.

l The less these values are, the higher the probability of selecting the neighboring cell.

Relevant CommandsFor intra-frequency cell selection/reselection: set these parameters through ADDINTRAFREQNCELL, query them through LST INTRAFREQNCELL , and modify themthrough MOD INTRAFREQNCELL .

For inter-frequency cell selection/reselection: set these parameters through ADDINTERFREQNCELL, query them through LST INTERFREQNCELL, and modify themthrough MOD INTERFREQNCELL.




For inter-RAT cell selection and reselection: set these parameters through ADDGSMNCELL, query them through LST GSMNCELL, and modify them through MODGSMNCELL.

2.6.3 Minimum Quality CriterionThis parameter is the minimum access threshold of PCPICH Ec/N0. The UE can reside in thecell only when CPICH Ec/N0 measured by the UE is bigger than this threshold.

Parameter IDQqualmin

Value Range-24 to 0


Parameter SettingThe default value is -18 dB.

The FDD mode is defined by the S criterion for cell selection in Protocol 25.304, as follows:

Srxlev>0 & Squal>0

Where,

l Squal = Qqualmeas - Qqualmin

l Srxlev = Qrxlevmeas - Qrxlevmin - Pcompensation

l Qqualmeas is Ec/No of the measured value CPICH of the cell quality;

l Qrxlevmeas is RSCP of CPICH;

l Qrxlevmin is the minimum pilot signal receiving power required for the current cell;

l Pcompensation = Max.(UE_TXPWR_MAX_RACH - P_MAX, 0);

– UE_TXPWR_MAX_RACH is the maximum allowed uplink transmit power of theUE when accessing to the cell, namely MaxAllowedULTxPower;

– P_MAX is the maximum radio frequency output power of the UE.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe greater this parameter, the more difficult the UE selects this cell to reside in; the lower thisparameter, the easier the UE selects this cell to reside in. However, if this parameter is too low,the UE fails to correctly receive the system information borne over PCCPCH after it resides inthe cell.

Relevant CommandsSet this parameter through ADD CELLSELRESEL, query it through LSTCELLSELRESEL, and modify it through MOD CELLSELRESEL.



2.6.4 Minimum Access LevelThis parameter is the minimum access level threshold of PCPICH RSCP. The UE can reside inthis cell only when CPICH RSCP measured by the UE is greater than this threshold.

Parameter IDQrxlevmin



Where, -58 corresponds to -115 dBm, -57 corresponds to -113dBm,…, -13 corresponds to 25dBm

Parameter SettingThe default value is -58, namely -115 dBm.

For the definition of Qrxlevmin, refer to Minimum Quality Criterion (Qqualmin).

The settings of Qrxlevmin and Qqualmin should be considered together.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe greater this parameter, the more difficult the UE selects this cell to reside in; the lower thisparameter, the easier the UE selects this cell to reside in. However, if this parameter is too low,the UE fails to receive the system information borne over PCCPCH correctly after it resides inthis cell.

Relevant CommandsSet this parameter through ADD CELLSELRESEL, query it through LSTCELLSELRESEL, and modify it through MOD CELLSELRESEL.

2.6.5 Cell Reselection Start ThresholdsThese parameters include the intra-frequency cell reselection start threshold (Including Idle andconnecting state), the inter-frequency cell reselection start threshold (Including Idle andconnecting state) and the inter-RAT cell reselection start threshold (SsearchRat).

Parameter IDIdleSintrasearch

IdleSintersearch

ConnSintrasearch

ConnSintersearch




SsearchRat



Parameter SettingThe default values of IdleSintrasearch and ConnSintrasearch are 5 (10 dB), the default valuesof IdleSintersearch and ConnSintersearch are 4 (8 dB), and the default value of Ssearchrat is 2(4 dB).

The cell reselection start thresholds are defined in Protocol 25.304 as follows:

1. If Sx <= Sintrasearch, the UE implements intra-frequency measurement and starts intra-frequency cell reselection.

2. If Sx <= Sintersearch, the UE implements inter-frequency measurement and starts inter-frequency cell reselection.

3. If Sx <= SsearchRAT, the UE implements inter-RAT measurement and starts inter-RAT cellreselection.

Where, Sx = measured value of UE - Qqualmin.

When the UE detects that the quality of the service cell (CPICH Ec/No measured by the UE) islower than the sum of the minimum quality criterion of the service cell (Qqualmin) plus thisthreshold, it starts the intra-frequency/inter-frequency/ inter-RAT cell reselection process.

Intra-frequency cell reselection is prior to inter-frequency/inter-RAT cell reselection. Whensetting these three parameters, make sure that the intra-frequency cell reselection start thresholdis greater than the inter-frequency/inter-RAT cell reselection start threshold.

Impact on the Network Performancel If these parameters are too high, cell reselection probably starts frequently, resulting in UE

battery waste.l If they are too low, cell reselection probably starts difficultly, and the UE fails to reside

timely in a cell with good quality, and this influences the communication quality betweenthe UTRAN and the UE.

Relevant CommandsSet these parameters through ADD CELLSELRESEL, query them through LSTCELLSELRESEL, and modify them through MOD CELLSELRESEL.

2.6.6 Reselection Hysteresis TimeIf the signal quality of other cells (CPICH Ec/No measured by the UE) is always better than thequality of the current cell within the time specified by this parameter, the UE will reselect thiscell to reside in.



Parameter ID

Treselections

Value Range

0 to 31


0 to 31 s

Parameter Setting


This parameter is used to prevent the UE from implementing ping-pong reselection betweencells.

NOTE

0 refers to the default value specified in the protocol, instead of 0 s.

Impact on the Network Performancel If this parameter is too low, the UE probably performs ping-pong reselection.

l If it is too high, it may result in too long cell reselection delay, which influences the normaloperation of cell reselection.

Relevant Commands

Set this parameter through ADD CELLSELRESEL, query it through LSTCELLSELRESEL, and modify it through MOD CELLSELRESEL.

2.6.7 Minimum Access Level for Inter-RAT CellThis parameter is the minimum access level threshold of inter-RAT cell. The UE can reside inthis cell only when GSM RSSI measured by the UE is greater than this threshold.

Parameter ID

Qrxlevmin

Value Range

-58 to -13


-115 dBm to -25 dBm, step 2 dBm

Where, -58 corresponds to -115 dBm, -57 corresponds to -113 dBm ,…, -13 corresponds to 25dBm.




Parameter Setting

The default value is -58, namely, -115 dBm.

Similar to the S Criteria, in the GSM/DCS/PCS systems, the MS also requires a path loss standardto reside in a GSM/DCS/PCS cell, and this standard requires the path loss criterion parameterC1 > 0. C1 is defined as follows:

C1 = (A - Max(B,0))

Here,

l A = RLA_C - RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN

l B = MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH - P,

For DCS 1800, B = MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH + POWER OFFSET - P.

l RLA_C: Average strength measurement value of receiving signal.

l RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN: The minimum signal strength required by the access system,that is, Qrxlevmin of this section.

l MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH: The maximum transmitting power allowed by the MS accesssystem.

l POWER OFFSET: The power offset parameter of DCS 1800 MS, used together withMS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH.

l P: The maximum RF output power of MS.


The greater this parameter, the more difficult the UE selects this cell to reside in; the lower thisparameter, the easier the UE selects this cell to reside in. However, if this parameter is too low,the UE fails to receive the system information borne over PCCPCH correctly after it resides inthis cell.

Relevant Commands

Set this parameter through ADD GSMNCELL, query it through LST GSMNCELL, andmodify it through MOD GSMNCELL.

2.6.8 2G Idle Mode MS's Searching for 3G Cell Signal LevelThreshold

A GSM MS in idle mode starts to search for 3G signal level threshold.

Parameter ID

Qsearch_I

Value Range

0 to 15




When this parameter is within the range of 0 to 7 or 8 to 15, the GSM MS starts searching for3G cells.

0 = -98 dBm, 1 = -94 dBm, ..., 6 = -74 dBm, 7 = (always), 8 = -78 dBm, 9 = -74 dBm, ..., 14 =-54 dBm, 15 = (never)

Parameter Setting

The default value is 7, which indicates that the GSM MS in idle mode always searches for 3Gcells.


The setting of this parameter depends on the customers' policy. The 3G policy is of top priorityduring the interoperation of 3G and 2G.

Relevant Commands

Not involved for a 3G network.

2.6.9 3G Cell Reselection Signal Level OffsetA 3G cell can be reselected when the average signal level of the target 3G cell is FDD_Qosffsetgreater than that of the current serving cell.

Parameter ID

FDD_Qoffset

Value Range

0 to 15


0 = (always select a cell if acceptable), 1 = -28 dB, 2 = -24 dB, ..., 15 = 28 dB

Parameter Setting



The setting of this parameter depends on the customers' policy. The 3G policy is of top priorityduring the interoperation of 3G and 2G.

Relevant Commands

Not involved for a 3G network.




2.6.10 3G Cell Reselection Signal Level ThresholdOnly when the signal level in the target 3G cell is FDD_Qmin greater than the serving cell, thetarget 3G cell may become a candidate cell for reselection.

Parameter IDFDD_Qmin

Value Range0 to 7

Physical Value Range0 = -20 dB, 1 = -6 dB, 2 = -18 dB, 3 = -8 dB, 4 = -16 dB, 5 = -10 dB, 6 = -14 dB, 7 = -12 dB


Impact on the Network PerformanceThe setting of this parameter depends on the customers' policy. The 3G policy is of top priorityduring the interoperation of 3G and 2G.

Relevant CommandsNot involved for a 3G network.

2.7 Neighbor Management ParametersThe configurable neighbor management parameters are listed here.

Table 2-7 List of neighbor management parameters

No.

ParameterID

ParameterMeaning

DefaultValue

Relevant Commands Level

1 NPrioFlag

Neighborpriorityflag

FALSE For intra-frequency cells ADDINTRAFREQNCELLMOD INTRAFREQNCELLFor inter-frequency cells ADDINTERFREQNCELLMOD INTRAFREQNCELLFor inter-RAT cellsADD GSMNCELLMOD GSMNCELL

NCell

2 NPRIO

Neighborpriority

-

2.7.1 Neighbor Priority Flag



This describes neighbor priority flags.

2.7.2 Neighbor PriorityThis part describes the neighbor priority.

2.7.1 Neighbor Priority FlagThis describes neighbor priority flags.

Parameter IDNPrioFlag

Value RangeFALSE or TRUE

Physical Value RangeFALSE or TRUE

Parameter SettingThe default setting is FALSE.

This parameter is not necessary for a new network, for it overloads the configuration efforts fornetwork planning.

For the network that uses its neighbor priority, use the priority of its neighbor and set NPrioFlagto TRUE.

Impact on the Network PerformanceImproper neighbor priority may result in missing neighbors.

Relevant CommandsFor intra-frequency cells: ADD INTRAFREQNCELL / MOD INTRAFREQNCELL.

For inter-frequency cells: ADD INTERFREQNCELL / MOD INTERFREQNCELL.

For inter-RAT cells: ADD GSMNCELL / MOD GSMNCELL.

2.7.2 Neighbor PriorityThis part describes the neighbor priority.

Parameter IDNPrio

Value Range0 to 30 (for intra-frequency neighbors)




0 to 31 (for inter-frequency inter-RAT neighbors)


Parameter SettingThe smaller the NPrio value is, the higher the neighbor priority is.

Impact on the Network PerformanceImproper neighbor priority may result in missing neighbors.

Relevant CommandsFor intra-frequency cells: ADD INTRAFREQNCELL / MOD INTRAFREQNCELL.

For inter-frequency cells: ADD INTERFREQNCELL / MOD INTERFREQNCELL.

For inter-RAT cells: ADD GSMNCELL / MOD GSMNCELL.



3 Admission Control Parameters

About This Chapter

Admission control is a way for coordinating the WCDMA system capacity, coverage and quality,and it ensures the system stability and QoS requirement by control over user access.

Table 3-1 List of admission control parameters


DefaultValue


1 ULBETraffInitBitRateDLBETraffInitBitRate

Uplink anddownlink initialaccess rates ofBE service

64 kbit/s Set or modify: SETFRCQuery: LST FRC

RNC

2 IU_Qos_Neg_SwitchRAB_Downsizing_SwitchQueueAlgoSwitchPeemptAlgoSwitch

Intelligentadmissionalgorithmswitch

IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH: 0RAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCH: 1QUEUEALGOSWITCH: OFFPREEMPTALGOSWITC: OFF

IU_Qos_Neg_SwitchandRAB_Downsizing_SwitchSet or modify: SETCORRMALGOSWITCHQuery: LSTCORRMALGOSWITCHQueueAlgoSwitchandPeemptAlgoSwitchSet or modify: SETQUEUEPREEMPTQuery: LSTQUEUEPREEMPT

RNC

RANNetwork Optimization Parameter Reference 3 Admission Control Parameters



DefaultValue


3 UlTotalEqUserNum

Uplink totalequivalent usernumber

80 Set: ADD CELLCACQuery: LSTCELLCACModify: MODCELLCAC

Cell

4 DlTotalEqUserNum

Downlink totalnonhsdpaequivalent usernumber

80

5 UlConvAMRThd

AMR voiceuplink thresholdfor conversationservice

75%

6 UlConvNonAMRThd

Non AMR voiceuplink thresholdof conversationservice

75%

7 DlConvAMRThd

AMR voicedownlinkthreshold forconversationservice

80%

8 DlConvNonAMRThd

Non AMRVoice downlinkthreshold ofconversationservice

80%

9 UlOtherThd Uplinkthreshold forother services

60%

10 DlOtherThd Downlinkthreshold forother services

75%

11 UlHOThd Uplinkhandoveradmissionthreshold

80%

12 DlHOThd Downlinkhandoveradmissionthreshold

85%

13 DLCELLTOTALTHD

Downlink totalpower threshold

90%

3 Admission Control ParametersRAN




DefaultValue


14 UlHoCeResvSf Uplinkhandover creditreserved SF

SF16 Set: ADD CELLCACQuery: LSTCELLCACModify: MODCELLCAC

Cell

15 DlHoCeCodeResvSf

Downlinkhandover creditand channelcode resourcereserved SF

SF32

3.1 Uplink and Downlink Initial Access Rates of BE ServiceThey are the uplink and downlink initial access rates UlBeTraffInitBitrate andDLBeTraffInitBitrate when the BE service is set up.

3.2 Intelligent Admission Algorithm SwitchFour sub algorithm switches are contained: the maximum rate negotiationIU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH, initial rate selection RAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCH, queuingQUEUEALGOSWITCH and preempting PREEMPTALGOSWITCH.

3.3 Uplink Total Equivalent User NumberWhen the algorithm 2 is used, this parameter defines the total equivalent user numbercorresponding to the 100% uplink load.

3.4 Downlink Total NonHSDPA Equivalent User NumberWhen the algorithm 2 is used, this parameter defines the total non-hsdpa equivalent user numbercorresponding to the 100% downlink load.

3.5 AMR Voice Uplink Threshold for Conversation ServiceThe uplink threshold for the conversation service is used for the uplink admission of conversationservice users.

3.6 Non AMR Voice Uplink Threshold of Conversation ServiceThis parameter is the uplink threshold of non AMR voice service in the conversation serviceand used for uplink admission for non AMR voice user in the conversation service.

3.7 AMR Voice Downlink Threshold for Conversation ServiceThe downlink threshold for the conversation service is used for the downlink admission ofconversation service users.

3.8 Non AMR Voice Downlink Threshold of Conversation ServiceIt is the downlink threshold of non AMR voice in the conversation service and used for downlinkadmission for non AMR voice user in the conversation service.

3.9 Uplink Threshold for Other ServicesThis parameter is the uplink threshold for services other than the conversation service. It is usedfor uplink admission of other services.

3.10 Downlink Threshold for Other ServicesThis parameter is the downlink threshold for services other than the conversation service. It isused for downlink admission of users of other services.

3.11 Uplink Handover Admission Threshold



The uplink handover threshold is used for uplink admission of handover users. The parameteris only useful for uplink inter-frequency handover. Do not do the admission judgment in theuplink soft handover.

3.12 Downlink Handover Admission ThresholdThe handover downlink threshold is used for downlink admission of handover users.

3.13 Downlink Total Power ThresholdThe total downlink power threshold of the cell (PR99 + GBP) is used for admission of HSPAdownlink power resource.

3.14 Uplink Handover Credit Reserved SFThis parameter describes the reserved threshold for uplink credit handover. It is used for theadmission of uplink credit for new subscribers.

3.15 Downlink Handover Credit and Channel Code Resource Reserved SFThis part describes the threshold for reserving resources for the handover of downlink coderesources and CE resources. This parameter is used for the admission of downlink code resourcesand credit for new subscribers.

3.16 Resources Reserved for Common Channel LoadUL common channel load factor ULCCHLOADFACTOR reserves part resources for ULcommon channels; DL common channel load reserved coefficientDLCCHLOADRSRVCOEFF reserves part resources for DL common channels.




3.1 Uplink and Downlink Initial Access Rates of BE ServiceThey are the uplink and downlink initial access rates UlBeTraffInitBitrate andDLBeTraffInitBitrate when the BE service is set up.

Parameter IDUlBeTraffInitBitrate

DLBeTraffInitBitrate

Value RangeEnum (D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384)

Physical Value RangeEnum (8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 144, 256, 384) kbit/s

Parameter SettingThe default values for both ULBETraffInitBitRate and DLBETraffInitBitRate are 64 kbit/s.

To save system resources and improve the admission success rate, BE does not require accessat the maximum expected rate at setup. In stead, a lower rate is adopted for initial access. Afteraccess, the rate is adjusted higher when the traffic requires and system resources allow it to doso.

When the initial rate selection (RAB Downsizing) function is enabled, this value is the uplink/downlink initial access rate when the BE service is set up. If this rate access fails to satisfy thecurrent load condition, then the actual initial access rate is the negotiated rate based on this rate.When the RAB Downsizing function is disabled, this parameter is the uplink/downlink initialaccess rate when the BE service is set up.

Impact on the Network Performancel The higher this parameter, the less time it takes for the BE service to reach the maximum

rate, but the easier the BE service rate be adjusted downward through negotiation when thesystem is congested, so it makes no sense to set it too high.

l The lower this parameter, the easier for the BE service to access at this rate, but if it is settoo low, it takes a longer time to adjust to the required rate when there is a servicerequirement.

Relevant CommandsSet the parameter through SET FRC, and query it through LST FRC.

3.2 Intelligent Admission Algorithm SwitchFour sub algorithm switches are contained: the maximum rate negotiationIU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH, initial rate selection RAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCH, queuingQUEUEALGOSWITCH and preempting PREEMPTALGOSWITCH.



Parameter ID

IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH

RAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCH

QUEUEALGOSWITCH

PREEMPTALGOSWITCH

Value Range

IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH and RAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCH: Enum (0,1)

QUEUEALGOSWITCH and PREEMPTALGOSWITC: On, Off


IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH and RAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCH: 0 indicates Off, and 1indicates On.

QUEUEALGOSWITCH and PREEMPTALGOSWITC: On indicates open and Off indicatesclose.

Parameter Setting

The default value of IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH is 0, the default value ofRAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCH is 1, and the default values of QUEUEALGOSWITCH andPREEMPTALGOSWITC are Off.

These sub algorithms in intelligent admission are briefed below:

Maximum rate negotiation: At RAB assignment setup, RAB assignment modification andtransition-in, the real-time or non-real-time (BE) service of PS domain requires rate negotiationbased on the UE supported capability to get the maximum expected rate of a proper service QoSrequest. This negotiation result should be sent to the CN. For the BE service, it is the maximumrate can be adjusted for its DCCC.

Initial rate selection: At RAB assignment setup, RAB assignment modification and transition-in, the real-time or non-real-time (BE) service of PS domain requires selection of a proper initialrate configuration bandwidth from typical rates smaller than or equal to the maximum expectedrate after negotiation and bigger than or equal to the lowest ensured rate according to the cellload information before application for cell resources.

Preempting: In the service setup, modification, hard handover and transition-in scenarios, ifservice request supports preempting capability (core network configuration) when applicationfor cell resources fails, preempting is executed, and the resource of lower-priority user supportingpreempting is released to set up the service request.

Queuing: In the service setup, modification, hard handover and transition-in scenarios, if servicerequest does not support preempting capability or the preempting switch is closed whenapplication for cell resources fails, but service request supports the queuing capability, queuingis executed. When the heartbeat timer of queuing is timeout, attempt is made to allocate resourceto the service request with the minimum metric in the queue.




Impact on the Network PerformanceSet the values according to the actual requirement and the supporting capability of the corenetwork.

Relevant CommandsSet IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH and RAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCH through SETCORRMALGOSWITCH, and query them through LST CORRMALGOSWITCH.

Set QUEUEALGOSWITCH and PREEMPTALGOSWITC through SETQUEUEPREEMPT, and query them through LST QUEUEPREEMPT.

3.3 Uplink Total Equivalent User NumberWhen the algorithm 2 is used, this parameter defines the total equivalent user numbercorresponding to the 100% uplink load.

Parameter IDUlTotalEqUserNum

Value Range1 to 200

Physical Value Range1 to 200, step 1


When the algorithm 2 is used, the real admission equivalent user number is equal to admissionthreshold multiplied by 100% load; this parameter defines the equivalent user numbercorresponding to the 100% load.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThis parameter should be considered with the admission threshold. It should be set according tothe real network condition.l If it is too high, the system loads after admission maybe too high, which leads to the system

congestion, and makes the system unstable.l If it is too low, the possibility of subscribers rejected increases, part of the hardware resource

is idle and wasted.

Relevant CommandsSet the parameter through ADD CELLCAC, query it through LST CELLCAC, and modify itthrough MOD CELLCAC.



3.4 Downlink Total NonHSDPA Equivalent User NumberWhen the algorithm 2 is used, this parameter defines the total non-hsdpa equivalent user numbercorresponding to the 100% downlink load.

Parameter ID

DlTotalEqUserNum

Value Range

1 to 200


1 to 200, step 1

Parameter Setting


When the algorithm 2 is used, the real R99 equivalent user number is equal to admissionthreshold multiplied by 100% R99 load; this parameter defines the non-hsdpa equivalent usernumber corresponding to the 100% R99 load.


This parameter should be considered with the admission threshold. It should be set according tothe real network condition.

l If it is too high, the system loads after admission maybe too high, which leads to the systemcongestion, and makes the system unstable.

l If it is too low, the possibility of subscribers rejected increases, part of hardware resourceis idle and wasted.

Relevant Commands

Set the parameter through ADD CELLCAC, query it through LST CELLCAC, and modify itthrough MOD CELLCAC.

3.5 AMR Voice Uplink Threshold for Conversation ServiceThe uplink threshold for the conversation service is used for the uplink admission of conversationservice users.

Parameter ID

UlConvAMRThd




Value Range0 to 100

Physical Value Range0 to 100%, step 1%

Parameter SettingThe default value is 75, that is 75%.

Based on the current load factor of the system and the service properties of the call requestingfor admission, the uplink admission control algorithm predicts the load factor of the system afterthe new call is admitted, uses the sum of the predicted load factor value and the common channeluplink load factor as the predicted value of the new load factor, and then compares the predictedvalue of the load factor with the load factor threshold. If the predicted load factor value is notbigger than the load factor threshold, the call will be admitted; otherwise it is rejected.

The uplink load thresholds include this parameter and uplink threshold for conversation non-AMR service, uplink threshold for other services and uplink handover admissionthreshold. According to the relations among these four parameters, the proportions of theconversation service and other services in the cell can be limited. These parameters can be alsoused to ensure the priorities of handover users and the conversation service access.

Impact on the Network PerformanceIf this parameter is too high, the system load after admission probably is too high, which affectsthe system stability and results in system congestion; if it is too low, the users are more likelyto be rejected, and some resources are idled and wasted.

This parameter, uplink threshold for conversation non-AMR service, uplink threshold forother services and uplink handover admission threshold should be considered together withthe network planning results.

l If this parameter is too high, the target coverage in the network planning is influenced.

l If it is too low, the target capacity cannot be satisfied.

Relevant CommandsSet this parameter through ADD CELLCAC, query it through LST CELLCAC, and modifyit through MOD CELLCAC.

3.6 Non AMR Voice Uplink Threshold of ConversationService

This parameter is the uplink threshold of non AMR voice service in the conversation serviceand used for uplink admission for non AMR voice user in the conversation service.

Parameter IDUlConvNonAMRThd



Value Range0 to 100



The uplink admission control algorithm predicts the system load factor after admission of newcall according to the load factor of current system and service feature of admission request call.It uses the sum of the load factor predicted value and the uplink load factor of public channel asthe new load factor predicted value, and then compares the load factor predicted value with theload factor threshold. If the load factor predicted value is not bigger than the load factor threshold,this call is admitted, or else it is refused.

Uplink load thresholds include this parameter, AMR voice uplink threshold of conversationservice, Uplink thresholds of other services and Uplink handover admission threshold. Youcan restrict the proportion of conversation to other services in cell based on relations of the fourparameters or use them to ensure the priority of handover user and conversation service access.

Impact on the Network PerformanceIf this parameter is set too high, the system load after admission may be overly heavy to affectthe system stability, resulting in system congestion. If this parameter is too low, the users aremore likely to be rejected, and some resources may be left idle.

This parameter, AMR voice uplink threshold of conversation service, Uplink thresholds ofother services and Uplink handover admission threshold should be considered together withthe planning result of network optimization to avoid over-big set target coverage affectingnetwork optimization, or too-small coverage that can not reach the target capacity.


3.7 AMR Voice Downlink Threshold for ConversationService

The downlink threshold for the conversation service is used for the downlink admission ofconversation service users.

Parameter IDDlConvAMRThd

Value Range0 to 100





Parameter SettingThe default value is 80，that is 80%.

Based on the current NodeB transmit power of the system and the service properties of the callrequesting for admission in the current system, the downlink admission control algorithmpredicts the value of the NodeB transmit power of the system after the new call is admitted, usesthe sum of the predicted value of the NodeB transmit power and the reserved power of thecommon channel as the predicted value of new downlink load, and compares it with the downlinkload threshold. If the predicted load value is not greater than the downlink load threshold, thecall will be admitted; otherwise it is rejected.

The downlink load thresholds include this parameter, downlink threshold for conversationnon-AMR service, downlink threshold for other services. This is mainly to satisfy theoperator’s requirement to limit the proportion of the conversation and other services in the cell.This can also ensure the priorities of conversation service access.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe setting of this parameter is related to settings of cell radius and the maximum cell transmitpower.

l If it is too high, the downlink coverage of the cell is reduced, the neighboring cells areinterfered seriously, and system stability is affected when cell coverage is very small.

l If it is too low, the system resources may be idle, and the target capacity of the networkplanning cannot be satisfied.

This parameter, with downlink threshold for conversation non-AMR service, downlinkthreshold for other services and downlink handover admission threshold should beconsidered together with the network planning result.


3.8 Non AMR Voice Downlink Threshold of ConversationService

It is the downlink threshold of non AMR voice in the conversation service and used for downlinkadmission for non AMR voice user in the conversation service.

Parameter IDDlConvNonAMRThd

Value Range0 to 100





The downlink admission control algorithm predicts the BS transmit power value of the systemafter admission of new call according to the BS transmit power of the current system and theservice feature of admission request call. It uses the sum of the predicted value of BS transmitpower and the reserved power of public channel as the new downlink load predicted value, andcompares it with the downlink load threshold (it is the downlink load basic threshold generally,and it is the downlink load handover threshold at handover application). If the load predictedvalue is not greater than the downlink load threshold, this call is admitted, or else it is rejected.

Downlink load thresholds include this parameter, AMR voice downlink threshold ofconversation service and Downlink thresholds of other services. It is to satisfy the carrier’srequirement for restricting the proportion of voice to other services in cell. This method is alsoused to ensure the priority of voice service access.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe value of this parameter is related with setting of the cell radius and maximum transmit powerof the cell.

l If the parameter is set too high, the downlink coverage of cell is reduced, and a biggerinterference is generated against the neighboring cell. When cell converge is rather small,the system stability is also affected.

l If the value is set too low, system resources are left idle, and the target capacity of networkoptimization cannot be achieved.

This parameter, with AMR voice downlink threshold of conversation service, Downlinkthresholds of other services and Downlink handover admission threshold should beconsidered together with the planning result of network optimization.


3.9 Uplink Threshold for Other ServicesThis parameter is the uplink threshold for services other than the conversation service. It is usedfor uplink admission of other services.

Parameter IDUlOtherThd

Value Range0 to 100






For the descriptions of this parameter, refer to 3.6 Non AMR Voice Uplink Threshold ofConversation Service.

Impact on the Network Performancel If this parameter is too high, the system load after admission is probably too high, which

affects the system stability and results in system congestion.l If it is too low, the users are more likely to be rejected, and some resources may be idled

and wasted.

This parameter, with uplink threshold for conversation service and uplink handoveradmission threshold should be considered together with the network planning results.

l If it is too high, the object coverage in the network planning is influenced.

l If it is too low, the target capacity cannot be satisfied.


3.10 Downlink Threshold for Other ServicesThis parameter is the downlink threshold for services other than the conversation service. It isused for downlink admission of users of other services.

Parameter IDDlOtherThd

Value Range0 to 100



For the description of this parameter, refer to 3.8 Non AMR Voice Downlink Threshold ofConversation Service.



Impact on the Network Performancel If this parameter is too high, the downlink coverage of the cell is reduced, the neighboring

cells are interfered seriously, and the system stability is influenced when the cell coverageis small.

l If it is too low, the system resources may be idle, and the target capacity of the networkplanning cannot be satisfied.

This parameter, downlink threshold for conversation service and downlink handoveradmission threshold should be considered together with the network planning results.

Note that, if the DCCC switch is turned on in the 1.5 algorithm, the admission algorithm at initialadmission is judged in accordance with the initial access rate for all the PS BE services with themaximum expected rate greater than the parameter initial access rate. If admission of the initialaccess rate cannot be accepted, the RNC starts the initial rate negotiation process in intelligentadmission. If the RNC admission at a rate grade under the initial access rate is acceptable, theuser accesses at this rate, but its maximum expected rate is not changed, which is the biggestdifference from adoption of the RNC and the CN negotiation method in v1.3.


3.11 Uplink Handover Admission ThresholdThe uplink handover threshold is used for uplink admission of handover users. The parameteris only useful for uplink inter-frequency handover. Do not do the admission judgment in theuplink soft handover.

Parameter IDUlHOThd

Value Range0 to 100



Based on the current load factor of the system and the service properties of the call requestingfor admission, the uplink admission control algorithm predicts the system load factor after thenew service is admitted, uses the sum of the predicted value of the load factor and the uplinkload factor of the common channel as the predicted value of the new load factor, and comparesthe predicted load factor value with the load factor threshold. If the predicted load factor valueis not greater than the load factor threshold, the call is admitted; otherwise it is rejected.

The uplink load thresholds include this parameter, uplink threshold for other services anduplink threshold for conversation services. According to the relations among these three




parameters, the proportions of the conversation service and other services in the cell can belimited. These parameters can also be used to guarantee the priority of the handover users andthe conversation service access. Uplink handover admission threshold must be smaller thanuplink OLC trigger threshold for smart load control.

This parameter is to reserve resources for handover and to ensure the handover performance;the value of this parameter must be greater than uplink threshold for conversation services.

This parameter has effects only on inter-frequency handover; it has no influence on intra-frequency handover.

Impact on the Network Performancel If this parameter is too high, the system load after admission probably is too heavy, which

influences the system stability and results in the system congestion.l If it is too low, the probability that users are rejected is high, and some resources may be

idle and wasted.

This parameter should be considered together with the uplink threshold for the conversationservice and the uplink thresholds for other services.


3.12 Downlink Handover Admission ThresholdThe handover downlink threshold is used for downlink admission of handover users.

Parameter IDDlHOThd

Value Range0 to 100


Parameter SettingThe default value is 85， that is 85%.

Based on the current NodeB transmit power of the system and the service properties of the callrequesting for admission, the downlink admission control algorithm predicts the value of theNodeB transmit power of the system after the new handover is admitted, uses the sum of thepredicted value of the NodeB transmit power and the reserved power of the common channelas the predicted value of the new downlink load, and compares it with the downlink loadthreshold. If the predicted load value is not bigger than the downlink load threshold, the call isadmitted; otherwise it is rejected.



This parameter is used to reserve resources for handover and to ensure the handover performance.

The downlink handover admission threshold must be lower than congestion controlmeasurement threshold 1 (LCCMRThd1), and must not be lower than downlink threshold forconversation service.

Impact on the Network Performancel If this parameter is too high, the downlink coverage of the cell is reduced, the neighboring

cells are interfered seriously, and the system stability is influenced when the cell coverageis very small.

l If it is too low, the system resources may be idle and wasted.

This parameter should be considered together with downlink threshold for conversationservice and downlink threshold for other services.


3.13 Downlink Total Power ThresholdThe total downlink power threshold of the cell (PR99 + GBP) is used for admission of HSPAdownlink power resource.

Parameter IDDlCellTotalThd

Value Range0 to 100


Parameter SettingThe default value is 90, that is, 90%.

Impact on the Network Performancel If this parameter is too high, the system loads after admission maybe too high, which leads

to the system congestion, and makes the system unstable.l If it is too low, the possibility of subscribers rejected increases, part of hardware resource

is idle and wasted.





3.14 Uplink Handover Credit Reserved SFThis parameter describes the reserved threshold for uplink credit handover. It is used for theadmission of uplink credit for new subscribers.

Parameter ID

UlHoCeResvSf

Value Range

SF4, SF8, SF16, SF32, SF64, SF128, SF256, SFOFF


SF4, SF8, SF16, SF32, SF64, SF128, SF256, SFOFF

Parameter Setting

The default value is SF16.

SFOFF indicates no resources are reserved for the handover. If the remaining cell uplinkresources cannot satisfy this parameter after a new service is admitted, this new service isrejected.

This parameter is set to reserve resources for UEs who perform the handover and to guaranteethe handover performance. The value for this parameter should satisfy the following condition:Handover uplink credit reserved SF ≥ Uplink LDR credit reserved spreading factorthreshold.


When the parameter is set higher, the credit resources reserved for UEs that perform the handoverbecome smaller. At the same time, the admission failure rate for handover UEs becomes higherand subscriber perception is easier to be affected. When the parameter is set lower, the admissionfailure rate for new subscribers become higher and some resources stay idle.

Relevant Commands

Add this parameter through ADD CELLCAC, query it through LST CELLCAC, and modifyit through MOD CELLCAC.

3.15 Downlink Handover Credit and Channel CodeResource Reserved SF

This part describes the threshold for reserving resources for the handover of downlink coderesources and CE resources. This parameter is used for the admission of downlink code resourcesand credit for new subscribers.



Parameter IDDlHoCeCodeResvSf

Value RangeSF4, SF8, SF16, SF32, SF64, SF128, SF256, SFOFF

Physical Value RangeSF4, SF8, SF16, SF32, SF64, SF128, SF256, SFOFF

Parameter SettingThe default value is SF32.

SFOFF indicates no resources are reserved for the handover. If the remaining resources on thedownlink cannot satisfy this threshold after a new service is admitted, this new service is rejected.

This parameter is set to reserve resources for the handover and to guarantee the handover successrate. The value of this parameter must satisfy the following condition: Downlink handovercredit and code resource reserved SF ≥ Downlink LDR credit reserved spreading factorthreshold and Downlink handover credit and code resource reserved SF ≥ Cell LDRreserved spreading factor threshold.

Impact on the Network PerformanceWhen the parameter is set higher, the credit resources reserved for UEs that perform the handoverbecome smaller. At the same time, the admission failure rate for handover UEs becomes higherand subscriber perception is easier to be affected. When the parameter is set lower, the admissionfailure rate for new subscribers become higher and some resources stay idle.

Relevant CommandsAdd this parameter through ADD CELLCAC, query it through LST CELLCAC, and modifyit through MOD CELLCAC.

3.16 Resources Reserved for Common Channel LoadUL common channel load factor ULCCHLOADFACTOR reserves part resources for ULcommon channels; DL common channel load reserved coefficientDLCCHLOADRSRVCOEFF reserves part resources for DL common channels.

Parameter IDULCCHLOADFACTOR

DLCCHLOADRSRVCOEFF

Value Range0 to 100




Physical Value Range0 to 100%, step is 1%

Parameter SettingThe default value for each parameter is 0.

The CAC is only used for dedicated channels, and for common channels, some resource isreserved.

In UL, according to the current load factor and the characteristics of the new call, the UL CACalgorithm predicts the new traffic channels load factor with the assumption of admitting the newcall, then plus with the premeditated common channel UL load factor to get the predicted ULload factor. Then, compare it with UL admission threshold. If it is not higher than the threshold,the call is admitted; otherwise, rejected.

In DL, according to the current load factor and the characteristics of the new call, the DL CACalgorithm predicts the new traffic channels load factor with the assumption of admitting the newcall, then plus with the premeditated common channel DL load factor to get the predicted DLload factor. Then, compare it with DL admission threshold. If it is not higher than the threshold,the call is admitted; otherwise, rejected.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe higher value is set to the parameter, the more power resources are consumed, which maydecrease the system capacity. If the parameter is set to a lower value, the power resources canbe fully utilized. But when the resources are limited, a lower value may result in a poor coverage.




4 Load Control Parameters

About This Chapter

Load control is another very important function in WCDMA system. It maintains the systemload within the normal range to ensure that the system’s overall QoS is in the normal range. Theload control includes LDR (Load Reshuffling) and OLC (Overload Control).

4.1 Cell Load Reshuffling Algorithm ParametersThe common configurable cell load reshuffling (LDR) algorithm parameters are listed here.

4.2 Cell Overload Congestion Control Algorithm ParametersThe common configurable overload congestion control (OLC) parameters are listed here.

RANNetwork Optimization Parameter Reference 4 Load Control Parameters


4.1 Cell Load Reshuffling Algorithm ParametersThe common configurable cell load reshuffling (LDR) algorithm parameters are listed here.

Table 4-1 List of cell load reshuffling (LDR) algorithm parameters



Level

1 ULLDRDLLDR

Uplink/DownlinkLDRalgorithmswitches

OFF Set:ADDCELLALGOSWITCH\NBMSwitchQuery:LSTCELLALGOSWITCHModify:MODCELLALGOSWITCH\NBMSwitch

Cell

2 LdrPeriodTimerLen LDR periodtimer length

10 s Set ormodify:SETLDCPERIODQuery:LSTLDCPERIOD

RNC

3 UlLdrTrigThdUlLdrRelThdDlLdrTrigThdDlLdrRelThd

Uplink ordownlinkLDR triggerand releasethreshold

UlLdrTrigThd:55%DlLdrTrigThd:70%UlLdrRelThd: 45%DlLdrRelThd: 60%

Set:ADDCELLLDM

Query:LSTCELLLDM

Modify:MODCELLLDM

Cell

4 Load Control ParametersRAN





Level

4 UlLdrFirstActionUlLdrSecondActionUlLdrThirdActionUlLdrFourthActionUlLdrFifthActionUlLdrSixthActionUlLdrSeventhActionUlLdrEighthActionDlLdrFirstActionDLLDRSecondActionDLLDRThirdActionDLLDRFourthActionDLLDRFifthActionDlLdrSixthActionDlLdrSeventhActionDlLdrEighthActionDlLdrNinthActionDlLdrTenthAction

Uplink ordownlinkLDR action

ULLDRFirstAction: CODEADJULLDRFirstAction andDLLDRSecondAction:INTERFREQLDHOULLDRSecondAction andDLLDRTHIRDAction:BERATEREDOthers: NOACT

Set:ADDCELLLDRQuery:LSTCELLLDRModify:MODCELLLDR

Cell





Level

5 ULLDRBERateReductionRabNumULLDRPSRTQosRenegRabNumULLDRCSInterRATSHOULDBEHOUserNumULLDRCSInterRATSHOULDNOTBEHOUserNumULLDRPSInterRATSHOULDBEHOUserNumULLDRPSInterRATSHOULDNOTBEHOUserNumULLDRAMRRATEREDUCTIONRABNUMDLLDRBERateReductionRabNumDLLDRPSRTQosRenegRabNumDLLDRCSInterRATSHOULDBEHOUserNumDLLDRCSInterRATSHOULDNOTBEHOUserNumDLLDRPSInterRATSHOULDBEHOUserNumDLLDRPSInterRATSHOULDNOTBEHOUserNumMAXUSERNUMCODEADJDLLDRAMRRATEREDUCTIONRABNUM

Number ofusersprocessed byuplink/downlinkLDR action

ULLDRCSInterRATSHOULDBEHOUserNum,ULLDRCSInterRATSHOULDNOTBEHOUserNumandULLDRAMRRATEREDUCTIONRABNUM are set to3 by default; othersare set to 1 bydefault.DLLDRCSInterRATSHOULDBEHOUserNum,DLLDRCSInterRATSHOULDNOTBEHOUserNumandDLLDRAMRRATEREDUCTIONRABNUM are set to3 by default ; othersare set to 1 bydefault.






Level

6 UlInterFreqHoCell-LoadSpaceThdDlInterFreqHoCell-LoadSpaceThd

UL or DLinter-frequencycell loadhandoverload spacethreshold

20

7 UlInterFreqHoBWThdDlInterFreqHoBWThd

UL or DLinter-frequencycell loadhandovermaximumbound width

20,000 bit/s

8 CellSfResThd Cell SFreservedthreshold

SF8

9 DlCreditSfResThdUlCreditSfResThd

UL or DLcredit SFreservedthreshold

SF8

10 LdrCodePriUseInd LDR codepriorityindicator

FALSE

11 MbmsDecPowerRabThd

MBMSpowercontrolserviceprioritythreshold

1

4.1.1 Uplink and Downlink LDR Algorithm SwitchesThis switch is used to open or close the uplink/downlink preliminary congestion controlalgorithm (LDR). The uplink LDR algorithm switch is ULLDR and the downlink one is DLLDR.

4.1.2 LDR Period Timer LengthWhen preliminary congestion happens, the LDM (Load Monitoring) module sends period ofpreliminary congestion instruction (namely LDR execution period) to LDR.

4.1.3 Uplink and Downlink LDR Trigger Thresholds and Release ThresholdsThis set of parameters determine the load thresholds for the uplink and downlink loads enteringinto or being released from preliminary congestion status.

4.1.4 Uplink or Downlink LDR ActionsThis set of parameters determine the action sequence for the uplink/downlink LDR.



4.1.5 Uplink/Downlink LDR Action Handing User NumberThis group of parameters determine the number of users selected for uplink/downlink LDRactions.

4.1.6 Uplink and Downlink Inter-Frequency Cell Load Handover Load Space ThresholdsInter-frequency load handover happens only when the current load space of the target cell ishigher than this parameter setting. This parameter value is relative to target cell LDR threshold.For uplink, the threshold is UlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd, for downlink, the threshold isDlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd.

4.1.7 Uplink and Downlink Inter-Frequency Cell Load Handover Maximum Band WidthDuring inter-frequency load handover, the UE is selected as the target of inter-frequency loadhandover from the UE set where the bound width is less than this threshold. For uplink, thethreshold is UlInterFreqHoBWThd, For downlink, the threshold is DlInterFreqHoBWThd.

4.1.8 Cell SF Reserved ThresholdThe code adjusting could be done only when the minimum available SF of a cell is larger thanthis threshold.

4.1.9 Uplink or Downlink Credit SF Reserved ThreshodsThe uplink or downlink credit LDR could be done only when the Uplink or Downlink CreditSF Reserve is larger than this threshold.

4.1.10 LDR Code Priority IndicatorThis parameter denotes whether the priority of code is considered during the code treeadjustment.

4.1.11 MBMS Power Control Service Priority ThresholdThe initial congestion status of a cell can be solved through the decrease in power when theMBMS service priority is set at a certain level.

4.1.1 Uplink and Downlink LDR Algorithm SwitchesThis switch is used to open or close the uplink/downlink preliminary congestion controlalgorithm (LDR). The uplink LDR algorithm switch is ULLDR and the downlink one is DLLDR.

Parameter IDULLDR

DLLDR

Value RangeON, OFF

Physical Value RangeOn, Off

Parameter SettingThe default status of both switches is OFF.

The preliminary congestion is a transition status. For the uplink, it means the uplink interferenceis close to the admission threshold; for the downlink, it means the cell downlink transmit power




is close to the admission threshold and the call refusal rate increases significantly. Thepreliminary congestion algorithm control objective is to slowly lower the cell load within theadmission threshold, to obtain higher call success rate at the cost of sacrificing the QoS of thelow-priority users, and to balance the inter-cell load (through inter-frequency load handover).Since most of the LDR actions (except inter-frequency load handover) affect QoS, it is desirableto set the algorithm switch to OFF at the preliminary stage of the network construction whenuser perception is important.

NOTE

The uplink LDR algorithm switch and downlink LDR algorithm switch are set separately.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe preliminary congestion control algorithm improves the admission success rate but decreasesQoS.

Relevant CommandsSet uplink or downlink LDR algorithm switch with the parameter NBMLdcAlgoSwitch throughADD CELLALGOSWITCH, query it through LST CELLALGOSWITCH, and modify itwith the parameter NBMLdcAlgoSwitch through MOD CELLALGOSWITCH.

4.1.2 LDR Period Timer LengthWhen preliminary congestion happens, the LDM (Load Monitoring) module sends period ofpreliminary congestion instruction (namely LDR execution period) to LDR.

Parameter IDLdrPeriodTimerLen


Physical Value Range1 s to 86400 s, step 1 s


Unlike OLC control mechanism, LDR itself has no action timer and relies on LDM's sendingcongestion instruction periodically to trigger. This mechanism originates from the initialalgorithm that tends to use period report control for LDR and time report control for OLC.

Impact on the Network Performancel The lower the parameter is, the more frequently LDR action is executed, which decreases

the load quickly. However, if the value is too low, an LDR action may overlap the previousone before the previous result is displayed in LDM.



l The greater the value is, the more likely this problem can be prevented. If the value is settoo large, the LDR action may be executed rarely, failing to reach the expected purpose oflowering the load timely.

Relevant Commands

Set this parameter through SET LDCPERIOD and query it through LST LDCPERIOD.

4.1.3 Uplink and Downlink LDR Trigger Thresholds and ReleaseThresholds

This set of parameters determine the load thresholds for the uplink and downlink loads enteringinto or being released from preliminary congestion status.

Parameter ID

UlLdrTrigThd

UlLdrRelThd

DlLdrTrigThd

DlLdrRelThd

Value Range

0 to 100


0 to 100%, step 1%

Parameter Setting

ULLdrTrigThd is 55 (55%) and ULLdrRelThd is 45 (45%) by default; DLLdrTrigThd is 70(70%) and DLLdrRelThd is 60 (60%) by default.

The uplink/downlink LDR trigger thresholds must be greater than uplink/downlink LDR releasethresholds.

When uplink/downlink preliminary congestion status is triggered, the uplink/downlink LDRaction starts. The LDR control objective is to preserve space for admission to increase the successrate. Therefore, under the current policy, the LDR trigger threshold shall be set that thecongestion is less than or close to the concerned admission threshold index.


The lower the LDR trigger and release thresholds are, the easier the system is in preliminarycongestion status, the harder it is released from this status, the easier the LDR action happens,and the more likely the users are affected. However, since the resources are preserved, theadmission success rate becomes higher. The carrier shall make tradeoff between these factors.




Relevant CommandsSet these parameters through ADD CELLLDM, query them through LST CELLLDM, andmodify them through MOD CELLLDM.

4.1.4 Uplink or Downlink LDR ActionsThis set of parameters determine the action sequence for the uplink/downlink LDR.

Parameter IDUlLdrFirstAction

UlLdrSecondAction

UlLdrThirdAction

UlLdrFourthAction

UlLdrFifthAction

UlLdrSixthAction

UlLdrSeventhAction

UlLdrEighthAction

DlLdrFirstAction

DLLDRSecondAction

DLLDRThirdAction

DLLDRFourthAction

DLLDRFifthAction

DlLdrSixthAction

DlLdrSeventhAction

DlLdrEighthAction

DlLdrNinthAction

DlLdrTenthAction

Value RangeUplink: Enum (NOACT, INTERFREQLDHO, BERATERED, QOSRENEGO,CSINTERRATLDHO, PSINTERRATLDHO,AMRRATERED)

Downlink: Enum (NOACT, INTERFREQLDHO, BERATERED, QOSRENEGO,CSINTERRATLDHO, PSINTERRATLDHO, AMRRATERED, MBMSDECPOWER,CODEADJ)

Physical Value RangeNOACT: No action

INTERFREQLDHO: Inter-freq load handover



BERATERED: BE traffic rate reduction

QOSRENEGO: Uncontrolled real-time traffic QoS renegotiation

CSINTERRATLDHO: CS domain inter-RAT load handover

PSINTERRATLDHO: PS domain inter-RAT load handover

AMRRATERED: AMR traffic rate reduction

MBMSDECPOWER: MBMS descend power

CODEADJ: Code adjust

Parameter Settingl The default value of ULLDRFirstAction is CODEADJ.

l The default values of ULLDRFirstAction and DLLDRSecondAction areINTERFREQLDHO.

l The default values of ULLDRSecondAction and DLLDRTHIRDAction areBERATERED.

l The default values of other parameters are NOACT.

LDR executes the actions according to the sequence configured. It executes the next action ifthe last one fails. When one action is executed successfully, or its value is NOACT, or all theactions have been executed, this LDR ends and waits for next one.

The LDR algorithm just only selects subscribers and sends control command, the action isperformed by different algorithm modules, for every action needs time to execute, and the LDRalgorithm cannot wait long time for all results, just make the decision according to one of theresults.

The inter-frequency load handover has no bad effect on QoS, and it can balance the load ofdifferent cells, so it is always selected as the first action.

The BE traffic rate reduction is limited by DCCC switch, so only when the DCCC switch is on,can this action work.


Relevant CommandsSet these parameters through ADD CELLLDR, query them through LST CELLLDR, andmodify them through MOD CELLLDR.

4.1.5 Uplink/Downlink LDR Action Handing User NumberThis group of parameters determine the number of users selected for uplink/downlink LDRactions.

Parameter IDULLDRBERATEREDUCTIONRABNUM (uplink LDR-BE service rate reduction RABnumber)




ULLDRPSRTQOSRENEGRABNUM (uplink LDR uncontrollable real-time servicenegotiation RAB number)

ULLDRCSINTERRATSHOULDBEHOUSERNUM (uplink LDR-CS domain inter-systemSHOULDBE load handover user number)

ULLDRCSINTERRATSHOULDNOTBEHOUSERNUM (uplink LDR-CS domain inter-system SHOULDNOTBE load handover user number)

ULLDRPSINTERRATSHOULDBEHOUSERNUM (uplink LDR-PS domain inter-systemSHOULDBE load handover user number)

ULLDRPSINTERRATSHOULDNOTBEHOUSERNUM (uplink LDR-AMR servicereduction RAB number)

MAXUSERNUMCODEADJ (downlink channel code maximum reshuffled user number)

DLLDRBERATEREDUCTIONRABNUM (downlink LDR-BE service reduction RABnumber)

DLLDRPSRTQOSRENEGRABNUM (downlink LDR uncontrollable real-time servicenegotiation RAB number)

DLLDRCSINTERRATSHOULDBEHOUSERNUM (downlink LDR-CS domain inter-systemSHOULDBE load handover user number)

DLLDRCSINTERRATSHOULDNOTBEHOUSERNUM (downlink LDR-CS domain inter-system SHOULDNOTBE load handover user number)

DLLDRPSINTERRATSHOULDBEHOUSERNUM (downlink LDR-PS domain inter-systemSHOULDBE load handover user number)

DLLDRPSINTERRATSHOULDNOTBEHOUSERNUM (downlink LDR-PS domain inter-system SHOULDNOTBE load handover user number)

DLLDRAMRRATEREDUCTIONRABNUM (downlink LDR-AMR service reduction RABnumber)

Value Range1 to 10

Physical Value RangeNone

Parameter SettingThe following parameters are set to 1 by default:l ULLDRBERATEREDUCTIONRABNUM

l ULLDRPSRTQOSRENEGRABNUM

l ULLDRPSINTERRATSHOULDBEHOUSERNUM

l ULLDRPSINTERRATSHOULDNOTBEHOUSERNUM

l MAXUSERNUMCODEADJ

l DLLDRBERATEREDUCTIONRABNUM



l DLLDRPSRTQOSRENEGRABNUM

l DLLDRPSINTERRATSHOULDBEHOUSERNUM

l DLLDRPSINTERRATSHOULDNOTBEHOUSERNUM

The other parameters are set to 3 by default.

l Uplink/Downlink LDR-BE service rate reduction user number: This parameter can beconfigured according to the actual user distribution. If the proportion of high-rate users islarge, you need to set a smaller value for this parameter. If the proportion of high-rate usersis small, you need to set a greater value. Because the primary congestion control algorithmis designed to slowly decrease cell load, you need to set a small value for this parameter.

l Uplink/Downlink uncontrollable real-time service negotiation user number: The targetusers of this parameter are the PS real-time service users. The setting of this parameter isanalogous to the setting of BE service reduction user number. Because the number of usersperforming QoS renegotiation may be smaller than the value of this parameter, for example,the candidate users selected for downlink LDR do not meet the QoS renegotiationconditions, you must leave some margin when setting this parameter to ensure the successof load reengineering.

l Uplink/Downlink CS domain inter-system SHOULDBE load handover user number: Thetarget users of this parameter are the CS domain users. Because the CS domain users aresession users in general and they have little impact on load, you can set a slightly big valuefor this parameter.

l Uplink/Downlink CS domain inter-system SHOULDNOTBE load handover user number:The target users of this parameter are the CS domain users. Because the CS domain usersare session users in general and they have little impact on load, you can set a slightly bigvalue for this parameter.

l Uplink/Downlink PS domain inter-system SHOULDBE load handover user number: Thetarget users of this parameter are the PS domain users. The setting of this parameter isanalogous to the setting of BE service rate reduction user number.

l Uplink/Downlink PS domain inter-system SHOULDNOTBE load handover user number:The target users of this parameter are the PS domain users. The setting of this parameter isanalogous to the setting of BE service rate reduction user number.

l Downlink channel code maximum reshuffling user number: Code reshuffling has a greatimpact on user feelings. In addition, the reshuffled users occupy two code resources duringcode reshuffling. Thus, you must set a small value for this parameter.

For each user, during a life cycle of primary congestion, a type of uplink/downlink LDRoperation can be selected only once. After a type of uplink/downlink LDR operation is selectedby a user, the uplink/downlink LDR marks the user. If this type of operation is triggered again,this user is not selected as the candidate user. Note that an operation is performed separately inthe uplink and downlink directions. That is, the same operation is performed one time in boththe uplink direction and the downlink operation.

Impact on Network PerformanceThe greater the values of this set of parameters are, the more significant the load of the local cellis reduced. This, however, may affect user feeling or cause traffic congestion in the target cell.The smaller the values of this set of parameters are, the smaller the load range are adjusted bythe LDR. This, however, more probably ensures users' QoS and balances traffic load.




Relevant CommandsUse the ADD CELLLDR command for configuration, the LST CELLLDR command forquery, and the MOD CELLLDR command for modification.

4.1.6 Uplink and Downlink Inter-Frequency Cell Load HandoverLoad Space Thresholds

Inter-frequency load handover happens only when the current load space of the target cell ishigher than this parameter setting. This parameter value is relative to target cell LDR threshold.For uplink, the threshold is UlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd, for downlink, the threshold isDlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd.

Parameter IDUlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd

DlInterFreqHoCellLoadSpaceThd

Value Range0 to 100


Parameter SettingThe default values are 20, that is 20%.

Impact on the Network Performancel The lower these parameters are, the easier it is to find qualified target cell for blind

handover. However, a too-low value easily makes the target cell enter congestion status.l The greater the parameters are, the more difficult the inter-frequency blind handover occurs,

and the easier to guarantee the stability of the target cell.


4.1.7 Uplink and Downlink Inter-Frequency Cell Load HandoverMaximum Band Width

During inter-frequency load handover, the UE is selected as the target of inter-frequency loadhandover from the UE set where the bound width is less than this threshold. For uplink, thethreshold is UlInterFreqHoBWThd, For downlink, the threshold is DlInterFreqHoBWThd.

Parameter IDUlInterFreqHoBWThd



DlInterFreqHoBWThd

Value Range0 to 400,000

Physical Value Range0 to 400000 bit/s

Parameter SettingThe default values are 200,000 bit/s.

The uplink and downlink share this parameter to execute the inter-frequency load handover.

During the uplink/downlink inter-frequency load handover, a user in the current cell (the numberof users is not changeable) is selected and blind handover to the target cell to reduce the currentcell load and to indirectly balance the loads between the inter-frequency cells. To select a user,the users are sorted according to the bound width. The user who is less than this parameter valueis selected to trigger the inter-frequency load handover.

Impact on the Network Performancel The greater the parameters are, the higher the service rate of the user in handover is, and

the more obviously the cell load is decreased. But high value gives rise to fluctuation andcongestion of the target cell load.

l The lower the parameters are, the smaller the amplitude of the load decreased as a resultof the inter-frequency load handover, and the easier to maintain the stability of the targetcell load.


4.1.8 Cell SF Reserved ThresholdThe code adjusting could be done only when the minimum available SF of a cell is larger thanthis threshold.

Parameter IDCellLdrSfResThd

Value RangeSF8, SF16, SF32, SF64, SF128, SF256






When the downlink code congestion status is triggered, the LDR action begins to work. Thepurpose of the LDR control is to reserve the code resource for new access subscribers, andimprove the admission success rate.

Impact on the Network PerformanceWhen the code resource threshold of LDR is lower, the downlink code resource is easier to beinitial congestion status, the LDR action is easier to do, and subscriber perception is easier to beaffected; but at the same time, the more code resource is reserved, the admission success rate ishigh. The parameter setting should be considered according to the operator's requirement.

Relevant CommandsSet the parameter through ADD CELLLDR, query it through LST CELLLDR, and modify itthrough MOD CELLLDR.

4.1.9 Uplink or Downlink Credit SF Reserved ThreshodsThe uplink or downlink credit LDR could be done only when the Uplink or Downlink CreditSF Reserve is larger than this threshold.

Parameter IDUlLdrCreditSfResThd

DlLdrCreditSfResThd

Value RangeSF8, SF16, SF32, SF64, SF128, SF256



Impact on the Network PerformanceWhen the parameter is lower, the uplink or downlink credit resource is easier to be initialcongestion status, the LDR action is easier to do, and subscriber perception is easier to beaffected; but at the same time, the more credit resource is reserved, the admission success rateis high. The parameter setting should be configured to meet the operator's requirement.

Relevant CommandsSet the parameter through ADD CELLLDR, query it through LST CELLLDR, and modify itthrough MOD CELLLDR.



4.1.10 LDR Code Priority IndicatorThis parameter denotes whether the priority of code is considered during the code treeadjustment.

Parameter ID

LdrCodePriUseInd

Value Range

FALSE, TRUE


None.

Parameter Setting

The default value is FALSE.

FALSE denotes not considering the priority of code during the code tree adjustment;TRUEdenotes considering the priority of code during the code tree adjustment.


If the parameter is TRUE, the high priority code is reserved during the code tree adjustment. Itis good for code resource dynamic share, which is just for HSDPA.

Relevant Commands

Set the parameter through ADD CELLLDR, query it through LST CELLLDR, and modify itthrough MOD CELLLDR.

4.1.11 MBMS Power Control Service Priority ThresholdThe initial congestion status of a cell can be solved through the decrease in power when theMBMS service priority is set at a certain level.

Parameter ID

MBMSDECPOWERRABTHD

Value Range

1 to 15


1 to 15




Parameter SettingThe default setting is 1.

When the priority of the RAB among MBMS services exceeds this threshold, re-configure theMBMS power as the minimum power.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe smaller this parameter is set, the greater the scope for selecting the MBMS services is. Atthe same time, the cell overload is significantly decreased while the impact on the MBMSservices become greater. The greater this parameter is set, the smaller the scope for selecting theMBMS services is. At the same time, the cell overload is inconsiderably decreased and the impacton the MBMS services become greater. The quality of services with high priority, however, canbe guaranteed.

Relevant CommandsAdd this parameter through ADD CELLLDR, query it through LST CELLLDR, and modifyit through MOD CELLLDR.

4.2 Cell Overload Congestion Control AlgorithmParameters

The common configurable overload congestion control (OLC) parameters are listed here.

Table 4-2 List of smart load control parameters

No. ParameterID

ParameterMeaning

DefaultValue

RelevantCommand

Level

1 ULOLCDLOLC

Uplink/DownlinkOLC algorithmswitch

Off Set: ADDCELLALGOSWITCH\NBMLdcAlgoSwitchQuery: LSTCELLALGOSWITCHModify: MODCELLALGOSWITCH\NBMLdcAlgoSwitch

Cell

2 OlcPeriodTimerLen

OLC period timerlength

3000, that is, 3s

Set or modify: SETLDCPERIODQuery: LSTLDCPERIOD

RNC



No. ParameterID

ParameterMeaning

DefaultValue

RelevantCommand

Level

3 UlOlcTrigThdDlOlcTrigThdUlOlcRelThdDlOlcRelThd

Uplink or downlinkOLC triggerthreshold andrelease threshold

UlOlcTrigThd: 95%DlOlcTrigThd: 95%UlOlcRelThd:80%DlOlcRelThd:80%

Set: ADDCELLLDMQuery: LSTCELLLDMModify: MODCELLLDM

Cell

4 UlOlcFTFRstrctTimesDlOlcFTFRstrctTimes

Uplink or downlinkOLC fast TFrestriction times

3 times Set: ADDCELLOLCQuery: LSTCELLOLCModify: MODCELLOLC5 UlOlcFTFRst

rctRabNumDlOlcFTFRstrctRabNum

Uplink or downlinkOLC fast TF restrictRAB number

3

6 RateRstrctTimerLenRateRecoverTimerLen

OLC fast TF restrictdata rate restricttimer length andrecover timerlength

RateRstrctTimerLen: 3000(3 s)RateRecoverTimerLen:5000 (5 s)

7 RateRstrctCoef

OLC fast TF restrictdata rate restrictcoefficient

68, that is,68%

8 UlOlcTraffRelRabNumDlOlcTraffRelRabNum

Uplink or downlinkrelease RABnumber

0

4.2.1 Uplink and Downlink OLC Algorithm SwitchesThese parameters are used to open or close uplink or downlink overload control algorithm. Theuplink OLC algorithm switch is ULOLC and the downlink OLC algorithm switch is DLOLC.

4.2.2 OLC Period Timer LengthThis parameter is the period of the OLC timer. When this period is up, OLC executes once andthen restarts automatically. The period of the timer is the period of the OLC action. The uplinkOLC and downlink OLC share the same timer.

4.2.3 Uplink and Downlink OLC Trigger Threshold and Release ThresholdThis set of parameters determine the threshold exceeding which the uplink/downlink load entersoverload status and the threshold within which the uplink/downlink load is released fromoverload status.

4.2.4 Uplink and Downlink OLC Fast TF Restriction Times




These are uplink/downlink OLC action thresholds, meaning the times of uplink/downlink OLCfast TF restrictions that are executed. The uplink parameter is UlOlcFTFRstrctTimes and thedownlink parameter is DlOlcFTFRstrctTimes.

4.2.5 Uplink and Downlink OLC Fast TF Restrict RAB NumberThis set of parameters donote the number of RABs selected for one uplink or downlink OLCfast TF restriction.

4.2.6 OLC Fast TF Restrict Data Rate Restrict Timer Length And Recover Timer LengthRateRstrctTimerLen specifies the period for MAC to apply TF restriction on BE users in adownlink fast TF restriction. RateRecoverTimerLen specifies the period for MAC to apply TFrecovery on BE users when the downlink overload is released.

4.2.7 OLC Fast TF Restrict Data Rate Restrict CoefficientOLC fast TF restriction rate coefficient means the degree of the rate restriction.

4.2.8 Uplink and Downlink Release RAB NumberThis set of parameters denote the number of users released in an uplink/downlink OLC releaseaction.

4.2.1 Uplink and Downlink OLC Algorithm SwitchesThese parameters are used to open or close uplink or downlink overload control algorithm. Theuplink OLC algorithm switch is ULOLC and the downlink OLC algorithm switch is DLOLC.

Parameter IDULOLC

DLPLC

Value RangeON, OFF


Parameter SettingThe default status of the two switches are OFF.

When overload happens in the uplink/downlink, the uplink/downlink OLC algorithm can quicklyrelieve uplink/downlink load by TF restriction or user release. Cell overload is an emergentstatus.

l For the uplink, overload means the cell uplink/downlink interference is close to or reachesthe limit and may give rise to difficulty in BTS uplink reception and decoding, resulting incall drop.

l For the downlink, overload means the downlink transmit power is close to or reaches thelimit and the user downlink inner loop power control cannot be increased as needed becauseof the BTS power restriction, resulting in call drop.

Therefore, overload control (OLC) must be executed to quickly lower the cell uplink/downlinkload to a reasonable range.



NOTE

The uplink OLC algorithm switch and downlink OLC algorithm switches are set separately.


When OLC is open, it can quickly adjust the cell load but may also cause oscillation of the cellload and affect the call drop rate.

Relevant Commands

Set uplink or downlink OLC algorithm switch with parameter NBMLdcAlgoSwitch throughADD CELLALGOSWITCH , query it through LST CELLALGOSWITCH , and modify itwith parameter NBMLdcAlgoSwitch through MOD CELLALGOSWITCH .

4.2.2 OLC Period Timer LengthThis parameter is the period of the OLC timer. When this period is up, OLC executes once andthen restarts automatically. The period of the timer is the period of the OLC action. The uplinkOLC and downlink OLC share the same timer.

Parameter ID

OlcPeriodTimerLen

Value Range

100 to 86,400,000


100 ms to 86,400 s, step 1 ms

Parameter Setting

The default value is 1000, that is, 1 s.

In the current overload control algorithm, all the uplink/downlink OLC actions (TF restrictionand user release) are executed in the period of the OLC timer. This parameter along withULOLCFTFRstrctUserNum, DLOLCFTFRstrctUserNum, ULOLCFTFRSTRCTTimes,DLOLCFTFRSTRCTTimes, ULOLCTraffRelUserNum, and DLOLCTraffRelUserNumdetermine the time it takes to release the uplink/downlink overload.

Impact on the Network Performancel If the OLC action period is set too long, the system may respond very slowly to overload.

l If the OLC action period is set too short, unnecessary adjustment may occur before theprevious OLC action has taken effect, thus affects the system performance.

Relevant Commands

Set this parameter through SET LDCPERIOD and query it through LST LDCPERIOD.




4.2.3 Uplink and Downlink OLC Trigger Threshold and ReleaseThreshold

This set of parameters determine the threshold exceeding which the uplink/downlink load entersoverload status and the threshold within which the uplink/downlink load is released fromoverload status.

Parameter ID

UlOlcTrigThd

DlOlcTrigThd

UlOlcRelThd

DlOlcRelThd

Value Range

0 to 100


0 to 100%, step 1%

Parameter Setting

UlOlcTrigThd and DlOlcTrigThd are 95 (95%) by default; UlOlcRelThd and DlOlcRelThd are80 (80%) by default.

The uplink/downlink OLC trigger threshold judges whether the system uplink/downlink is inoverload status. If the cell load is consecutively higher than the threshold for pre-determinedtimes, it means the system is in overload status for a long time. Under this circumstance, thesystem performs OLC algorithm if the cell OLC switch is open, including fast TF restriction oreven user release.

The OLC trigger threshold must be greater than or equal to the OLC release threshold.


The lower the OLC trigger threshold, the easier the system in overload status. Since OLCultimately uses extreme method like user release to lower the load, a too low value is verydetrimental to the system performance.

The lower the OLC release threshold, the harder the system releases the overload. Since theconsequence of overload is not as severe as expected, it is desirable to set the two parameters abit higher given that the difference between OLC trigger threshold and OLC release thresholdis fixed.

Relevant Commands

Set these parameters through ADD CELLLDM, query them through LST CELLLDM, andmodify them through MOD CELLLDM.



4.2.4 Uplink and Downlink OLC Fast TF Restriction TimesThese are uplink/downlink OLC action thresholds, meaning the times of uplink/downlink OLCfast TF restrictions that are executed. The uplink parameter is UlOlcFTFRstrctTimes and thedownlink parameter is DlOlcFTFRstrctTimes.

Parameter ID

UlOlcFTFRstrctTimes

DlOlcFTFRstrctTimes

Value Range

0 to 100


0 to 100 times

Parameter Setting

The default values are 3 times.

When uplink/downlink overload is triggered, the RNC immediately executes OLC action byfirst executing uplink/downlink fast TF restriction. The internal counter is incremented by 1 witheach execution. If the number of overloads does not exceed the OLC action threshold, the systemlowers the BE service rate by lowering TF to relieve the overload. Exceeding OLC actionthreshold means that the previous operation has no obvious effect on alleviating the overloadand the system has to release users to solve the overload problem.


l The lower the parameters, the more likely the users released, resulting in negative effecton the system performance.

l If the parameters are set too high, the overload status is released slowly.

Relevant Commands

Set these parameters through ADD CELLOLC, query them through LST CELLOLC, andmodify them through MOD CELLOLC.

4.2.5 Uplink and Downlink OLC Fast TF Restrict RAB NumberThis set of parameters donote the number of RABs selected for one uplink or downlink OLCfast TF restriction.

Parameter ID

UlOlcFTFRstrctRabNum

DlOlcFTFRstrctRabNum




Value Range1 to 10


Parameter SettingThe default values are 3.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe higher the parameters, the more users involved in fast TF restriction under identicalconditions, the quicker the cell load decreases, and the more user QoS is affected.

Relevant CommandsSet these parameters through ADD CELLOLC, query them through LST CELLOLC, andmodify them through MOD CELLOLC.

4.2.6 OLC Fast TF Restrict Data Rate Restrict Timer Length AndRecover Timer Length

RateRstrctTimerLen specifies the period for MAC to apply TF restriction on BE users in adownlink fast TF restriction. RateRecoverTimerLen specifies the period for MAC to apply TFrecovery on BE users when the downlink overload is released.

Parameter IDRateRstrctTimerLen

RateRecoverTimerLen


Physical Value Range1 ms to 65,535 ms

Parameter SettingRateRstrctTimerLen is 3000 ms (3 s) by default; RateRecoverTimerLen is 5000 ms (5 s) bydefault.

Once the MAC layer receives instruction to perform fast TF restriction on a user, it periodicallyuses rate restriction coefficient to restrict the maximum available TF of the user until it receivesoverload release instruction. Therefore every period specified by RateRstrctTimerLen, apartfrom the new OLC-selected users who are TF restricted, the previously selected users are alsofast-TF restricted in an effort to release the overload more quickly. In order to timely adjust the



BE service rate according to the load, the value of RateRstrctTimerLen shall be slightly greaterthan the system load response time after rate adjustment and the period of overload detection.

Impact on the Network PerformanceA greater RateRstrctTimerLen gets the BE service rate decreases more slowly. A lowerRateRstrctTimerLen value makes it harder to receive the overload release instruction.

Great RateRecoverTimerLen value leads to slow BE service recovery rate but prevents overloadfrom triggering again in short time. Low RateRecoverTimerLen value leads to quick BE servicerecovery rate but gives rise to yet more overloads.


4.2.7 OLC Fast TF Restrict Data Rate Restrict CoefficientOLC fast TF restriction rate coefficient means the degree of the rate restriction.

Parameter IDRateRstrctCoef

Value Range1 to 99



Impact on the Network PerformanceThe lower the parameter, the more severe the rate restricted. Too low value may affect the BEtransmission delay. Large value means loose restriction, which may be ineffective in alleviatingthe overload.

Relevant CommandsSet this parameter through ADD CELLOLC, query it through LST CELLOLC, and modifyit through MOD CELLOLC.

4.2.8 Uplink and Downlink Release RAB NumberThis set of parameters denote the number of users released in an uplink/downlink OLC releaseaction.




Parameter IDUlOlcTraffRelRabNum

DlOlcTraffRelRabNum

Value Range0 to 10


Parameter SettingThe default values are 0.

Impact on the Network PerformanceHigher values of these parameters get the cell load decreases more obviously at the cost ofnegatively affecting user perception.




5 PS Service Rate Control Parameters

About This Chapter

The PS Service rate control includes dynamic channel configuration, state transfer.

5.1 BE Service Related Threshold ParametersThe common configurable BE service related threshold parameters are listed here.

5.2 Dynamic Channel Configuration Control ParametersThe common configurable dynamic channel configuration parameters are listed here.

5.3 Link Stability ParametersThe common configurable link stability parameters are listed here.

5.4 State Transfer ParametersThe common configurable state transfer parameters are listed here.

5.5 PS InactiveThe common configurable PS inactive parameters are listed here.

5.6 RLC Retransmission Monitor Algorithm ParametersThe common configurable RLC retransmission monitor algorithm parameters are listed here.

RANNetwork Optimization Parameter Reference 5 PS Service Rate Control Parameters


5.1 BE Service Related Threshold ParametersThe common configurable BE service related threshold parameters are listed here.

Table 5-1 List of BE service related threshold parameters


DefaultValue

RelevantCommand

Level

1 BeBitRateThd BE servicehandover ratethreshold

D384, that is,384 kbit/s

Set or Modify:SETHOCOMMQuery:LSTHOCOMM

RNC

2 UlPsBeGuarRateDlPsBeGuarRate

Uplink anddownlink BEguaranteebitrate


For RNC levelSet or modify:SETDCCCQuery:LST DCCCFor Cell levelSet:ADDCELLDCCCQuery:LSTCELLDCCCModify:MODCELLDCCC

RNC/Cell

3 UlBeTraffDecThsDlBeTraffDecThs

UpLink anddownlink BEtraffic DCHdecisionthreshold

D8, that is, 8kbit/s

For RNC levelSet or modify:SETFRCQuery:LST FRCFor Cell levelSet:ADD CELLFRCQuery:LSTCELLFRCModify:MODCELLFRC

4 DlStrThsonHsdpa

DL streamingthreshold onHSDPA


Set or modify:SETFRCQuery:LST FRC

RNC

5 DlBeTraffThsOnHsdpa

DL BE trafficthreshold onHSDPA


6 UlBeTraffThsOnHsupa

UL BE trafficthreshold onHSUPA


5 PS Service Rate Control ParametersRAN




DefaultValue

RelevantCommand

Level

7 UlStrThsOnHsupa

UL streamingtrafficthreshold onHSUPA


8 UlStrTransModeOnHsupa

StreamingserviceHSUPAtransmissionmode

Non-Scheduled

5.1.1 BE Service Handover Rate ThresholdThis parameter is the bit rate threshold used to determine whether to perform soft handover forthe Best Effort (BE) service on DCH.

5.1.2 Uplink/Downlink BE Service Insured RateThis describes the insured bit rate configured for BE services with different priorities. DCH andH share a set of parameters.

5.1.3 UpLink and Downlink BE traffic DCH decision thresholdThese parameters are the rate decision thresholds of UL and DL PS domain background andinteractive service whether to be carried on DCH. When the UL service rate is greater than orequal to this threshold, the service is set up on DCH; otherwise, on CCH.

5.1.4 DL Streaming Threshold on HSDPAThis parameter is the rate decision threshold of DL PS domain streaming service whether to becarried on HS-DSCH. When the maximum DL service rate is greater than or equal to thisthreshold, the service is carried on HS-DSCH; otherwise, on DCH.

5.1.5 DL BE Traffic Threshold on HSDPAThis parameter is the rate decision threshold of DL PS domain background/interactive servicewhether to be carried on HS-DSCH. When the maximum DL service rate is greater than or equalto this threshold, the service is carried on HS-DSCH; otherwise, on DCH.

5.1.6 UL BE Traffic Threshold on HSUPAThis parameter is the rate decision threshold of UL PS domain background/interactive serviceto be carried on E-DCH. When the maximum UL service rate is greater than or equal to thisthreshold, the service is carried on E-DCH; otherwise, on DCH.

5.1.7 UL Streaming Traffic Threshold on HSUPAThis parameter is the rate decision threshold of UL PS domain streaming service to be carriedon E-DCH. When the maximum UL service rate is greater than or equal to this threshold, theservice is carried on E-DCH; otherwise, on DCH.

5.1.8 Streaming Service HSUPA Transmission ModeThis parameter is valid only when the streaming services are mapped onto the E-DCH channel.This parameter is used to control the E-DCH data transmission mode for streaming services.

5.1.1 BE Service Handover Rate ThresholdThis parameter is the bit rate threshold used to determine whether to perform soft handover forthe Best Effort (BE) service on DCH.



Parameter ID

BeBitRateThd

Value Range

Enum (D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384)


Enum (8k, 16k, 32k, 64k, 128k, 144k, 256k, 384k) bit/s

Parameter Setting

The default value is D384, that is 384kbit/s.

l When the maximum bit rate of the BE service is lower than or equal to this threshold, thesystem performs soft handover for this user to guarantee the service quality.

l If the maximum bit rate of the BE service is higher than the threshold, the system performsintra-frequency hard handover for this user to avoid great effect of soft handover on thesystem capacity.


The greater this parameter is, the better the QoS of user probably becomes. But the resource isconsumed more.

Relevant Commands

Set this parameter through SET HOCOMM, and query it through LST HOCOMM.

5.1.2 Uplink/Downlink BE Service Insured RateThis describes the insured bit rate configured for BE services with different priorities. DCH andH share a set of parameters.

Parameter ID

GOLDULGBR

SILVERULGBR

COPPERULGBR

GOLDDLGBR

SILVERDLGBR

COPPERDLGBR

Value Range

D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, and D384




Physical Value Range8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 144, 256, and 384 (unit: kbit/s)

Parameter SettingThe default value is D64, which stands for 64 kbit/s.

Impact on Network PerformanceYou can assign different GBRs to the users with different priorities to show servicedifferentiation. The QoS of the users with higher priorities is better. The user access, however,becomes more difficult.

Relevant CommandsUse the SET USERGBR command for configuration and use the LST USERGBR commandfor query.

5.1.3 UpLink and Downlink BE traffic DCH decision thresholdThese parameters are the rate decision thresholds of UL and DL PS domain background andinteractive service whether to be carried on DCH. When the UL service rate is greater than orequal to this threshold, the service is set up on DCH; otherwise, on CCH.

Parameter IDUlBeTraffDecThs

DlBeTraffDecThs

Value RangeEnum (D8, D16)

Physical Value RangeEnum (8, 16) kbit/s

Parameter SettingThe default values are D8, that is 8 kbit/s.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe greater this parameters are, the better the QoS of user probably becomes. But the resourceis consumed more.

Relevant CommandsFor RNC level, set the parameters through SET FRC, and query them through LST FRC.

For cell level, set the parameters through ADD CELLFRC, and query them through LSTCELLFRC, and modify them through MOD CELLFRC.



5.1.4 DL Streaming Threshold on HSDPAThis parameter is the rate decision threshold of DL PS domain streaming service whether to becarried on HS-DSCH. When the maximum DL service rate is greater than or equal to thisthreshold, the service is carried on HS-DSCH; otherwise, on DCH.

Parameter IDDlStrThsonHsdpa

Value RangeEnum (D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256)

Physical Value RangeEnum (8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 144, 256, 384, 768, 1024, 1536, 2048) kbit/s

Parameter SettingThe default value is D64, that is 64 kbit/s.

Impact on the Network PerformanceIf the parameter is set too low, it possibly causes the capacity of HS-DSCH less than DCH.


5.1.5 DL BE Traffic Threshold on HSDPAThis parameter is the rate decision threshold of DL PS domain background/interactive servicewhether to be carried on HS-DSCH. When the maximum DL service rate is greater than or equalto this threshold, the service is carried on HS-DSCH; otherwise, on DCH.

Parameter IDDlBeTraffThsOnHsdpa

Value RangeEnum (D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384, D768, D1024, D1536, D2048)

Physical Value RangeEnum (8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 144, 256, 384, 768, 1024, 1536, 2048) kbit/s

Parameter SettingThe default value is D8, that is 8 kbit/s.





If the parameter is set too high, BE service is easier to be beard on DCH, and the system codeutilization rate decreases.

Relevant Commands

Set the parameter through SET FRC, and query it through LST FRC.

5.1.6 UL BE Traffic Threshold on HSUPAThis parameter is the rate decision threshold of UL PS domain background/interactive serviceto be carried on E-DCH. When the maximum UL service rate is greater than or equal to thisthreshold, the service is carried on E-DCH; otherwise, on DCH.

Parameter ID

UlBeTraffThsOnHsupa

Value Range

Enum (D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384, D711, D1024, D1450, D2048)


Enum (8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 144, 256, 384, 711, 1024, 1450, 2048) kbit/s

Parameter Setting

The default value is 711 kbit/s.


By simulation, comparing the data services bearing on E-DCH to those bearing on DCH, thesystem traffic volume improves much. So the BE services are all suggested to be borne on E-DCH.

Relevant Commands

Set the parameter through SET FRC, and query it through LST FRC.

5.1.7 UL Streaming Traffic Threshold on HSUPAThis parameter is the rate decision threshold of UL PS domain streaming service to be carriedon E-DCH. When the maximum UL service rate is greater than or equal to this threshold, theservice is carried on E-DCH; otherwise, on DCH.

Parameter ID

UlStrThsOnHsupa



Value RangeEnum (D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256)

Physical Value RangeEnum (8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 144, 256) kbit/s

Parameter SettingThe default value is 256 kbit/s.



5.1.8 Streaming Service HSUPA Transmission ModeThis parameter is valid only when the streaming services are mapped onto the E-DCH channel.This parameter is used to control the E-DCH data transmission mode for streaming services.

Parameter IDUlStrTransModeOnHsupa

Value RangeScheduled or Non-Scheduled


Parameter SettingThe default value is Non-Scheduled.


Relevant CommandsSet this parameter through SET FRC and query it through LST FRC.

5.2 Dynamic Channel Configuration Control ParametersThe common configurable dynamic channel configuration parameters are listed here.




Table 5-2 List of dynamic channel configuration parameters

No.

ParameterID

ParameterMeaning


Level

1 Event4aThd Traffic upperthreshold

D1024, that is,1024 bytes

Set: ADDTYPRABDCCCMCQuery: LSTTYPRABModify: MODTYPRABDCCCMC

RNC

2 Event4bThd Traffic lowerthreshold

D128, that is, 128bytes

3 TimetoTrigger4A

Time to triggerevent 4A

D240, that is, 240ms

4 TimetoTrigger4B

Time to Triggerevent 4B

D2560, that is,2.56 s

5 PendingTime4A

Pending timeafter trigger event4A

D4000, that is, 4s

6 PendingTime4B

Pending timeafter trigger event4B

D4000, that is, 4s

7 UlDcccRateThdDlDcccRateThd

Uplink anddownlink DCCCrate thresholds

D64 (64 kbit/s) Set or modify: SETDCCCQuery: LST DCCC

RNC

8 UlMidRateThdDlMidRateThd

Uplink anddownlink middlerate thresholds

D128 (128 kbit/s)

9 UlRateAdjLevelDlRateAdjLevel

Uplink anddownlink rateadjust level

2_Rates

10 LittleRateThd

Low activitybitrate threshold


5.2.1 Traffic Upper ThresholdThe premise for 4A event reporting is that the buffer traffic exceeds this threshold.

5.2.2 Traffic Lower ThresholdThe premise for 4B event reporting is that the buffered traffic is lower than this threshold.

5.2.3 Time to Trigger Event 4AWhen buffered traffic is greater than 4A threshold and remains there for a longer time than thedelay trigger time, event 4A is reported.

5.2.4 Time to Trigger Event 4BWhen buffered traffic is less than event 4B threshold and remains there for a longer time thanthe delay trigger time, event 4B is reported.



5.2.5 Pending Time after Trigger Event 4AAfter a event 4A is reported, a timer is started. No more event 4A is reported before the timerexpires.

5.2.6 Pending time after trigger Event 4BAfter an event 4B is reported, a timer is started. No more event 4B is reported before the timerexpires.

5.2.7 Uplink and Downlink DCCC Rate ThresholdsWhen the maximum uplink/downlink rates required by the BE service are not greater than theuplink/downlink DCCC rate thresholds, channel reconfiguration is not carried out for the uplink/downlink services according to the traffic condition.

5.2.8 Uplink and Downlink Middle Rate ThresholdsThese parameters are the uplink and downlink middle rate threshold when 3 rate adjusting inDCCC is used and the middle rate compute method is HAND_APPOINT.

5.2.9 Uplink and Downlink Rate Adjust LevelsThese parameters are used to judge uplink and downlink 2 rates or 3 rates adjusting in DCCC.

5.2.10 Low activity bitrate thresholdWhen the PS BE service rate has reduced to the rate threshold of DCCC, but UE can not transferto CELL_FACH state for some reasons (for example: PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH isoff; UE has CS service). The PS BE service rate is reduced to this rate when PS BE servicesatisfy the requirement of D2F.

5.2.1 Traffic Upper ThresholdThe premise for 4A event reporting is that the buffer traffic exceeds this threshold.

Parameter IDEvent4aThd

Value RangeEnum (D16, D32, D64, D128, D256, D512, D1024, D2k, D3k, D4k, D6k, D8k, D12k, D16k,D24k, D32k, D48k, D64k, D96k, D128k, D192k, D256k, D384k, D512k, D768k)

Physical Value RangeEnum (16 ,32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2k, 3k, 4k, 6k, 8k, 12k, 16k, 24k, 32k, 48k, 64k, 96k,128k, 192k, 256k, 384k, 512k, 768k) bytes

Parameter SettingThe default value is D1024, that is 1024 bytes. The parameter is set separately in downlink anduplink.

Event 4A: The transmission channel traffic (which is the buffered traffic in DCCC) exceeds anabsolute threshold. When this event occurs, data transmission is accelerated through the increaseof channel transmission bandwidth.

The setting of the traffic upper threshold is used to check whether there are data to be transmitted.Therefore, to meet the rapid requirement of user data transmission, we can configure thethreshold of 4A to a low value; however, it should not be too low, so as to avoid triggering




unnecessary channel reconfiguration to increase the bandwidth while users do not have enoughdata to transmit.


l The greater this parameter is set, the slower the user data transmission rate probablybecomes.

l The smaller it is, the faster the user data transmission rate probably becomes. However, ifthe setting is too low, the channel bandwidth increases while it is unnecessary.

Relevant Commands

Set this parameter through ADD TYPRABDCCCMC, and modify it through MODTYPRABDCCCMC, and query it through LST TYPRAB.

5.2.2 Traffic Lower ThresholdThe premise for 4B event reporting is that the buffered traffic is lower than this threshold.

Parameter ID

Event4bThd

Value Range

Enum (D8, D16,D32, D64, D128,D256, D512, D1024, D2k, D3k, D4k, D6k, D8k, D12k, D16k,D24k, D32k, D48k, D64k, D96k, D128k, D192k, D256k, D384k, D512k)


Enum (8, 16,32, 64, 128,256, 512, 1024, 2k, 3k, 4k, 6k, 8k, 12k, 16k, 24k, 32k, 48k, 64k, 96k,128k, 192k, 256k, 384k, 512k) bytes

Parameter Setting

The default value is D128, that is 128 bytes. The parameter is set separately in downlink anduplink.

Event 4B: The transmission channel traffic (which is the buffered traffic in DCCC) becomeslower than an absolute threshold. When this event occurs, the channel transmission bandwidthis reduced to avoid resource waste.

The 4B event is used to check whether the traffic becomes lighter. When the service transmissionis about to finish, the traffic in the buffer decreases rapidly until it becomes zero. Therefore,event 4B threshold can be configured to a relatively small value. Furthermore, when the sourcerate of the service is relatively constant but very low, we can also configure an appropriate 4Bthreshold so that the low source rate can be detected and the channel bandwidth can beaccordingly reduced. Tests on the FTP service and services with low source rates show that whenthe setting of the 4B threshold is slightly greater than the size of one transmission block, thedetection required for bandwidth reduction for the two kinds of services above can be satisfied.



Impact on the Network PerformanceA greater value of this parameter gets event 4B to be triggered more easily; however, the channeltransmission bandwidth is reduced, which may influence the transmission speed of the user data.

Relevant CommandsSet this parameter through ADD TYPRABDCCCMC, modify it through MODTYPRABDCCCMC, and query it through LST TYPRAB.

5.2.3 Time to Trigger Event 4AWhen buffered traffic is greater than 4A threshold and remains there for a longer time than thedelay trigger time, event 4A is reported.

Parameter IDTimetoTrigger4A

Value RangeEnum (D0, D10, D20, D40, D60, D80, D100, D120, D160, D200, D240, D320, D640, D1280,D2560, D5000)

Physical Value RangeEnum (0, 10, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 160, 200, 240, 320, 640, 1280,2560,5000) ms

Parameter SettingTimetoTrigger4A is D240 by default, that is , 240 ms. The parameter is set separately in uplinkand downlink.

Time to trigger for event 4A is to prevent frequent trigger caused by small fluctuation of theservice traffic. It is only for the measurement report of the first trigger event.

Impact on the Network Performancel A higher value of this parameter makes event 4A harder to be triggered. In such case it can

prevent frequent adjustment of the BE service rate. However, too high value makes thesystem respond very slowly.

l A lower value of this parameter gets event 4A to be triggered more easily. However, smallvalue may trigger events frequently under small fluctuation of the service traffic.

Relevant CommandsSet this parameter through ADD TYPRABDCCCMC, modify it through MODTYPRABDCCCMC, and query it through LST TYPRAB.

5.2.4 Time to Trigger Event 4BWhen buffered traffic is less than event 4B threshold and remains there for a longer time thanthe delay trigger time, event 4B is reported.




Parameter ID

TimetoTrigger4B

Value Range

Enum (D0, D10, D20, D40, D60, D80, D100, D120, D160, D200, D240, D320, D640, D1280,D2560, D5000)


Enum (0, 10, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 160, 200, 240, 320, 640, 1280, 2560, 5000) ms

Parameter Setting

TimetoTrigger4B is D2560 by default, that is, 2.56 s. The parameter is set separately in uplinkand downlink.

Time to trigger for event 4B is to prevent frequent trigger caused by small fluctuation of theservice traffic. It is only for the measurement report of the first trigger event.


l The higher the parameter is, the harder to trigger event 4B, in which case it can preventfrequent adjustment of the BE service rate. However, too high value makes the systemrespond very slowly.

l The lower the parameter is, the easier to trigger event 4B. However, small value may triggerevents frequently under small fluctuation of the service traffic.

Relevant Commands

Set this parameter through ADD TYPRABDCCCMC, modify it through MODTYPRABDCCCMC, and query it through LST TYPRAB.

5.2.5 Pending Time after Trigger Event 4AAfter a event 4A is reported, a timer is started. No more event 4A is reported before the timerexpires.

Parameter ID

PendingTime4A

Value Range

Enum (D250, D500, D1k, D2k, D4k, D8k, D16k)


Enum (250, 500, 1000, 2000, 4000, 8000, 16000) ms



Parameter Setting

The default value is D4000, that is, 4 s. The parameter is set separately in unlink and downlink.

The pending time after trigger for event 4A is the timer started after the event measurementreport is triggered. It has two functions: The first is that within the pending time, no moremeasurement report is sent for the same measurement ID even the condition that triggersmeasurement report is met; the second is that when the pending timer expires, it judges whetherthe traffic is above the upper threshold or under the lower threshold. If yes, it restarts the Timeto Trigger for event 4A timer and does not report event 4A any more unless the timer expires.


l The greater the parameter is, the harder to trigger event 4A again. Large value preventsfrequent adjustment of the BE service rate. But too large value can make the system respondvery slowly.

l The lower the parameter is, the easier to trigger event again. But too low value may resultin frequent triggers under small fluctuation of the traffic.

Relevant Commands


5.2.6 Pending time after trigger Event 4BAfter an event 4B is reported, a timer is started. No more event 4B is reported before the timerexpires.

Parameter ID

PendingTime4B

Value Range

Enum (D250, D500, D1k, D2k, D4k, D8k, D16k)


Enum (250, 500, 1000, 2000, 4000, 8000, 16000) ms

Parameter Setting

The default value is D4000, that is 4 s. The parameter is set separately in unlink and downlink.

The pending time after trigger for event 4B is the timer started after the event measurementreport is triggered. It has two functions: The first is that within the pending time, no moremeasurement report is sent for the same measurement ID even the condition that triggersmeasurement report is met; the second is that when the pending timer expires, it judges whetherthe traffic is above the upper threshold or under the lower threshold. If yes, it restarts the Timeto Trigger for event 4b timer and does not report event 4B any more unless the timer expires.





l The greater the parameter is, the harder to trigger event 4B again. Large value preventsfrequent adjustment of the BE service rate. But too large value can make the system respondvery slowly.

l The lower the parameter is, the easier to trigger event again. But too low value may resultin frequent trigger under small fluctuation of the traffic.

Relevant Commands


5.2.7 Uplink and Downlink DCCC Rate ThresholdsWhen the maximum uplink/downlink rates required by the BE service are not greater than theuplink/downlink DCCC rate thresholds, channel reconfiguration is not carried out for the uplink/downlink services according to the traffic condition.

Parameter ID

UlDcccRateThd

DlDcccRateThd

Value Range

Enum(D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384)


Enum (8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 144, 256, 384) kbit/s

Parameter Setting

The default values are both D64, that is, 64 kbit/s.


The greater these parameter are, the more difficult the adjustment of the channel bandwidthbecomes.

Relevant Commands

The RNC-oriented parameters: set them through SET DCCC, and query them through LSTDCCC.

5.2.8 Uplink and Downlink Middle Rate ThresholdsThese parameters are the uplink and downlink middle rate threshold when 3 rate adjusting inDCCC is used and the middle rate compute method is HAND_APPOINT.



Parameter IDUlMidRateThd

DlMidRateThd

Value RangeEnum(D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384)

Physical Value RangeEnum (16, 32, 64, 128, 144, 256, 384) kbit/s

Parameter SettingThe default values are both D128, that is 128 kbit/s.


Relevant CommandsThe RNC-oriented parameters: set them through SET DCCC and query them through LSTDCCC.

5.2.9 Uplink and Downlink Rate Adjust LevelsThese parameters are used to judge uplink and downlink 2 rates or 3 rates adjusting in DCCC.

Parameter IDUlRateAdjLevel

DlRateAdjLevel

Value RangeEnum(2_Rates, 3_Rates)


Parameter SettingThe default values are both 2_Rates.





Relevant CommandsThe RNC-oriented parameters: set them through SET DCCC and query them through LSTDCCC.

5.2.10 Low activity bitrate thresholdWhen the PS BE service rate has reduced to the rate threshold of DCCC, but UE can not transferto CELL_FACH state for some reasons (for example: PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH isoff; UE has CS service). The PS BE service rate is reduced to this rate when PS BE servicesatisfy the requirement of D2F.

Parameter IDLittleRateThd

Value RangeD8 ～ D384

Physical Value Range8 kbit/s ～ 384 kbit/s

Parameter SettingThe default value is 64 kbit/s.


Relevant CommandsThe RNC-oriented parameter: set it through SET DCCC and query it through LST DCCC.

5.3 Link Stability ParametersThe common configurable link stability parameters are listed here.

Table 5-3 List of link stability parameters

No.

Parameter ID ParameterMeaning

DefaultValue


1 EventEaThd Event Earelativethreshold

2 (1 dB) For RNC levelSet or modify:SETDCCCQuery:LST DCCCFor cell level

RNC/Cell

2 EventEbThd Event Ebrelativethreshold

2 (1 dB)



No.


DefaultValue


3 Set: ADDCELLDCCCQuery: LSTCELLDCCC

UlFullCvrRate Uplink fullcoverage rate

64 kbit/s

4 DlFullCvrRate Downlink fullcoverage rate

32 kbit/s

5.3.1 Event Ea Relative ThresholdThis parameter, together with the maximum transmit power, determines the event Ea thresholdof the DL DPCCH power.

5.3.2 Event Eb Relative ThresholdThis parameter, together with the maximum transmit power, determines the event Eb thresholdof the DL DPCCH power.

5.3.3 Uplink Full Coverage RateThis parameter describes the uplink full coverage rate.

5.3.4 Downlink Full Coverage RateThis parameter describes the downlink full coverage rate.

5.3.1 Event Ea Relative ThresholdThis parameter, together with the maximum transmit power, determines the event Ea thresholdof the DL DPCCH power.

Parameter IDEventEaThd

Value Range0 ～ 111

Physical Value Range0 dB ～ 55.5 dB, step 0.5 dB

Parameter SettingThe default value is 2, that is, 1 dB.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe higher the parameter is, the lower the absolute threshold for event Ea is, and it is easy totrigger event Ea and it is useful for link stability. On the other hand, the QoS of planned serviceis influenced possibly.

Relevant CommandsRNC-oriented parameter: Set it through SET DCCC and query the parameter through LSTDCCC.




Cell-oriented parameter: Set it through ADD CELLDCCC, query it through LSTCELLDCCC and modify it through MOD CELLDCCC.

5.3.2 Event Eb Relative ThresholdThis parameter, together with the maximum transmit power, determines the event Eb thresholdof the DL DPCCH power.

Parameter IDEventEbThd

Value Range

0 ～ 111


0 dB ～ 55.5 dB, step 0.5 dB

Parameter SettingThe default value is 2, that is, 1 dB.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe higher the parameter is, the lower the absolute threshold for event Eb is, and it is difficultto trigger event Eb.

Relevant CommandsRNC-oriented parameter: Set it through SET DCCC and query the parameter through LSTDCCC.

Cell-oriented parameter: Set it through ADD CELLDCCC, query it through LSTCELLDCCC and modify it through MOD CELLDCCC.

5.3.3 Uplink Full Coverage RateThis parameter describes the uplink full coverage rate.

Parameter IDULFullCvrRate

Value RangeD8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384

Physical Value Range8 kbit/s, 16 kbit/s, 32 kbit/s, 64 kbit/s, 128 kbit/s, 144 kbit/s, 256 kbit/s, 384 kbit/s



Parameter SettingThe default value is D64, which indicates 64 kbit/s.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe uplink full coverage rate is the maximum uplink service rate reached when a cell is totallycovered under some bearer.

For BE services with low maximum rate, the usage of the DCCC algorithm may require extraefforts for algorithm handling rather than facilitate the service performance. Therefore, only BEservices with uplink maximum rate exceeds the threshold rate can perform the uplink coverage-based DCCC algorithm control.

Relevant CommandsFor parameters oriented to the RNC, set this parameter through SET DCCC and query it throughLST DCCC.

For parameters oriented to the cell, add this parameter through ADD CELLDCCC, query itthrough LST CELLDCCC, and modify it through MOD CELLDCCC.

5.3.4 Downlink Full Coverage RateThis parameter describes the downlink full coverage rate.

Parameter IDDLFullCvrRate

Value RangeD8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D144, D256, D384

Physical Value Range8 kbit/s, 16 kbit/s, 32 kbit/s, 64 kbit/s, 128 kbit/s, 144 kbit/s, 256 kbit/s, 384 kbit/s

Parameter SettingThe default value is D32, which indicates 32 kbit/s.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe downlink full coverage rate is the maximum downlink service rate reached when the cell istotally covered. If the current rate is greater than the full coverage rate, lower the rate to thecoverage rate after the downlink TCP is limited. If the current rate is smaller than or equal tothe full coverage rate, lower the rate the minimum guaranteed rate. If the Ea event is reportedagain, dismantle the links.

For BE services with low maximum rate, the usage of the DCCC algorithm requires extra effortsfor algorithm handling rather than facilitates the service performance. Therefore, only BEservices with the downlink maximum rate exceeds the threshold rate can perform the downlinkcoverage-based DCCC algorithm control.




Relevant CommandsFor parameters oriented to the RNC, set this parameter through SET DCCC and query it throughLST DCCC.

For parameters oriented to the cell, add this parameter through ADD CELLDCCC, query itthrough LST CELLDCCC, and modify it through MOD CELLDCCC.

5.4 State Transfer ParametersThe common configurable state transfer parameters are listed here.

Table 5-4 List of state transfer parameters

No. Parameter ID

ParameterMeaning

DefaultValue

RelevantCommand

Level

1 DtoFStateTransTimer

DCH to FACHstate transitiontimer

180 s Set or Modify: SETUESTATETRANSQuery: LSTUESTATETRANS

RNC

2 D2F2PTvmThd

DCH to FACHand FACH toPCH statetransitiontraffic 4Bthreshold

D64 (64bytes)

3 FtoPStateTransTimer

FACH to PCHstate transitiontimer

180 s

4 CellReSelectTimer

CellReselectiontimer

180 s

5 FtoDTvmThd

FACH to DCHtraffic reportthreshold

D1024 (1024bytes)

6 FtoDTvmTimeToTrig

FACH-to-DCH traffictime-to-trigger

D240 (240ms)

5.4.1 DCH to FACH State Transition TimerThis parameter detects whether the users in CELL_DCH are stably in low activity to determinewhether there is a need for state transition from CELL_DCH to CELL_FACH.

5.4.2 DCH to FACH / FACH to PCH State Transition Traffic 4B ThresholdIt helps to judge whether a user is in low activity state. When a user in CELL_DCH state reports4B traffic event every time, 1 is added to the low activity detection timer. When a user inCELL_FACH state reports 4B traffic event every time, 1 is added to the low activity detectiontimer when the 4B traffic is 0.

5.4.3 FACH to PCH State Transition Timer



This parameter detects whether the users in CELL_FACH are stably in low activity to determinewhether there is a need for state transition from CELL_FACH to CELL_PCH.

5.4.4 Cell ReSelection TimerThis parameter and CellReSelectCounter jointly detect the status of the UE that frequentlyperforms cell reselection to determine the need for state transition from CELL_FACH toURA_PCH.

5.4.5 FACH to DCH Traffic Report ThresholdThis parameter defines the upper threshold of 4A traffic in the CELL_FACH state to triggerstate transition from FACH to DCH.

5.4.6 FACH to DCH Traffic Time to triggerFor UEs in the CELL_FACH state, after the traffic exceeds the report threshold and the durationexceeds the time length specified by this parameter, the event 4A report is triggered, causingstate transition to the CELL_DCH state.

5.4.1 DCH to FACH State Transition TimerThis parameter detects whether the users in CELL_DCH are stably in low activity to determinewhether there is a need for state transition from CELL_DCH to CELL_FACH.

Parameter ID

DtoFStateTransTimer

Value Range

1 to 65535


1 s to 65535 s

Parameter Setting


Configuration of the parameter shall be based on the BE service model. The system judgeswhether the users have no data to send for a long time and uses this as condition for state transitionto low activity. Whether the user has data to send can be reflected from the RLC buffered traffic:If the user has no data to send, the RLC buffered traffic is zero. The traffic event 4B can beconfigured to detect low activity.

Within the transition timer period, if there are consecutive event 4B reports and the bufferedservice data is detected to be zero and the number of event 4B reports meets preset conditionwhen the timer expires, it can be said that the service is in low activity.


If the parameter value is too low, it would be hard to judge that the user is in relatively stablelow activity status. Too large value may waste specific channel resources.




Relevant Commands

RNC-oriented parameter: set it through SET UESTATETRANS, and query it through LSTUESTATETRANS .

5.4.2 DCH to FACH / FACH to PCH State Transition Traffic 4BThreshold

It helps to judge whether a user is in low activity state. When a user in CELL_DCH state reports4B traffic event every time, 1 is added to the low activity detection timer. When a user inCELL_FACH state reports 4B traffic event every time, 1 is added to the low activity detectiontimer when the 4B traffic is 0.

Parameter ID

D2F2PTvmThd

Value Range

D8–D768K


8–768K bytes

Parameter Setting

The default value is D64, that is, 64 bytes.


None.

Relevant Commands

RNC–oriented parameter: set it through SET UESTATETRANS, and query it through LSTUESTATETRANS.

5.4.3 FACH to PCH State Transition TimerThis parameter detects whether the users in CELL_FACH are stably in low activity to determinewhether there is a need for state transition from CELL_FACH to CELL_PCH.

Parameter ID

FtoPStateTransTimer

Value Range

1 to 65535



Physical Value Range1 s to 65535 s

Parameter SettingThe default value is 180, that is, 180 s.

The principle of state transition from CELL_FACH to CELL_PCH is similar to the above-mentioned state transition from DCH to FACH. But because CELL_PCH does not supportservice data transmission, zero traffic event is used to determine the need for transition fromFACH to PCH.

Impact on the Network PerformanceIf the parameter value is too low, it would be hard to judge that the user is in relatively stablelow activity status. Too large value may waste FACH channel resources.

Relevant CommandsRNC-oriented parameter: set it through SET UESTATETRANS, and query it through LSTUESTATETRANS .

5.4.4 Cell ReSelection TimerThis parameter and CellReSelectCounter jointly detect the status of the UE that frequentlyperforms cell reselection to determine the need for state transition from CELL_FACH toURA_PCH.

Parameter IDCellReSelectTimer




Impact on the Network PerformanceWhen the parameter value is too low, it would be hard to judge that the users are in relativelystable low activity. Too large value may waste specific channel resources.





5.4.5 FACH to DCH Traffic Report ThresholdThis parameter defines the upper threshold of 4A traffic in the CELL_FACH state to triggerstate transition from FACH to DCH.

Parameter ID

FtoDTvmThd

Value Range

Enum (D0, D4, D8, D16, D32, D64, D128, D256, D512, D1024, D2k, D4k, D8k, D16k, D32k,D64k, D128k, D512k, D1024k )


Enum ( 0, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, 1024, 2k, 4k, 8k, 16k, 32k, 64k, 128k, 512k, 1024k )bytes

Parameter Setting

The default value is D1024, that is 1024 bytes.

This threshold is set to check whether there is data to be transmitted so that the UE moves to theCELL_DCH substate. To avoid common channel congestion, this parameter should not be settoo high.


The greater this parameter is, the more difficultly state transition occurs. However, if the settingis too low, it results in waste of the dedicated channel resources.

Relevant Commands

RNC-oriented parameter: set it through SET UESTATETRANS, and query it through LSTUESTATETRANS .

5.4.6 FACH to DCH Traffic Time to triggerFor UEs in the CELL_FACH state, after the traffic exceeds the report threshold and the durationexceeds the time length specified by this parameter, the event 4A report is triggered, causingstate transition to the CELL_DCH state.

Parameter ID

FtoDTvmTimeToTrig

Value Range

Enum (D0, D10, D20, D40, D60, D80, D100, D120, D160, D200, D240, D320, D640, D1280,D2560, D5000)



Physical Value RangeEnum (0, 10, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100, 120, 160, 200, 240, 320, 640, 1280, 2560, 5000 ) ms

Parameter SettingThe default value is D240, that is 240 ms.

This parameter prevents unnecessary triggering of traffic event due to traffic fluctuation. Toolarge value may delay report of event 4A and result in congestion of the common channel.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe greater this parameter is, the more difficultly state transition occurs; the lower it is, the moreeasily UE enters the CELL_DCH state, but the more serious influence the traffic fluctuationbrings.


5.5 PS InactiveThe common configurable PS inactive parameters are listed here.

Table 5-5 List of PS inactive parameters

No. Parameter ID

ParameterMeaning

DefaultValue

RelevantCommand

Level

1 PSINACTTMRFORINT

Interactiveservice T1

20 s Set or modify: SETPSINACTTIMERQuery: LSTPSINACTTIMER

RNC

2 PROTECTTMRFORINT

Interactiveservice T2

20 s

3 PSINACTTMRFORBAC

Backgroundservice T1

20 s

4 PROTECTTMRFORBAC

Backgroundservice T2

20 s

5 PSINACTTMRFORIMS

IMS serviceT1

20 s

6 PROTECTTMRFORIMS

IMS serviceT2

20 s




5.5.1 Interactive Service T1When no data to transfer during this timer for PS interactive user, then PDCP requests RRClayer to release this connection.

5.5.2 Interactive Service T2If T1 is overtime, PDCP layer requires RRC layer to release this service and triggers T2. If thisconnection could not be released till T2 timer expires, PDCP layer applies to release thisconnection again.

5.5.3 Background Service T1When no data to transfer during this timer for PS background user, PDCP requires RRC layerto release this connection.

5.5.4 Background Service T1If T1 is overtime, PDCP layer requires RRC layer to release this service and triggers T2. If thisconnection could not be released till T2 timer expires, PDCP layer applies to release thisconnection again.

5.5.5 IMS Service T1When no data to transfer during this timer for PS IMS users, PDCP requires RRC layer to releasethis connection.

5.5.6 IMS Service T2If T1 is overtime, PDCP layer requires RRC layer to release this service and triggers T2, If thisconnection could not be released till T2 timer expires, PDCP layer applies to release thisconnection again.

5.5.1 Interactive Service T1When no data to transfer during this timer for PS interactive user, then PDCP requests RRClayer to release this connection.

Parameter ID

PSINACTTMRFORINT

Value Range

0 to 14,400


0 s to 14,400 s

Parameter Setting



The higher this parameter is, the more resource be occupied when no data to transfer; the lowerit is, the more singling transfers when data transfer is unstable.



Relevant Commands

RNC-oriented parameter: set it through SET PSINACTTIMER, and query it through LSTPSINACTTIMER.

5.5.2 Interactive Service T2If T1 is overtime, PDCP layer requires RRC layer to release this service and triggers T2. If thisconnection could not be released till T2 timer expires, PDCP layer applies to release thisconnection again.

Parameter ID

PROTECTTMRFORINT

Value Range

0 to 60


0 s to 60 s

Parameter Setting



l The greater this parameter is, the longer resource occupation time is if the resource couldnot be released after T1 is overtime.

l The lower it is, the more signaling overhead there is if the connection could not be releaseddue to some special reasons.

Relevant Commands


5.5.3 Background Service T1When no data to transfer during this timer for PS background user, PDCP requires RRC layerto release this connection.

Parameter ID

PSINACTTMRFORBAC

Value Range

0 to 14,400




Physical Value Range0 s to 14,400 s


Impact on the Network Performancel The greater this parameter is, the more resource is occupied when no data to transfer.

l The lower it is, the more singling transfer there is when data transfer is unstable.

Relevant CommandsRNC-oriented parameter: set it through SET PSINACTTIMER, and query it through LSTPSINACTTIMER.

5.5.4 Background Service T1If T1 is overtime, PDCP layer requires RRC layer to release this service and triggers T2. If thisconnection could not be released till T2 timer expires, PDCP layer applies to release thisconnection again.

Parameter IDPROTECTTMRFORBAC

Value Range0 to 60



Impact on the Network Performancel The greater this parameter is, the longer resource occupation time it takes if the resource

could not be released after T1 is overtimel The lower it is, the more signaling overhead there is if the connection could not be release

due to some special reasons.




5.5.5 IMS Service T1When no data to transfer during this timer for PS IMS users, PDCP requires RRC layer to releasethis connection.

Parameter IDPSINACTTMRFORIMS


Physical Value Range0 s to 14,400 s


Impact on the Network Performancel The greater this parameter is, the more resource is occupied when no data to transfer.

l The lower it is, the more singling transfer there is when data transfer is unstable.


5.5.6 IMS Service T2If T1 is overtime, PDCP layer requires RRC layer to release this service and triggers T2, If thisconnection could not be released till T2 timer expires, PDCP layer applies to release thisconnection again.

Parameter IDPROTECTTMRFORIMS

Value Range0 to 60







l The greater this parameter is, the longer resource occupation time it takes if the resourcecould not be released after T1 is overtime.

l The lower it is, the more signaling overhead there is if the connection could not be releasedue to some special reasons.

Relevant Commands


5.6 RLC Retransmission Monitor Algorithm ParametersThe common configurable RLC retransmission monitor algorithm parameters are listed here.

Table 5-6 List of RLC retransmission monitor algorithm parameters

No. Parameter ID

ParameterMeaning

Default Value Relevant Command Level

1 TimeToMoniter

Time tostart Re-TXmonitor

5000 ms Set: ADDTYPRABRLCQuery: LST TYPRABModify: MODTYPRABRLC

Cell

2 MoniterPrd

Re-Txmonitorperiod

1000 ms

3 ReTransRatioFilterCoef

Retransmission filtercoefficient

1

4 EventAThred

Event Athreshold

160, that is 16%

5 TimeToTriggerA

Event Atime totrigger

2

6 PendingTimeA

Event Apendingtime aftertrigger

1

7 ReTransReportPeriod

Event Areportperiod

50 ms

8 EventBThred

Event Bthreshold

80, that is 8%



No. Parameter ID

ParameterMeaning


9 TimeToTriggerB

Event Btime totrigger

14

10 PendingTimeB

Event Bpendingtime aftertrigger

1

5.6.1 Time to Start Re-TX MonitorIt means the delay time before starting the re-transmitted PDU monitor when RLC entity isestablished or reconfigured.

5.6.2 Re-Tx Monitor PeriodThis parameter corresponds to the time of a period for re-transmitted PDU monitor.

5.6.3 Retransmission Filter CoefficientThis parameter denotes the filter coefficient about retransmission monitor algorithm.

5.6.4 Event A thresholdThis parameter is the threshold of event A, which indicates a high ratio of PDUs are re-transmitted.

5.6.5 Event A Time to TriggerThis parameter is the periods for triggering event A. Event A is triggered only if retransmit rateis higher than event A threshold a certain period continuously.

5.6.6 Event A Pending Time after TriggerThis parameter is the pending period numbers after event A is triggered. During these periods,no event A is reported.

5.6.7 Event A Report PeriodThis parameter is the period delayed of report after event A is trigged.

5.6.8 Event B ThresholdThis parameter is the threshold of event B, which indicates an acceptable ratio of PDUs are re-transmitted.

5.6.9 Event B Time to TriggerThis parameter is the period time event B is triggered.

5.6.10 Event B Pending Time after TriggerThis parameter is the pending period numbers after event B is triggered. During these periods,no event B is reported.

5.6.1 Time to Start Re-TX MonitorIt means the delay time before starting the re-transmitted PDU monitor when RLC entity isestablished or reconfigured.




Parameter IDTimeToMoniter


Physical Value Range0 to 500,000 ms, step 1 ms

Parameter SettingThe default value is 5,000 ms.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe lower the parameter is, the earlier the RLC re-transmitted monitor starts.

Relevant CommandsSet this parameter through ADD TYPRABRLC, query it through LST TYPRAB, and modifyit through MOD TYPRABRLC.

5.6.2 Re-Tx Monitor PeriodThis parameter corresponds to the time of a period for re-transmitted PDU monitor.

Parameter IDMoniterPrd


Physical Value Range40 ms to 60,000 ms, step 1 ms

Parameter SettingThe default value is 1000 ms.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe lower the parameter is, the earlier the RLC re-transmitted monitor starts.




5.6.3 Retransmission Filter CoefficientThis parameter denotes the filter coefficient about retransmission monitor algorithm.

Parameter ID

ReTransRatioFilterCoef

Value Range

0 to 10


None.

Parameter Setting



The greater this parameter is, the stronger the effect is on signal smoothness, the less interferencethere is, but the weaker the response ability is for RLC retransmission measurement value break.

Relevant Commands

Set this parameter through ADD TYPRABRLC, query it through LST TYPRAB, and modifyit through MOD TYPRABRLC.

5.6.4 Event A thresholdThis parameter is the threshold of event A, which indicates a high ratio of PDUs are re-transmitted.

Parameter ID

EventAThred

Value Range

0 to 1000


0 to 100%, step 0.1%

Parameter Setting

The default value is 160, that is 16%




Impact on the Network PerformanceThe lower the parameter is, the earlier RLC re-transmitted event A is triggered. Thereby theRNC reduces data sending.


5.6.5 Event A Time to TriggerThis parameter is the periods for triggering event A. Event A is triggered only if retransmit rateis higher than event A threshold a certain period continuously.

Parameter IDTimeToTriggerA

Value Range0 to 100



Impact on the Network PerformanceThe higher the parameter is, the more difficult event A is triggered. Thereby the RNC reducesdata transfer. This strategy may not be so good in poor air-interface quality condition.


5.6.6 Event A Pending Time after TriggerThis parameter is the pending period numbers after event A is triggered. During these periods,no event A is reported.

Parameter IDPendingTimeA





None.

Parameter Setting



The higher the parameter is, the more difficult event A is triggered. Thereby the RNC reducesdata transfer. This strategy may not be so good in poor air-interface quality condition.

Relevant Commands


5.6.7 Event A Report PeriodThis parameter is the period delayed of report after event A is trigged.

Parameter ID

ReTransReportPeriod

Value Range

0 to 1000


0 to 1000 ms, step 10 ms.

Parameter Setting

The default value is 50 ms.


The greater the parameter is, the latter event A reports after been triggered.

Relevant Commands


5.6.8 Event B ThresholdThis parameter is the threshold of event B, which indicates an acceptable ratio of PDUs are re-transmitted.




Parameter IDEventBThred


Physical Value Range0 to 100%, step 0.1%


Impact on the Network PerformanceThe higher the parameter is, the easier event B is triggered.


5.6.9 Event B Time to TriggerThis parameter is the period time event B is triggered.

Parameter IDTimeToTriggerB

Value Range0 to 100



Impact on the Network PerformanceThe higher the parameter is, the more difficult event B is triggered.




5.6.10 Event B Pending Time after TriggerThis parameter is the pending period numbers after event B is triggered. During these periods,no event B is reported.

Parameter IDPendingTimeB




Impact on the Network PerformanceThe higher the parameter is, the longer event B report is delayed.





6 Miscellaneous Topic Parameters

About This Chapter

Special topic parameters include parameters for cell channel power distribution, paging, RRCconnection setup, synchronization and location updating.

6.1 Cell Channel Power Distribution ParametersThe common configurable cell channel power distribution parameters are listed here.

6.2 Paging ParametersThe common configurable paging parameters are listed here.

6.3 RRC Connection Setup ParametersThe common configurable RRC connection setup parameters are listed here.

6.4 Synchronization ParametersThe common configurable synchronization parameters are listed here.

6.5 Location Update ParametersThe common configurable location update parameters are listed here.

6.6 User Priority Related ParametersThe common configurable user priority related parameters are listed here.

RANNetwork Optimization Parameter Reference 6 Miscellaneous Topic Parameters


6.1 Cell Channel Power Distribution ParametersThe common configurable cell channel power distribution parameters are listed here.

Table 6-1 List of cell channel power distribution parameters

No. Parameter ID

ParameterMeaning

DefaultValue


1 MaxTxPower

Maximumcell transmitpower

430, thatis, 43dBm

ADD CELLSETUPMOD CELLSETUP

Cell

2 PCPICHPower

PCPICHtransmitpower

330, thatis, 33dBm

ADD PCPICHLST PCPICHMOD CELL

3 PSCHPowerSSCHPower

Transmitpower ofPSCH andSSCH

-50, thatis, -5 dB

PSCHPowerADD PSCHLST PSCHMOD CELLSSCHPowerADD SSCHLST SSCHMOD CELL

4 BCHPower

BCHtransmitpower

-20, thatis, -2 dB

ADD BCHLST BCHMOD CELL

5 MaxFachPower

MaximumFACHtransmitpower

10, thatis, 1 dB

ADD FACHLST FACHMOD SCCPCH

FACH

6 PCHPower

PCHtransmitpower

20, thatis, 2 dB

ADD PCHLST PCHMOD SCCPCH

Cell

7 PICHPowerOffset

PICHtransmitpower

-3 dB ADD CHPWROFFSETLST PICHMOD PICHPWROFFSET

8 AICHPowerOffset

AICHtransmitpower

-6 dB ADD CHPWROFFSETLST AICHMOD AICHPWROFFSET

6.1.1 Maximum Cell Transmit Power

6 Miscellaneous Topic ParametersRAN



This parameter is the maximum downlink transmitting power of the NodeB.


6.1.3 PSCH and SSCH Transmit PowerThese parameters are the transmit powers of P-SCH and S-SCH in relation to PCPICH.

6.1.4 BCH Transmit PowerThis parameter is the transmit power of PCCPCH bearing BCH in relation to PCPICH.

6.1.5 Maximum FACH Transmit PowerThis parameter defines the maximum FACH transmit power MaxFachPower (In MODSCCPCH, the maximum transmit powers of the two FACH channels are respectivelyFACH1MaxPower and FACH2MaxPower) in relation to PCPICH.

6.1.6 PCH Transmit PowerThis parameter defines the transmit power of the PCH channel in relation to PCPICH.

6.1.7 PICH Transmit PowerThis parameter is the transmit power of the PICH channel in relation to PCPICH.

6.1.8 AICH Transmit PowerThis parameter defines the transmit power of AICH in relation to PCPICH.

6.1.1 Maximum Cell Transmit PowerThis parameter is the maximum downlink transmitting power of the NodeB.

Parameter ID

MaxTxPower

Value Range

0 to 500


0 to 50 dBm, step 0.1 dBm

Parameter Setting

The default value is 430, namely 43 dBm.

This parameter defines the sum of the maximum transmit powers of all the downlink channelsin the cell at the same time. It should be set according to the NodeB capability, cell range andcapacity. In the actual configuration, if this value is greater than the cell report capability, cellsetup fails. The parameter is decided by network planning.


If this parameter is too low, the downlink capacity and the coverage is limited. However, itshould not exceed the actual processing capability of the NodeB.



Relevant Commands

Set this parameter through ADD CELLSETUP, and modify it through MOD CELLSETUP.


Parameter ID

PCPICHPower

Value Range

-100 to 500


-10 dBm to 50 dBm, step 0.1 dBm

Parameter Setting

The default setting is 330, namely 33 dBm.

This parameter should be set based on the actual system environment such as cell coverage(radius) and geographical environment. For the cells to be covered, the downlink coverageshould be guaranteed as a premise. For the cells requiring soft handover area, this parametershould satisfy the proportion of soft handover areas stipulated in the network planning.

For a cell with large coverage, the value of this parameter should be relatively high; otherwise,it should be relatively low. In a planned multi-cell environment, this parameter is definite If thevalue of this parameter is smaller than the planned value, coverage holes may occur when thecells are under heavy load.

Impact on the Network Performancel If this parameter is too low, it influences directly the downlink pilot coverage range.

l If it is too high, the downlink interference increases, and the cell capacity is decreasedbecause a lot of system resources are occupied and the interference with the downlink trafficchannels are increased.

In addition, the configuration of this parameter also has direct influence on the distribution ofhandover areas.

Relevant Commands

Set this parameter through ADD PCPICH, query it through LST PCPICH and modify itthrough MOD CELL.

6.1.3 PSCH and SSCH Transmit PowerThese parameters are the transmit powers of P-SCH and S-SCH in relation to PCPICH.




Parameter ID

PSCHPower

SSCHPower

Value Range

-350 to 150



Parameter Setting

The default values are both -50, namely -5 dB.

These two parameters can be adjusted through measurement in the actual environment so thatthe transmit powers of the synchronization channels just satisfy the UE receiving demodulationrequirement. Specifically, when UEs receive signals at different locations within the range ofthe cell, the transmit power should be just enough to ensure that the UE can implement fastsynchronization in most areas at the verge of the cell. Neither PSCH nor SSCH has come throughchannel code spectrum spread, so they produce more serious interference than other channelsdo, especially for near-end users. Therefore, the values should not be set too high.

Impact on the Network Performancel If the setting of this set of parameters are too low, users at the verge of cells fail in network

searching, resulting in influence on coverage of the downlink common channel, whichfinally affects cell coverage.

l If the setting are too high, the power resources are wasted, and other channels are interferedseriously, thus the cell capacity is influenced.

Relevant Commands

l For PSSHPower, set it through ADD PSCH, and query it through LST PSCH.

l For SschPower, set it through ADD SSCH, and query it through LST SSCH.

After the cells are set up, they can both be modified through MOD CELL.

6.1.4 BCH Transmit PowerThis parameter is the transmit power of PCCPCH bearing BCH in relation to PCPICH.

Parameter ID

BCHPower

Value Range

-350 to 150





Parameter Setting

The default value is -20, namely -2 dB.

This parameter can also be adjusted and optimized through measurement in the actualenvironment. When UEs receive signals at different locations within the range of the cell, thetransmit power should be just enough to ensure the correct demodulation of the informationcarried on the channel in most areas at the verge of the cell. The setting of this parameter shouldnot be set too high, so as to avoid unnecessary waste of the transmit power.

Impact on the Network Performancel If the setting of this parameter is too low, the user at the verge of the cell fails to receive

the system information correctly, and the downlink common channel coverage isinfluenced, which affects cell coverage.

l If the setting is too high, other channels are interfered, the power resources are occupied,and consequently the cell capacity is influenced.

Relevant Commands

Set this parameter through ADD BCH, query it through LST BCH, and modify it through MODCELL.

6.1.5 Maximum FACH Transmit PowerThis parameter defines the maximum FACH transmit power MaxFachPower (In MODSCCPCH, the maximum transmit powers of the two FACH channels are respectivelyFACH1MaxPower and FACH2MaxPower) in relation to PCPICH.

Parameter ID

MaxFachPower

Value Range

-350 to 150



Parameter Setting

The default value is 10, namely 1 dB.

If the FACH power is too low, the UE fails to receive the FACH data packets or the UE receiveserror packets in a large portion; if it is too high, the power is wasted. Set the maximum FACHtransmit power to an appropriate value that is just enough to ensure the target BLER.




Impact on the Network Performancel If the setting of this parameter is too low, the UE at the cell verge fails to receive correctly

the services and signaling borne over the FACH, resulting in influence on the downlinkcommon channel coverage and the cell coverage;

l If it is too high, other channels are interfered, the power resources are occupied, andconsequently the cell capacity is influenced.

Relevant Commands

Set this parameter through ADD FACH, query it through LST FACH, and modify it throughMOD SCCPCH.

6.1.6 PCH Transmit PowerThis parameter defines the transmit power of the PCH channel in relation to PCPICH.

Parameter ID

PCHPower

Value Range

-350 to 150



Parameter Setting

The default value of this parameter is –20, namely –2 dB.

If the PCH power is too low, the UE fails to receive the PCH data packets or the UE receiveswrong packets, which may increase the retransmission times of paging packets, resulting in thepaging failure or the paging delay increase; if it is too high, the power is wasted.

Impact on the Network Performancel If this parameter is too low, the UE at the cell verge fails to receive paging messages

correctly, and this influences downlink common channel coverage and cell coverage.l If it is too high, other channels are interfered, the downlink transmit power are occupied,

and consequently the cell capacity is influenced.

Relevant Commands

Set this parameter through ADD PCH, query it through LST PCH, and modify it through MODSCCPCH.

6.1.7 PICH Transmit PowerThis parameter is the transmit power of the PICH channel in relation to PCPICH.



Parameter IDPICHPowerOffset

Value Range-10 to 5


Parameter SettingThe default value of this parameter is -7, namely -7 dB.

An appropriate transmit power value should be set for PICH to ensure that all the users at thecell verge can receive the paging indications. However, the transmit power should not be set toohigh to avoid power waste.

Impact on the Network Performancel If this parameter is too low, the UE at the cell verge fails to receive paging messages

correctly, resulting in mis-operation in reading PCH channel and waste of the UE battery,and the downlink common channel coverage and cell coverage may be affected.


Relevant CommandsSet this parameter through ADD CHPWROFFSET, query it through LST PICH, and modifyit through MOD PICHPWROFFSET.

6.1.8 AICH Transmit PowerThis parameter defines the transmit power of AICH in relation to PCPICH.

Parameter IDAICHPowerOffset

Value Range-22 to 5


Parameter SettingThe default value of this parameter is -6, namely -6 dB.




An appropriate transmit power value should be set for AICH to ensure that all users at cell vergecan receive the access indication. However,the transmit power should not be set too high to avoidwaste of the power.

Impact on the Network Performancel If this parameter is too low, the UE at the cell verge fails to receive the capture indication

correctly, which may influence the downlink common channel coverage and the cellcoverage.


Relevant CommandsSet this parameter through ADD CHPWROFFSET, query it through LST AICH, and modifyit throughMOD AICHPWROFFSET.

6.2 Paging ParametersThe common configurable paging parameters are listed here.

Table 6-2 List of paging parameters

No. Parameter ID

ParameterMeaning

DefaultValue

RelevantCommand

Level

1 DRXCycleLenCoef

Paging cyclecoefficient

6 Set or modify: SETFRC or MODCNDOMAINQuery: LST FRC orLST CNDOMAIN

RNC

2 MaccPageRepeatTimes

Number ofpageretransmit

1 Set or modify: SETDPUCFGDATAQuery: LSTDPUCFGDATA

6.2.1 Paging Cycle CoefficientThis parameter is the UTRAN domain discontinuous receiving (DRX) cycle coefficient, and itis a parameter of paging type 1.

6.2.2 Number of Paging RetransmitThis parameter is the number of retransmissions of paging message.

6.2.1 Paging Cycle CoefficientThis parameter is the UTRAN domain discontinuous receiving (DRX) cycle coefficient, and itis a parameter of paging type 1.

Parameter IDDRXCycleLenCoef



Value Range3 to 9



In the idle mode, the UE can receive the paging indication in the DRX mode to reduce the powerconsumption. In this case, the UE needs to detect only one paging indication in a paging occasionwithin each DRX cycle. The DRX cycle length of UTRAN domain is obtained by substitutingthis parameter into the formula DRX cycle = 2K × PBP frames. Where, K is the paging cyclecoefficient, and PBP is the number of paging block periods (In the FDD mode, PBP = 1).

Impact on the Network Performancel If this parameter is too low, the UE detects the paging channel frequently, and thus the

battery is consumed fast.l If it is too high, the UE reacts very slowly to paging indications, and the system may

repeatedly page the UE, resulting in increased downlink interference.

Relevant CommandsSet the parameter through SET FRC or ADD CNDOMAIN, modify it through MODCNDOMAIN, and query it through LST FRC or LST CNDOMAIN.

6.2.2 Number of Paging RetransmitThis parameter is the number of retransmissions of paging message.

Parameter IDMaccPageRepeatTimes

Value Range0 to 2



In order to improve the paging success rate, CN and RNC both repeat paging messages. However,paging repeat has negative effects: firstly, it increases the paging quantity, especially in thecondition of downlink common channel congestion at the air interface; secondly, it increases




the paging quantity by several times, which wastes the downlink channel resources and causefailure of timely delivery of new paging messages.

In addition, to ensure the paging success rate and paging efficiency at the same time, the numberof CN retransmitting paging messages and the time interval should be considered together withUTRAN repeat. If UTRAN repeats transmission once, the CN repeat time interval should begreater than 2 DRX cycles.

The following principle should be followed: CN should repeat the next paging message afterUTRAN finishes the previous paging message transmission and retransmission. To guaranteecompliance with this principle, such parameters as the number of CN retransmitting, the intervalof repeat, the number of UTRAN retransmitting and the coefficient of DRX cycle length can beadjusted simultaneously for compliance with this principle.


If this parameter is too high, the system repeatedly pages UEs, the downlink common channelresources are wasted, and the downlink interference is increased.

Relevant Commands

Set this parameter through SET DPUCFGDATA, and query it through LSTDPUCFGDATA.

6.3 RRC Connection Setup ParametersThe common configurable RRC connection setup parameters are listed here.

Table 6-3 List of RRC connection setup parameters

ParameterID

ParameterMeaning


T300N300

Timer T300 andconstant N300

T300: D2000 (2s)N300: 3

Set or modify: SETIDLEMODETIMERQuery: LSTIDLEMODETIMER

RNC

6.3.1 T300 and N300Timer T300 starts when the UE transmits RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message, and thetimer stops when the UE receives RRC CONNECTION SETUP message. RRC CONNECTIONREQUEST is resent upon the expiry of the timer T300 if V300 is lower than or equal to N300,else enters idle mode.

6.3.1 T300 and N300Timer T300 starts when the UE transmits RRC CONNECTION REQUEST message, and thetimer stops when the UE receives RRC CONNECTION SETUP message. RRC CONNECTIONREQUEST is resent upon the expiry of the timer T300 if V300 is lower than or equal to N300,else enters idle mode.



Parameter IDT300

N300

Value RangeT300: Enum(D100, D200, D400, D600, D800, D1000, D1200, D1400, D1600, D1800, D2000,D3000, D4000, D6000, D8000);

N300: 0 to 7

Physical Value RangeT300: Enum(100, 200, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1400, 1600, 1800, 2000, 3000, 4000, 6000,8000) ms;

N300: None

Parameter SettingThe default value of T300 is D2000 (2 s); the default value of N300 is 3.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe setting of timer T300 should be considered together with the UE and UTRAN processingdelay and the propagation delay.

l The greater the setting of timer T300 is, the longer the UE waiting time it takes.

l The greater the setting of N300 is, the higher success probability of the RRC connectionsetup is, and the longer RRC setup time it takes.

In this case, it is likely that a UE repeats access attempts and connection setup requesttransmission, and consequently other users are influenced seriously.

Relevant CommandsSet these parameters through SET IDLEMODETIMER , and query them through LSTIDLEMODETIMER .

6.4 Synchronization ParametersThe common configurable synchronization parameters are listed here.




Table 6-4 List of synchronization parameters

No. Parameter ID

ParameterMeaning

DefaultValue

RelevantCommand

Level

1 NInsyncInd

Number ofsuccessive in-syncindications

5 Set: ADDCELLSETUPQuery: LST CELLModify: MODCELL

Cell

2 NOutsyncInd

Number ofsuccessiveout-of-syncindications

50

3 TRLFailure

Radio linkfailure timerduration

50 (5 s)

4 N312T312

N312 andT312

N312: D1T312: 6 s

Set or Modify: SETIDLEMODETIMERQuery: LSTIDLEMODETIMER

RNC

5 N313N315T313

N313, N315,and T313

N313: D50N315: D1T313: 3 s

Set or Modify: SETCONNMODETIMERQuery: LSTCONNMODETIMER

6.4.1 Number of Successive In-sync IndicationsThis parameter is the number of successive in-sync indications.

6.4.2 Number of Successive Out-of-sync IndicationsThis parameter is the number of successive out-of-sync indications.

6.4.3 Radio Link Failure Timer DurationThis parameter is the radio link failure timer duration. This value defines the duration of timerTRlFailure. When the radio link set is in synchronized state, the NodeB shall start timerTRlFailure after it receives NOutsyncInd successive out-of-sync indications, and the NodeBshall stop and reset timer TRlFailure after receiving NInsyncInd successive in-sync indications.When timer TRlFailure expires, the NodeB will trigger the radio link failure process, and indicatewhich radio link set is out-of-sync.

6.4.4 N312 and T312When the UE starts to set up the dedicated channel, it starts timer T312, and after the UE detectsN312 in-sync indications from L1, it stops timer T312. Once the timer expires, the physicalchannel setup fails.

6.4.5 N313, N315, and T313After the UE detects N313 successive out-of-sync indications from L1, it starts timer T313. Afterthe UE detects N315 successive in-sync indications from L1, it stops timer T313. Once the timerexpires, the radio link fails.



6.4.1 Number of Successive In-sync IndicationsThis parameter is the number of successive in-sync indications.

Parameter IDNInsyncInd

Value Range1 to 256



This parameter defines the number of successive in-sync indications required for the NodeB totrigger the radio link recovery process. The radio link set remains in the initial state until itreceives NInsyncInd successive in-sync indications from L1, and then the NodeB triggers theradio link recovery process, which indicates that the radio link set has been synchronized. Oncethe radio link recovery process is triggered, the radio link set is considered to be in thesynchronized state.

Impact on the Network Performancel The greater this parameter is, the stricter the synchronization process becomes, and the

more difficult the synchronization occurs.l The smaller it is, the easier the synchronization occurs. However, if the link quality is poor,

a simple synchronization requirement leads to waste of the UE power and increase of uplinkinterference.

In the radio link maintenance process, this parameter is used together with the successive out-of-sync indication counter.

Relevant CommandsSet this parameter through ADD CELLSETUP, query it through LST CELL, and modify itthrough MOD CELL.

6.4.2 Number of Successive Out-of-sync IndicationsThis parameter is the number of successive out-of-sync indications.

Parameter IDNOutsyncInd

Value Range1 to 256






This value defines the number of successive out-of-sync indications required to receive to starttimer TRlFailure. When the radio link set is in synchronized state, the NodeB starts timerTRlFailure after it receives NOutsyncInd successive out-of-sync indications. The NodeB shallstop and reset timer TRlFailure after receiving NInsyncInd successive in-sync indications. Whentimer TRlFailure expires, the NodeB triggers the radio link failure process, and indicate whichradio link set is out-of-sync.

Impact on the Network Performancel If this parameter is too low, the link out-of-sync decision is likely to happen.

l If it is too high, out-of-sync is not likely to happen. But if the link quality is poor, it mayresult in waste of the UE power and increased uplink interference.

In the radio link maintenance process, this parameter is adopted together with the successive in-sync indication counter.


6.4.3 Radio Link Failure Timer DurationThis parameter is the radio link failure timer duration. This value defines the duration of timerTRlFailure. When the radio link set is in synchronized state, the NodeB shall start timerTRlFailure after it receives NOutsyncInd successive out-of-sync indications, and the NodeBshall stop and reset timer TRlFailure after receiving NInsyncInd successive in-sync indications.When timer TRlFailure expires, the NodeB will trigger the radio link failure process, and indicatewhich radio link set is out-of-sync.

Parameter IDTRLFailure

Value Range0 to 255

Physical Value Range0 s to 25.5 s, step 0.1 s

Parameter SettingThe default value is 50, that is 5 s.



Impact on the Network Performancel If the timer duration is too short, there are few chances for the radio link to get synchronized.

l If it is too long, the radio link failure process is probably delayed, and the downlinkinterference increases.


6.4.4 N312 and T312When the UE starts to set up the dedicated channel, it starts timer T312, and after the UE detectsN312 in-sync indications from L1, it stops timer T312. Once the timer expires, the physicalchannel setup fails.

Parameter IDN312

T312

Value RangeN312: Enum(D1, D50, D100, D200, D400, D600, D800, D1000)

T312: 1 to 15

Physical Value RangeN312: Enum(1, 50, 100, 200, 400, 600, 800, 1000);

T312: 1 s to 15 s

Parameter SettingN312 default value is D1 and T312 default is 6 s.

Impact on the Network Performancel The greater the setting of N312 is, the more difficult the dedicated channel synchronization

becomes.l The longer the duration of timer T312 is, the higher the synchronization probability is, but

the longer the synchronization time it takes.

Relevant CommandsFor idle mode: set them through SET IDLEMODETIMER; query them through LSTIDLEMODETIMER.

For connection mode: set them through SET CONNMODETIMER, query them through LSTCONNMODETIMER.




6.4.5 N313, N315, and T313After the UE detects N313 successive out-of-sync indications from L1, it starts timer T313. Afterthe UE detects N315 successive in-sync indications from L1, it stops timer T313. Once the timerexpires, the radio link fails.

Parameter ID

N313

N315

T313

Value Range

N313: Enum(D1, D2, D4, D10, D20, D50, D100, D200)

N315: Enum(D1, D2, D4, D10, D20, D50, D100, D200, D400, D600, D800, D1000)

T313: 1 to 15


N313: Enum(1, 2, 4, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200)

N315: Enum(1, 2, 4, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200, 400, 600, 800, 1000)

T313:1 s to 15 s

Parameter Setting

The default value of N313 is D50; the default value of N315 is D1; the default value of T313 is3 s.

Impact on the Network Performancel The greater the setting of N313 is, the more difficult it is to start timer T313, and the lower

the out-of-sync probability is.l The lower the setting of N315 is, the longer T313 is, and the higher the link recovery

probability is.

These three parameters should be used in cooperation.

Relevant Commands

Set these parameters through SET CONNMODETIMER, and query them through LSTCONNMODETIMER.

6.5 Location Update ParametersThe common configurable location update parameters are listed here.



Table 6-5 List of location update parameters

ParameterID

ParameterMeaning


T3212 Periodic locationupdate timer

10, that is, 1hour

Set: ADD CNDOMAINQuery: LSTCNDOMAINModify: MODCNDOMAIN

RNC

6.5.1 Periodic Location Update TimerThis parameter is the periodic update timing duration.

6.5.1 Periodic Location Update TimerThis parameter is the periodic update timing duration.

Parameter ID

T3212

Value Range

0 to 255


0 to 1530 m, step 6 m (minute)

Parameter Setting

The default value is 10, that is, 1 hour.

Impact on the Network Performancel If this parameter is too low, the UE carries out location update frequently, resulting in a

large number of location update messages on the Uu and Iu interfaces.

l If it is too high, the UE location message probably is not updated timely.

Relevant Commands

Set this parameter through ADD CNDOMAIN, query it through LST CNDOMAIN, andmodify it through MOD CNDOMAIN.

6.6 User Priority Related ParametersThe common configurable user priority related parameters are listed here.




Table 6-6 List of user priority related parameters


DefaultValue


1 ARP1Priority,ARP2Priority,ARP3Priority,ARP4Priority,ARP5Priority,ARP6Priority,ARP7Priority,ARP8Priority,ARP9Priority,ARP10Priority,ARP11Priority,ARP12Priority,ARP13Priority,ARP14Priority

User priorityof allocation/retensionpriority 1 ～14

None. Set or modify:SETUSERPRIORITYQuery:LSTUSERPRIORITY

2 PriorityReference Interatepriorityconfiguredreference

ARP

3 CarrierTypePriorInd Indicator ofcarrier typepriority

DCH

6.6.1 User Priority of Allocation/Retension Priority 1~14These parameters are user priority corresponding allocation and retention priority 1 to 14.

6.6.2 Integrate Priority Configured ReferenceThis parameter is used to set the criterion by which the priority is sorted firstly.

6.6.3 Indicator of Carrier Type PriorityThis parameter is used to decide which carrier is prior when ARP and TrafficClass are bothidentical.

6.6.1 User Priority of Allocation/Retension Priority 1~14These parameters are user priority corresponding allocation and retention priority 1 to 14.

Parameter IDARP1Priority

ARP2Priority

ARP3Priority

ARP4Priority

ARP5Priority

ARP6Priority



ARP7Priority

ARP8Priority

ARP9Priority

ARP10Priority

ARP11Priority

ARP12Priority

ARP13Priority

ARP14Priority

Value RangeGold, Silver, Copper

Physical Value Range1, 2, 3

Parameter SettingNone.


Relevant CommandsSet and modify the parameters through SET USERPRIORITY, query them throughLSTUSERPRIORITY.

6.6.2 Integrate Priority Configured ReferenceThis parameter is used to set the criterion by which the priority is sorted firstly.

Parameter IDPriorityReference

Value RangeARP, TrafficClass

Physical Value Range1, 2

Parameter SettingThe default value is ARP.





Relevant CommandsSet and modify the parameter through SET USERPRIORITY, query it throughLSTUSERPRIORITY.

6.6.3 Indicator of Carrier Type PriorityThis parameter is used to decide which carrier is prior when ARP and TrafficClass are bothidentical.

Parameter IDCarrierTypePriorInd

Value RangeNONE, DCH, HSPA

Physical Value Range0, 1, 2

Parameter SettingThe default value is NONE.


Relevant CommandsSet and modify the parameter through SET USERPRIORITY, query it throughLSTUSERPRIORITY.



7 HSDPA Parameters

About This Chapter

HSDPA parameters include HSDPA power resource management parameters, HSDPA coderesource management algorithm parameters, HSDPA mobility management parameters,HSDPA direct retry and switch of channel types parameters, and HSDPA call admission controlalgorithm parameters.

7.1 HSDPA Power Resource Management ParametersThe three different UE capabilities described here are that the minimum TTI interval for UE toreceive data on HS-PDSCH includes 1/2/3 TTIs. For the default configuration, inside bracketsis physical value while outside brackets is IE value.

7.2 HSDPA Code Resource Management Algorithm ParametersThe common configurable HSDPA code resource management algorithm parameters are listedhere.

7.3 HSDPA Mobility Management ParametersThe common configurable HSDPA mobility management parameters are listed here.

7.4 HSDPA Direct Retry and Switch of Channel Types ParametersThe common configurable HSDPA direct retry and switch of channel types parameters are listedhere.

7.5 HSDPA Admission Control AlgorithmThe common configurable HSDPA admission control algorithm parameters are listed here.

RANNetwork Optimization Parameter Reference 7 HSDPA Parameters


7.1 HSDPA Power Resource Management ParametersThe three different UE capabilities described here are that the minimum TTI interval for UE toreceive data on HS-PDSCH includes 1/2/3 TTIs. For the default configuration, inside bracketsis physical value while outside brackets is IE value.

7.1.1 HS-DPCCH Power Management ParametersThe common configurable HS-DPCCH power control parameters are listed here.

7.1.2 Total Power of HSDPA and Measurement Power Offset ConstantThe common configurable total power of HSDPA and measurement power offset constant islisted here.

7.1.1 HS-DPCCH Power Management ParametersThe common configurable HS-DPCCH power control parameters are listed here.

Table 7-1 List of HS-DPCCH power control parameters


DefaultValue

RelevantCommand

Level

1 ACKPO1ACKPO2ACKPO3

ACK poweroffset

24/1512/159/15

Set: ADDCELLHSDPCCHQuery: LSTCELLHSDPCCHModify: MODCELLHSDPCCH

Cell

2 ACKPO1forSHOACKPO2forSHOACKPO3forSHO

ACK poweroffset in multiplelink set

24/15

3 NACKPO1NACKPO2NACKPO3

NACK poweroffset

24/1512/159/15

4 NACKPO1forSHONACKPO2forSHONACKPO3forSHO

NACK poweroffset in multiplelink set

24/15

5 ACKNACKReF1ACKNACKReF2ACKNACKReF3

ACK/NACKrepeat factor

123

6 ACKNACKReFforSHO

ACK/NACKrepeat factor inmultiple link set

1

7 HSDPA ParametersRAN




DefaultValue

RelevantCommand

Level

7 CQIPOCQIPOforSHO

CQI power offsetin single andmultiple RLS

24/15

8 CQIReFCQIReFforSHO

CQI RepeatFactor in Singleand MultipleRLS

1

9 CQIFbCkCQIFbCkforSHO

CQI repeatperiod in singleand multipleRLS

D2 (2 ms)

7.1.1.1 ACK Power OffsetSet the three parameters respectively. They stand for the ACK power offsets for uplink DPCCHcorresponding to three different capabilities of UE in single link set.

7.1.1.2 ACK Power Offset in Multiple Link SetSet the three parameters respectively. They stand for the ACK power offsets for uplink DPCCHcorresponding to three different capabilities of UE in multiple link set.

7.1.1.3 NACK Power OffsetSet the three parameters respectively. They stand for the NACK power offsets for uplink DPCCHcorresponding to three different capabilities of UE in single link set.

7.1.1.4 NACK Power Offset in Multiple Link SetSet the three parameters respectively. They stand for the NACK power offsets for uplink DPCCHcorresponding to three different capabilities of UE in multiple link set.

7.1.1.5 ACK/NACK Repeat FactorSet the three parameters according to three different capabilities of UE. Repeat sending the ACK/NACK message in continuous multiple HS-DPCCH subframes.

7.1.1.6 ACK/NACK Repeat Factor in Multiple Link SetDuring SHO, the UE sends the ACK/NAK message in ACKNACKREFFORSHO subframesrepeatedly.

7.1.1.7 CQI Power Offset in Single and Multiple RLSSet the two parameters respectively. They are the CQI power offsets for uplink DPCCH in singleand multiple RLS.

7.1.1.8 CQI Repeat Factor in Single and Multiple RLSSet the two parameters respectively. The UE repeats sending CQI in continuous CQIReF andCQIReFforSHO HS-DPCCH subframes in single and multiple RLS.

7.1.1.9 CQI Repeat Period in Single and Multiple RLSSet the two parameters respectively. They are the duration of CQI feedback period in single andmultiple RLS, namely, the UE sends CQI every CQIFbCk or CQIFbCkforSHO HS-DPCCHsubframes.



ACK Power OffsetSet the three parameters respectively. They stand for the ACK power offsets for uplink DPCCHcorresponding to three different capabilities of UE in single link set.

Parameter IDACKPO1

ACKPO2

ACKPO3

Value RangePO_5/15, PO_6/15, PO_8/15, PO_9/15, PO_12/15, PO_15/15, PO_19/15, PO_24/15, PO_30/15

Physical Value Range5/15, 6/15, 8/15, 9/15, 12/15, 15/15, 19/15, 24/15, 30/15

Parameter SettingSet ACKPO1 to 24/15. Set ACKPO2 to 12/15. Set ACKPO to 9/15.

Impact on the Network Performancel If these parameters are too low, when the UE sends the ACK message in non-SHO state,

the receiver decodes incorrectly with a greater probability, the redundant data transmissionincreases, and the effective rate declines.

l If they are too large, the UE wastes more power, and the uplink interference is stronger.

Relevant CommandsSet them through ADD CELLHSDPCCH, query them through LST CELLHSDPCCH, andmodify them through MOD CELLHSDPCCH.

ACK Power Offset in Multiple Link SetSet the three parameters respectively. They stand for the ACK power offsets for uplink DPCCHcorresponding to three different capabilities of UE in multiple link set.

Parameter IDACKPO1forSHO

ACKPO2forSHO

ACKPO3forSHO






Parameter SettingSet the default values of ACKPO1forSHO, ACKPO2forSHO, and ACKPO3forSHO to 24/15.

Impact on the Network Performancel If they are too low, when the UE sends the ACK message in non-SHO state, the receiver

decodes incorrectly with a greater probability, the redundant data transmission increases,and the effective rate declines.

l If they are too high, the UE wastes more power, and the uplink interference is stronger.


NACK Power OffsetSet the three parameters respectively. They stand for the NACK power offsets for uplink DPCCHcorresponding to three different capabilities of UE in single link set.

Parameter IDNACKPO1

NACKPO2

NACKPO3



Parameter Settingl The default value of NACKPO1 is 24/15.

l The default value of NACKPO2 is 12/15,

l The default value of NACKPO3 is 9/15.

Impact on the Network Performancel If they are too low, when the UE sends the NACK message in non-SHO state, the receiver

will decode incorrectly with a greater probability, redundant data transmission willincrease, and effective rate will decline.



l If they are too large, the UE will waste more power, and and uplink interference will bestronger.


NACK Power Offset in Multiple Link SetSet the three parameters respectively. They stand for the NACK power offsets for uplink DPCCHcorresponding to three different capabilities of UE in multiple link set.

Parameter IDNACKPO1forSHO

NACKPO2forSHO

NACKPO3forSHO



Parameter SettingThe default values of NACKPO1forSHO, NACKPO2forSHO, and NACKPO3forSHO are24/15.

Impact on the Network Performancel If they are too low, when the UE sends the NACK message in SHO state, the receiver

decodes incorrectly with a greater probability, redundant data transmission increases, andeffective rate declines.

l If they are too large, the UE wastes more power, and uplink interference is stronger.


ACK/NACK Repeat FactorSet the three parameters according to three different capabilities of UE. Repeat sending the ACK/NACK message in continuous multiple HS-DPCCH subframes.

Parameter IDACKNACKReF1




ACKNACKReF2

ACKNACKReF3

Value Range1 to 4


Parameter SettingThe default value of ACKNACKReF1 is 1. The default value of ACKNACKReF2 is 2. Thedefault value of ACKNACKReF3 is 3.

Impact on the Network PerformanceIf they are too large, the throughput rate of UE declines sharply. Set them based on the capabilityof receiving data by UE continuously. The UE sends the ACK/NACK message at a transmitpower as low as possible on the condition that the power meets the requirement on ACK/NACKdemodulation performance.


ACK/NACK Repeat Factor in Multiple Link SetDuring SHO, the UE sends the ACK/NAK message in ACKNACKREFFORSHO subframesrepeatedly.

Parameter IDACKNACKReFforSHO

Value Range1 to 4


Parameter SettingThe default value of ACKNACKReFforSHO is 1.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe greater the parameter is, the more sharply the throughput rate of UE declines. Set it basedon the capability of receiving data by UE continously. The UE sends the ACK/NACK message



at a transmit power as low as possible on the condition that the power meets the requirement onACK/NACK demodulation performance.

Set it to 1 to keep the parameters of single radio link set (RLS) and multiple RLS consistent.This avoids reconfiguration of HS-DPCCH parameters between single RLS and multiple RLS.The parameter does not identity three capabilities of UE. Reconfiguration occurs for the othertwo capabilities. This problem is to be solved in the next version.

Relevant Commands

Set it through ADD CELLHSDPCCH, query it through LST CELLHSDPCCH, and modifyit through MOD CELLHSDPCCH.

CQI Power Offset in Single and Multiple RLS

Set the two parameters respectively. They are the CQI power offsets for uplink DPCCH in singleand multiple RLS.

Parameter ID

CQIPO

CQIPOforSHO

Value Range

PO_5/15, PO_6/15, PO_8/15, PO_9/15, PO_12/15, PO_15/15, PO_19/15, PO_24/15, PO_30/15


5/15, 6/15, 8/15, 9/15, 12/15, 15/15, 19/15, 24/15, 30/15

Parameter Setting

The default values are 24/15.

Impact on the Network Performancel If they are too low, the receiver decodes data incorrectly in a greater probability when the

UE sends CQI. This affects TFRC selection, and lowers downlink throughput rate.l If they are too large, the UE wastes power and uplink interference increases.

Relevant Commands

Set them through ADD CELLHSDPCCH, query them through LST CELLHSDPCCH, andmodify them through MOD CELLHSDPCCH.

CQI Repeat Factor in Single and Multiple RLS

Set the two parameters respectively. The UE repeats sending CQI in continuous CQIReF andCQIReFforSHO HS-DPCCH subframes in single and multiple RLS.




Parameter ID

CQIReF

CQIReFforSHO

Value Range

1 to 4


1 to 4 times

Parameter Setting

The default values are 1.


If the retransmisssion times of CQI is N, the network combines the N results, and then decodesthe data. If they are too large, the CQI does not indicate the real-time variation of the channel.

Relevant Commands


CQI Repeat Period in Single and Multiple RLS

Set the two parameters respectively. They are the duration of CQI feedback period in single andmultiple RLS, namely, the UE sends CQI every CQIFbCk or CQIFbCkforSHO HS-DPCCHsubframes.

Parameter ID

CQIFbCk

CQIFbCkforSHO

Value Range

D0, D2, D4, D8, D10, D20, D40, D80, and D160


0 ms, 2 ms, 4 ms, 8 ms, 10 ms, 20 ms, 40 ms, 80 ms, and 160 ms

Parameter Setting

The default values of CQIFBCK and CQIFBCKFORSHO are D2 (2 ms).




If they are too large, the CQI does not indicate the real-time variation of channel.

Relevant Commands


7.1.2 Total Power of HSDPA and Measurement Power OffsetConstant

The common configurable total power of HSDPA and measurement power offset constant islisted here.

Table 7-2 List of total power of HSDPA and measurement power offset constant


Default Value


1 HspaPower Total powerof HSPA

0 (0 dB) Set:ADD CELLHSDPAQuery:LST CELLHSDPAModify:MODCELLHSDPA

Cell

2 HsPdschMPOConstEnum

Measurement poweroffsetconstant

2.5 dB

7.1.2.1 Total HSPA PowerThis describes the offset between the maximum value of the sum of HS-PDSCH, HS-SCCH, E-AGCH, E-RGCH, and E-HICH and the maximum transmit power of a cell.

7.1.2.2 Measurement Power Offset ConstantIt helps calculate measurement power offset (MPO).

Total HSPA Power

This describes the offset between the maximum value of the sum of HS-PDSCH, HS-SCCH, E-AGCH, E-RGCH, and E-HICH and the maximum transmit power of a cell.

Parameter ID

HspaPower

Value Range

-500 to 0


-50 dB to 0 dB, with step length as 0.1 dB




Parameter Setting

The default setting is 0 dB.


The maximum value for dynamic power adjustment affects the throughput of H users on theedge of a cell.

Relevant Commands

Use the ADD CELLHSDPA command for configuration, the LST CELLHSDPA commandfor query, and the MOD CELLHSDPA command for modification.

Measurement Power Offset Constant

It helps calculate measurement power offset (MPO).

Parameter ID

HsPdschMPOConstEnum

Value Range

-3 to 19



Parameter Setting

The default value of HsPdschMPOConstEnum is 2.5 (2.5 dB).


It helps calculate MPO, namely, Γ Measure Power Offset = Min(13,CellMaxPower -PcpichPower - Measure Power Offset Constant).

According to PHSPDSCH = PCPICH + Γ + Δ, calculate PHSPDSCH , and then convert it to CQI. Ifthe HsPdschMPOConstEnum is improperly configured, the CQI in some scenarios will bebeyond the range of 0 to 30. As a result, the NodeB MAC-hs cannot schedule the subscriber inthe corresponding time or cannot schedule multiple subscribers with the difference of channelconditions.

Relevant Commands

Set it through ADD CELLHSDPCCH, query it through LST CELLHSDPCCH, and modifyit through MOD CELLHSDPCCH.



7.2 HSDPA Code Resource Management AlgorithmParameters

The common configurable HSDPA code resource management algorithm parameters are listedhere.

Table 7-3 List of HSDPA code resource management algorithm parameters


Default Value


1 AllocCodeMode HSDPACoderesourcedistributionmode

Automatic

Set: ADD CELLHSDPAQuery: LSTCELLHSDPAModify: MODCELLHSDPA

Cell

2 HsPdschCodeNum

Number ofHS-PDSCHcodes

4

3 HsPdschMaxCodeNum

Number ofmaximumHS-PDSCHcodes

10

4 HsPdschMinCodeNum

Number ofminimumHS-PDSCHcodes

5

5 HsScchCodeNum Number ofHS-SCCHcodes

4

7.2.1 HSDPA Code Resource Distribution ModeHSDPA code resource distribution support automatic distribution and manual distribution.Adjust this parameter to select a distribution method.

7.2.2 Number of HS-PDSCH CodesThis parameter is the number of HS-PDSCH codes. The parameter is valid only when theAllocCodeMode is Manual.

7.2.3 Number of Maximum HS-PDSCH CodesThe parameter is valid only when the AllocCodeMode is Automatic.

7.2.4 Number of Minimum HS-PDSCH CodesThe parameter is valid only when the AllocCodeMode is Automatic.

7.2.5 Number of HS-SCCH CodesIt is the number of codes allocated for HS-SCCH.




7.2.1 HSDPA Code Resource Distribution ModeHSDPA code resource distribution support automatic distribution and manual distribution.Adjust this parameter to select a distribution method.

Parameter IDAllocCodeMode

Value RangeAutomatic and Manual

Physical Value RangeAutomatic means automatic distribution. Manual means manual distribution.

Parameter SettingAt the early stage of network construction, or when the traffic model of subscribers in a cell isnot fixed, the network distributes HSDPA channel codes automatically, so select Automatic. Ifthe traffic model of subscribers in a cell is fixed and known, select manual distribution.

Impact on the Network PerformanceManual distribution leads to restriction of HSDPA code resource or leaves HSDPA code idle.

Relevant CommandsSet it through ADD CELLHSDPA, query it through LST CELLHSDPA, and modify it throughMOD CELLHSDPA.

7.2.2 Number of HS-PDSCH CodesThis parameter is the number of HS-PDSCH codes. The parameter is valid only when theAllocCodeMode is Manual.

Parameter IDHsPdschCodeNum

Value Range1 to 15





Set HsPdschCodeNum according to actual traffic model of a cell.

Impact on the Network Performancel If the number of HS-PDSCH channel codes is over small, the HSDPA code resource is

restricted.l If the number of HS-PDSCH channel codes is over large, the HSDPA code resource is

wasted and the admission rejection rate of R99 services increases due to code resource.

Relevant CommandsSet the parameter through ADD CELLHSDPA, query it through LST CELLHSDPA, andmodify it through MOD CELLHSDPA.

7.2.3 Number of Maximum HS-PDSCH CodesThe parameter is valid only when the AllocCodeMode is Automatic.

Parameter IDHsPdschMaxCodeNum

Value Range1 to 15



Set it according to actual traffic model of a cell.

Impact on the Network PerformanceIn HSDPA auto code distribution, set the number of maximum HS-PDSCH codes a little greater.


7.2.4 Number of Minimum HS-PDSCH CodesThe parameter is valid only when the AllocCodeMode is Automatic.

Parameter IDHsPdschMinCodeNum




Value Range1 to 15



Set it according to actual traffic model of a cell.

Impact on the Network PerformanceIn HSDPA auto code distribution, set it a little lower. Anyhow, it must match the number ofmaximum HS-PDSCH HsPdschMaxCodeNum. There must be HsPdschMinCodeNum <=HsPdschMaxCodeNum.


7.2.5 Number of HS-SCCH CodesIt is the number of codes allocated for HS-SCCH.

Parameter IDHsScchCodeNum

Value Range1 to 15



Set it according to actual traffic model of cell.

Impact on the Network PerformanceIt decides maximum number of subscribers that the NodeB can schedule in a TTI period. Set itproperly as required. In the scenarios like outdoor macro cells, with power distributed,scheduling multiple subscribers is less probable, so configure 2 HS-SCCHs. In the scenarioslike indoor pico, with code restricted, scheduling multiple subscribers is probable, so configure4 HS-SCCHs. If excessive HS-SCCHs are configured, the code resource is wasted. If inadequate



HS-SCCHs are configured, the HS-PDSCH code resource or power resource is wasted. Thesetwo types of waste affect cell throughput rate.

Relevant Commands

Set it through ADD CELLHSDPA, query it through LST CELLHSDPA, and modify it throughMOD CELLHSDPA.

7.3 HSDPA Mobility Management ParametersThe common configurable HSDPA mobility management parameters are listed here.

Table 7-4 List of HSDPA mobility management parameters


DefaultValue


HspaTimerLen HSPAhandoverprotectionlength

0 (0 s) Set or modify:SET HOCOMMQuery: LST HOCOMM

RNC

7.3.1 HSPA Handover Protection LengthAccording to event 1D trigger, HSPA uses a protection timer (TimerHSPA) to: Guerantee thatHSPA does not change serving cell frequently; Affect system performance. When event 1Dtriggers HSPA handover, the timer starts. Before the TimerHSPA expires, the event 1D doesnot trigger HSPA handover. If the value is 0, the system does not start the timer, namely, event1D immediately trigger HSPA handover. If the value is 1024, the HSPA handover will never betriggered until the cell to bear HSPA service is unlisted.

7.3.1 HSPA Handover Protection LengthAccording to event 1D trigger, HSPA uses a protection timer (TimerHSPA) to: Guerantee thatHSPA does not change serving cell frequently; Affect system performance. When event 1Dtriggers HSPA handover, the timer starts. Before the TimerHSPA expires, the event 1D doesnot trigger HSPA handover. If the value is 0, the system does not start the timer, namely, event1D immediately trigger HSPA handover. If the value is 1024, the HSPA handover will never betriggered until the cell to bear HSPA service is unlisted.

Parameter ID

HsdpaTimerLen

Value Range

0 to 1024


0 s to 1024 s




Parameter Setting


The serving cell is updated between different NodeBs. The buffer of original MAC-hs is reset,so the data in the buffer is missing. As a result, the interruption time of data transfer exists. Thelength of interruption time of data transfer is relevant to implementation of flow controlalgorithm and RLC parameter configuration. The unit is hundred mill-second.

In the scenarios with great fluctuation of signals, if the process occurs frequently, the subscriberkeeps in the state of restoring data transfer, interruption of data transfer, and then restoring datatransfer. This impacts the average throughput.

Set this parameter to control the frequency of update of serving cell. As a result, the impact ofthe process on performance of HSPA data transfer is controlled. If the flow control algorithmcan control data in MAC-hs buffer accurately, set the parameter to 0.

If the parameter is too large in the scenarios with great fluctuation of signals, report event 1Dby UE before expiration is more probable. When the UE reports event 1D before expiration, dueto the parameter restriction, the serving cell keeps being weak cell. As a result, the throughputdeclines.

Figure 7-1 Impact from over long HSPA protection length


Set it properly to restrict the frequency to update serving cell in the scenarios with greatfluctuation of signals. This helps control the interruption of data transfer in serving cell updatebetween different NodeBs. It also helps control the impact on subscriber throughput.

Relevant Commands

Set it through SET HOCOMM. Query it through LST HOCOMM.



7.4 HSDPA Direct Retry and Switch of Channel TypesParameters

The common configurable HSDPA direct retry and switch of channel types parameters are listedhere.

Table 7-5 List of HSDPA direct retry and switch of channel types parameters


DefaultValue


1 HRetryTimerLen D2H retrytimer length

5 (5 s) Set or modify:SETCOIFTIMERQuery: LSTCOIFTIMER

RNC

2 D2HIntraHoTimerLen

The timerlength ofD2H intra-frequencyhandover

2 (2 s) Set or modify:SETHOCOMMQuery: LST HOCOMM

3 D2HInterHoTimerLen

The timerlength ofD2H inter-frequencyhandover

5 (5 s)

4 MultiCarrierHoTi-merLen

The timerlength ofmulti-carrierhandover

14 (14 s)

5 HsdpaCMPermissionInd

CMpermissionindicator onHSDPA

TRUE Set or modify:SETCMCFQuery: LST CMCF

7.4.1 D2H Retry Timer LengthIf the service is to mapped on HS-DSCH, but actually, it is mapped on DCH, the D2H retry timerstarts. If H2D occurs, the timer starts after expiration of D2H punishment timer.

7.4.2 Timer Length of D2H Intra-HandoverAfter user finishes intra-handover, if the current cell or its blind adjacent cell supports HSDPA,and the user service is adapt to bear on HSDPA, but it bears on DCH now, then the timer of D2Hintra-handover starts up. Before the timer expires, the D2H retry in this cell or its blind handoveradjacent cell is prohibited.

7.4.3 Timer Length of D2H Inter-HandoverAfter user finished inter-handover, if the current cell or its blind adjacent cell supports HSDPA,and the user service is adapt to bear on HSDPA, but it bears on DCH now, then the timer of D2H




intra-handover starts up. Before the timer is expired, the D2H retry in this cell or its blindhandover adjacent cell is prohibited.

7.4.4 Timer Length of Multi-Carrier HandoverTo prevent ping-pong handover between multicarriers which has a bad effect on the systemperformance, a protect timer MultiCarrierHoTimer is needed. After the UE is handed over fromcell A, the timer starts up. Before the timer expires, the HSDPA or HSUPA services are notdirectly redirected to cell A. If the timer is zero, the timer does not start up, that is, it does notprevent the ping-pong between multicarriers.

7.4.5 Compress Mode Permission Indication on HSDPAIf this parameter value is TRUE, CM (Compress Mode) is permitted on HSDPA, and HSDPAcan be activated with CM activated. If this parameter value is FALSE, H2D is needed beforeCM activated when HSDPA exists, and HSDPA can not exist when CM is activated.

7.4.1 D2H Retry Timer LengthIf the service is to mapped on HS-DSCH, but actually, it is mapped on DCH, the D2H retry timerstarts. If H2D occurs, the timer starts after expiration of D2H punishment timer.

Parameter IDHRetryTimerLen

Value Range0, 1 to 180

Physical Value Range0 s, 1 s to 180 s

Parameter SettingThe default value is 5 (5 s).

Impact on the Network Performancel If the D2H retry timer length is too long, the D2H handover does not occur when the

subscribers data can be carried on HSDPA. This affects subscriber perception.l If the D2H retry timer length is too short, useless direct retry occurs. As a result, extra

signaling interaction occurs and the network resource is wasted.

Relevant CommandsSet it through SET COIFTIMER. Query it through LST COIFTIMER.

7.4.2 Timer Length of D2H Intra-HandoverAfter user finishes intra-handover, if the current cell or its blind adjacent cell supports HSDPA,and the user service is adapt to bear on HSDPA, but it bears on DCH now, then the timer of D2Hintra-handover starts up. Before the timer expires, the D2H retry in this cell or its blind handoveradjacent cell is prohibited.



Parameter ID

D2HIntraHoTimerLen

Value Range

0 to 999


0 s to 999 s

Parameter Setting



l If the parameter is too large, the D2H is not triggered in time after intra-handover. Thismay affect end user perception.

l If it is too low, the ping-pong handover between H2D and D2H occurs in some scenarios.

Relevant Commands

Set the parameter through SET HOCOMM, and query it through LST HOCOMM.

7.4.3 Timer Length of D2H Inter-HandoverAfter user finished inter-handover, if the current cell or its blind adjacent cell supports HSDPA,and the user service is adapt to bear on HSDPA, but it bears on DCH now, then the timer of D2Hintra-handover starts up. Before the timer is expired, the D2H retry in this cell or its blindhandover adjacent cell is prohibited.

Parameter ID

D2HInterHoTimerLen

Value Range

0 to 999


0 to 999 s

Parameter Setting





Impact on the Network Performancel If the parameter is too large, the D2H will not be triggered in time after inter-handover.

This may affect end user perception.l If it is too low, the ping-pong handover between H2D and D2H occurs in some scenarios.

Relevant CommandsSet or modify the parameter through SET HOCOMM, and query it through LSTHOCOMM.

7.4.4 Timer Length of Multi-Carrier HandoverTo prevent ping-pong handover between multicarriers which has a bad effect on the systemperformance, a protect timer MultiCarrierHoTimer is needed. After the UE is handed over fromcell A, the timer starts up. Before the timer expires, the HSDPA or HSUPA services are notdirectly redirected to cell A. If the timer is zero, the timer does not start up, that is, it does notprevent the ping-pong between multicarriers.

Parameter IDMultiCarrierHoTimerLen

Value Range0 to 999



Impact on the Network Performancel If the parameter is too high, handover to original cell is triggered in time after multi-carrier

handover. This may affect end user perception.l If it is too low, the ping-pong handover between multicarriers occurs in some scenarios.

Relevant CommandsSet or modify the parameter through SET HOCOMM, and query it through LSTHOCOMM.

7.4.5 Compress Mode Permission Indication on HSDPAIf this parameter value is TRUE, CM (Compress Mode) is permitted on HSDPA, and HSDPAcan be activated with CM activated. If this parameter value is FALSE, H2D is needed beforeCM activated when HSDPA exists, and HSDPA can not exist when CM is activated.



Parameter ID

HsdpaCMPermissionInd

Value Range

FALSE, TRUE


0, 1

Parameter Setting

The default value is TRUE.


If the terminal supports this function, the terminal has a better performance when the HSDPAis actived with CM actived.

Relevant Commands

Set or modify the parameter through SET CMCF, and query it through LST CMCF.

7.5 HSDPA Admission Control AlgorithmThe common configurable HSDPA admission control algorithm parameters are listed here.

Table 7-6 List of HSDPA admission control algorithm parameters

No. ParameterID

ParameterMeaning

DefaultValue


1 NodeBHsdpaMaxUserNum

MaximumHSDPAusers ofNodeB

3840 Set: ADDNODEBALGOPARAQuery: LSTNODEBALGOPARAModify: MODNODEBALGOPARA

NodeB

2 UlHsDpcchRsvdFactor

UL HS-DPCCHreservefactor


Cell

3 HsdpaStrmPBRThd

HSDPAstreamingPBRthreshold

70%




No. ParameterID

ParameterMeaning

DefaultValue


4 HsdpaBePBRThd

HSDPA besteffort PBRthreshold

30%

5 MaxHSDSCHUserNum

Max numberof userssupported byHSDPAchannel

64

7.5.1 Maximum HSDPA Users of NodeBThis parameter represents the maximum number of users supported by HSDPA channel perNodeB.

7.5.2 UL HS-DPCCH Reserve FactorIf the HS-DPCCH is to carry ACK/NACK, the system does not perform CAC. If the HS-DPCCHis to carry CQI, the system performs CAC. The corresponding threshold of this parameter equalsthe product of UL limit capacity and this parameter value.

7.5.3 HSDPA Streaming PBR ThresholdThis parameter is the average throughput admission threshold of the HSDPA streaming traffic.

7.5.4 HSDPA Best Effort PBR ThresholdThis parameter is the average throughput admission threshold of the HSDPA best effort traffic.

7.5.5 Maximum HSDPA User NumberThis parameter represents the maximum number of users supported by HSDPA channel per cell.

7.5.1 Maximum HSDPA Users of NodeBThis parameter represents the maximum number of users supported by HSDPA channel perNodeB.

Parameter ID

NodeBHsdpaMaxUserNum

Value Range

1 to 3840


None.

Parameter Setting





If the HSDPA user connection is rejected by NodeB, it means the quantity of the HSDPA licenseis insufficient. We need apply the new license for HSDPA.

Relevant Commands

Set this parameter through ADD NODEBALGOPARA, query it through LSTNODEBALGOPARA, and modify it through MOD NODEBALGOPARA.

7.5.2 UL HS-DPCCH Reserve FactorIf the HS-DPCCH is to carry ACK/NACK, the system does not perform CAC. If the HS-DPCCHis to carry CQI, the system performs CAC. The corresponding threshold of this parameter equalsthe product of UL limit capacity and this parameter value.

Parameter ID

UlHsDpcchRsvdFactor

Value Range

0 to 100


0 to 1, step 0.01

Parameter Setting



If this parameter is too high, the probability of admission rejection increases; if it is too low, itcauses the insufficiency of reserved uplink resource. But because the burst of load and affectionis small, we can set it to a lower value so as to admit more connections.

Relevant Commands

Set this parameter through ADD CELLCAC, query it through LST CELLCAC, and modifyit through MOD CELLCAC.

7.5.3 HSDPA Streaming PBR ThresholdThis parameter is the average throughput admission threshold of the HSDPA streaming traffic.

Parameter ID

HsdpaStrmPBRThd




Value Range0 to 100

Physical Value Range0 to 100%, step %1

Parameter SettingThe default value is 70%.



7.5.4 HSDPA Best Effort PBR ThresholdThis parameter is the average throughput admission threshold of the HSDPA best effort traffic.

Parameter IDHsdpaBePBRThd

Value Range0 to 100


Parameter SettingThe default value is 30%.

Impact on the Network PerformanceNone


7.5.5 Maximum HSDPA User NumberThis parameter represents the maximum number of users supported by HSDPA channel per cell.



Parameter IDMaxHSDSCHUserNum

Value Range0 to 64



Impact on the Network PerformanceA too low value decreases the HSDPA capacity of cell, causes the waste of HSDPA resource.An overly high value causes the congestion of HSDPA service.





8 HSUPA Parameters

About This Chapter

HSUPA parameters include HSUPA MAC-e scheduling algorithm parameters, HSUPA powercontrol parameters, and HSUPA admission control parameters.

8.1 HSUPA MAC-e Scheduling Algorithm ParametersThe common HSUPA MAC-e scheduling algorithm parameters configurable on the RNC LMTare listed here.

8.2 HSUPA Admission Control AlgorithmThe common configurable HSUPA admission control algorithm parameters are listed here.

RANNetwork Optimization Parameter Reference 8 HSUPA Parameters


8.1 HSUPA MAC-e Scheduling Algorithm ParametersThe common HSUPA MAC-e scheduling algorithm parameters configurable on the RNC LMTare listed here.

Table 8-1 List of HSUPA MAC-e scheduling algorithm parameters

No. Parameter ID

ParameterMeaning

DefaultValue


1 MaxTargetUlLoadFactor

Maximumtargetuplinkloadfactor

75% Set:ADD CELLHSUPAQuery:LST CELLHSUPA

Cell

2 NonServToTotalEdchPwrRatio

Targetnon-serving E-DCHto totalE-DCHpowerratio

0%

8.1.1 Maximum Target Uplink Load FactorThis parameter is the target uplink load factor of NodeB Scheduling Module. RNC calculatesthe maximum RTWP value according to this factor, and then sends it to NodeB by Iub message.

8.1.2 Target Non-Serving E-DCH to Total E-DCH Power RatioThe prerequisite that non-serving NodeB sends RG DOWN to UE is that the ratio of the powerof non-serving E-DCH to that of total E-DCH is bigger than this parameter.

8.1.1 Maximum Target Uplink Load FactorThis parameter is the target uplink load factor of NodeB Scheduling Module. RNC calculatesthe maximum RTWP value according to this factor, and then sends it to NodeB by Iub message.

Parameter ID

MaxTargetUlLoadFactor

Value Range

0 to 100

8 HSUPA ParametersRAN



Physical Value Range0% to 100%, step 1%


Impact on the Network PerformanceThis parameter is set according to radio network planning.l If it is too low, the cell throughput is too low.

l If it is too high, the interference is too high.

Relevant CommandsSet this parameter through ADD CELLHSUPA, and query it through LST CELLHSUPA.

8.1.2 Target Non-Serving E-DCH to Total E-DCH Power RatioThe prerequisite that non-serving NodeB sends RG DOWN to UE is that the ratio of the powerof non-serving E-DCH to that of total E-DCH is bigger than this parameter.

Parameter IDNonServToTotalEdchPwrRatio

Value Range0 to 100



Impact on the Network PerformanceThis parameter is used to decide whether the non-serving NodeB sends RG DOWN to UE.l If it is too low, the power of non-serving RL is very low, and it decreases the UE data rate

when the UE is in soft handover status.l If it is too high, the non-serving RL can not send RG DOWN to UE even if it is overload

scenarios.

Relevant CommandsSet this parameter through ADD CELLHSUPA, and query it through LST CELLHSUPA.



8.2 HSUPA Admission Control AlgorithmThe common configurable HSUPA admission control algorithm parameters are listed here.

Table 8-2 List of HSUPA admission control algorithm parameters

No. ParameterID

ParameterMeaning

DefaultValue


1 MAXHSUPAUSERNUM

MaximumHSUPAusernumber


Cell

2 DLHSUPARSVDFACTOR

DLHSUPAreservedfactor

0

3 NodeBHsupaMaxUserNum

NodeBmaxHSUPAusernumber

3840 Set: ADDNODEBALGOPARAQuery: LSTNODEBALGOPARAModify: MODNODEBALGOPARA

NodeB

8.2.1 Maximum HSUPA User NumberThis parameter is used for HSUPA admission control.

8.2.2 DL HSUPA Reserved FactorThis parameter is used to reserve part of resource for downlink control channels E-AGCH, E-RGCH and E-HICH.

8.2.3 NodeB Maximum HSUPA User NumberThis parameter is the maximum HSUPA user number that NodeB can support.

8.2.1 Maximum HSUPA User NumberThis parameter is used for HSUPA admission control.

Parameter IDMAXHSUPAUSERNUM

Value Range1 to 100






This parameter is the maximum user number that HSUPA cell can support; it is set accordingto the product specification.

For the HSUPA admission, the user number must be counted first. If the current HSUPA usernumber is less than this parameter, the admission request is being analyzed, or else, the admissionis rejected directly.

Impact on the Network Performancel If this parameter is too high, the product capacity cannot support all the HSUPA users after

admission, and cannot provide satisfying services.l If it is too low, part of the users are rejected for admission, and part of the resource is idle

and wasted, thus decreases the system capacity.


8.2.2 DL HSUPA Reserved FactorThis parameter is used to reserve part of resource for downlink control channels E-AGCH, E-RGCH and E-HICH.

Parameter IDDLHSUPARSVDFACTOR

Value Range0 to 100



Impact on the Network Performancel If this parameter is higher, the resource reserved for HSUPA control channel is more, and

more resource is wasted.l If the parameter is low, when resource is limited, it has impact on the HSUPA user quality.




8.2.3 NodeB Maximum HSUPA User NumberThis parameter is the maximum HSUPA user number that NodeB can support.

Parameter IDNodeBHsupaMaxUserNum




This parameter is set according to product specifications or the sold licenses.

Impact on the Network PerformanceIf the HSUPA users are rejected for the HSUPA license number is not enough, then the HSUPAlicense number must be added.

Relevant CommandsSet this parameter through ADD NODEBALGOPARA, query it through LSTNODEBALGOPARA, and modify it through MOD NODEBALGOPARA.




9 MBMS Parameters

About This Chapter

MBMS parameters mainly include MBMS admission and load control parameters.

9.1 MBMS Admission and Load Control ParametersThe common configurable MBMS admission and preempt algorithm parameters are listed here.

9.2 FLC/FLD Algorithm ParametersThe configurable FLC/FLD algorithm parameters are listed here.

RANNetwork Optimization Parameter Reference 9 MBMS Parameters


9.1 MBMS Admission and Load Control ParametersThe common configurable MBMS admission and preempt algorithm parameters are listed here.

Table 9-1 List of MBMS admission and preempt algorithm parameters

No.

Parameter ID Parameter Meaning DefaultValue

RelevantCommand

Level

1 MaxFachPower Maximum transmitpower of the FACHthat carries the MBMSservice

Setvariousvaluesaccordingto servicerate.

Set the parameterthrough ADDFACH and query itthrough LSTFACH.

Cell

2 MTCHMinPerc0

Minimum coveragepercentage of theMBMS service thatowns the highestpriority, that is,priority 0

80% Set the parameterthrough ADDCELLMTCH,query it throughLSTCELLMTCH andmodify it throughMODCELLMTCH.

3 MTCHMaxPerc15

Minimum coveragepercentage of theMBMS service thatowns the lowestpriority, that is,priority 15

50%

4 MbmsDecPowerRabThd

A service prioritythreshold, indicatingthat the power of theMBMS services withlower priorities thanthis threshold can bedecreased

1 Set the parameterthrough ADDCELLLDR, queryit through LSTCELLLDR, andmodify it throughMODCELLLDR.

5 MbmsPreemptAlgoSwitch

MBMS preemptalgorithm switch

OFF Set the parameterthrough SETQUEUEPREEMPT and query itthrough LSTQUEUEPREEMPT.

9.1.1 Maximum Transmit Power of the FACHThis describes the maximum transmit power of the FACH that carries the MBMS service.

9.1.2 Minimum Coverage Percentage of the MBMS Service with the Highest PriorityThis parameter describes the minimum coverage percentage of the MBMS service that owns thehighest priority, that is, priority 0.

9 MBMS ParametersRAN



9.1.3 Minimum Coverage Percentage of the MBMS Service with the Lowest PriorityThis parameter describes the minimum coverage percentage of the MBMS service that owns thelowest priority, that is, priority 15.

9.1.4 Service Priority Threshold for Decreasing PowerThis parameter describes the service priority threshold used for decreasing the power of theMBMS service. The power of the MBMS service with a lower priority than this threshold, thatis, the power of the MBMS service whose ARP priority value is greater than this threshold, canbe decreased.

9.1.5 MBMS Preempt Algorithm SwitchThis parameter is the MBMS preempt algorithm switch. When this switch is set to ON, an MBMSservice can obtain resources through preemption in case the access of the MBMS service fails.The preemption, however, occurs only between the MBMS services.

9.1.1 Maximum Transmit Power of the FACHThis describes the maximum transmit power of the FACH that carries the MBMS service.

Parameter ID

MaxFachPower

Value Range

-350 to +150


-35 dB to +15 dB, with step length as 0.1 dB

Parameter Setting

Set various values according to service rate.


Because the FACH does not have the power control function, you must consider the QoS of theusers on the edge of a cell when setting the maximum transmit power of the FACH. If the setvalue is too small, the quality for receiving services on the edge of a cell decreases and the mosaiceffect and the service delay occur. If the set value is too great, the extra power of the FACH iswasted.

The RAN6.1 version supports only the MBMS broadcast function. Thus, all cells must use thePTM transmission mode. This means that all cells use the FACH to send data. An UE can obtainremarkable gain through soft combination or selective combination. According to the simulationresult, the gain obtained through soft combination ranges from 4.6 dB to 6.6 dB and the gainobtained through selective combination ranges from 2 dB to 3 dB. In terms of the MBMSterminal, you must choose selective combination for the integrated channel of the CMB and theMBMS. Thus, by taking the generated gain into account, you can configure a lower power forthe FACH when a majority of terminals in a network support the MBMS service.



CAUTIONThe CMB terminals do not support soft combination or selective combination. Therefore, if amajority of terminals support the CMB service, you can neglect the relevant gain whenconfiguring the FACH.

Relevant Commands

Set the parameter through ADD FACH and query it through LST FACH.

9.1.2 Minimum Coverage Percentage of the MBMS Service with theHighest Priority

This parameter describes the minimum coverage percentage of the MBMS service that owns thehighest priority, that is, priority 0.

Parameter ID

MTCHMinPerc0

Value Range

0 to 100


0 to 100%

Parameter Setting

The default value is 80%.


When the load of a cell is heavy, the RNC assigns a low power to the MBMS service. This avoidsthe further deterioration of cell congestion on one side. On the other side, this increases thesuccess ratio of MBMS service establishment. You must ensure that the assigned low power cancover the minimum coverage area of the MBMS service. The minimum coverage area is set onthe basis of the percentage of area covered by the MBMS service using the maximum transmitpower of the FACH.

To implement service differentiation, you must ensure that the minimum coverage area variesaccording to service priorities. The value of this parameter is in positive correlation with thecoverage area of the MBMS service when a cell load is high.

Relevant Commands

Set the parameter through ADD CELLMTCH, query it through LST CELLMTCH, andmodify it through MOD CELLMTCH.




9.1.3 Minimum Coverage Percentage of the MBMS Service with theLowest Priority

This parameter describes the minimum coverage percentage of the MBMS service that owns thelowest priority, that is, priority 15.

Parameter ID

MTCHMinPerc15

Value Range

0 to 100


0 to 100%

Parameter Setting

The default value is 50%.


When the load of a cell is heavy, the RNC assigns a low power to the MBMS service. This avoidsthe further deterioration of cell congestion on one side. On the other side, this increases thesuccess ratio of MBMS service establishment. You must ensure that the assigned low power cancover the minimum coverage area of the MBMS service. The minimum coverage area is set onthe basis of the percentage of area covered by the MBMS service using the maximum transmitpower of the FACH.

To implement service differentiation, you must ensure that the minimum coverage area variesaccording to service priorities. The value of this parameter is in positive correlation with thecoverage area of the MBMS service when a cell load is high.

Relevant Commands

Set the parameter through ADD CELLMTCH, query it through LST CELLMTCH, andmodify it through MOD CELLMTCH.

9.1.4 Service Priority Threshold for Decreasing PowerThis parameter describes the service priority threshold used for decreasing the power of theMBMS service. The power of the MBMS service with a lower priority than this threshold, thatis, the power of the MBMS service whose ARP priority value is greater than this threshold, canbe decreased.

Parameter ID

MbmsDecPowerRabThd



Value Range

1 to 15


1 to 15

Parameter Setting



The MBMS services at each rate is set on the basis of two power levels. The power set for anMBMS service is determined according to cell load during the service access. In addition, theFACH power of the MBMS service must be decreased as required in the duration of cellcongestion. Some services with high priority, such as disaster pre-alert, however, do not approveof the coverage shrink caused by cell load. In such a case, you can adjust the service prioritythreshold to prevent the services with high priority against the impact of the service access failureand the load control algorithm.

Relevant Commands

Set the parameter through ADD CELLLDR, query it through LST CELLLDR, and modify itthrough MOD CELLLDR.

9.1.5 MBMS Preempt Algorithm SwitchThis parameter is the MBMS preempt algorithm switch. When this switch is set to ON, an MBMSservice can obtain resources through preemption in case the access of the MBMS service fails.The preemption, however, occurs only between the MBMS services.

Parameter ID

MbmsPreemptAlgoSwitch

Value Range

ON and OFF


ON and OFF

Parameter Setting

The default setting is OFF.





The periodic reestablishment of the preempted MBMS service is not implemented in RAN6.1.As a result, an MBMS service fails to be sent in a cell if the resource for the MBMS service isoccupied by another service through preemption.

Relevant Commands

Set the parameter through SET QUEUEPREEMPT and query it throughLSTQUEUEPREEMPT.

9.2 FLC/FLD Algorithm ParametersThe configurable FLC/FLD algorithm parameters are listed here.

Table 9-2 List of FLC/FLD algorithm parameters

No.


RelevantCommand

Level

1 FlcAlgoSwitch FLC algorithm switch ON Set the parameterthrough ADDCELLMCCH, queryit through LSTCELLMCCH, andmodify it throughMOD CELLMCCH.

Cell

9.2.1 FLC Algorithm SwitchThis parameter is the FLC algorithm switch. When the FLC algorithm switch is set to ON, theRNC performs the FLC operation.

9.2.1 FLC Algorithm SwitchThis parameter is the FLC algorithm switch. When the FLC algorithm switch is set to ON, theRNC performs the FLC operation.

Parameter ID

FlcAlgoSwitch

Value Range

ON and OFF


ON and OFF



Parameter SettingThe default setting is ON.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe FLC algorithm is a mandatory algorithm. It ensures that users on the other frequency pointscan be reselected to the current frequency point for receiving the MBMS service when thenetwork starts sending the MBMS service. Therefore, the FLC algorithm is enabled by default.

Relevant CommandsSet the parameter through ADD CELLMCCH, query it through LST CELLMCCH, andmodify it through MOD CELLMCCH.




10 Algorithm Switches

About This Chapter

In the RNC, algorithm switches are divided into two classes: connection-oriented algorithmswitches and cell-oriented algorithm switches.

10.1 Connection-Oriented Algorithm Switches in RNCOn the RNC LMT, set each connection-oriented algorithm switch through SETCORRMALGOSWITCH and query the status of each algorithm switch through LSTCORRMALGOSWITCH.

10.2 Cell Algorithm SwitchesOn the RNC LMT, cell-oriented algorithm switches are added uniformly through ADDCELLALGOSWITCH, the state of each algorithm switch is queried through LSTCELLALGOSWITCH, and the algorithm switches are modified through MODCELLALGOSWITCH.

10.3 Other Algorithm SwitchesAt this time, there are some other algorithm switches, such as Iub CAC algorithm switch, Iubbandwidth-restricted BE service rate reduction algorithm switch, and intra-frequencymeasurement control information indication.

RANNetwork Optimization Parameter Reference 10 Algorithm Switches


10.1 Connection-Oriented Algorithm Switches in RNCOn the RNC LMT, set each connection-oriented algorithm switch through SETCORRMALGOSWITCH and query the status of each algorithm switch through LSTCORRMALGOSWITCH.

10.1.1 Channel Algorithm SwitchesThe algorithms of the channel algorithm switches are listed here.

10.1.2 Handover Algorithm SwitchesThe algorithms of the handover algorithm switches are listed here.

10.1.3 Power Control Algorithm SwitchesThe algorithms and the default states of the power control algorithm switches are listed here.

10.1.4 HSPA Algorithm SwitchesThe algorithms of the HSPA algorithm switches are listed here.

10.1.5 DRD Algorithm SwitchesThe algorithms of the DRD algorithm switches are listed here.

10.1.1 Channel Algorithm SwitchesThe algorithms of the channel algorithm switches are listed here.

Parameter IDChSwitch

Parameter MeaningNOTE

DCCC algorithm is a basic function. When this algorithm is off, the channel cannot call other algorithmsto perform D2D adjustment. These algorithms include:

l Traffic-triggered BE D2D rate adjustment;

l 1A rate reduction function before soft handover;

l IUB bandwidth-restricted rate reduction function;

l TCP-restricted rate reduction function, that is, link-stability-based rate adjustment function;

l BE service bandwidth adjustment triggered by LDR preliminary congestion.

10 Algorithm SwitchesRAN



Table 10-1 List of channel algorithm switches

No.

Switch ID SwitchMeaning

DefaultSetting

Description

1 AMR_TWO_CODCH_SWITCH

Switch for twoDCHsconfigurationby AMR

OFF When it is checked, the AMR voice callwith the bit rate of 7.95 kbit/s or less thanthat is allocated for two CoDCHs.Otherwise, it is allocated for threeCoDCHs.

2 AMRC_SWITCH

AMRCalgorithmswitch

OFF When it is checked and the AMRC (AMRControl) license is enabled, AMR controlfunction is applied for AMR users.

3 BE_RATE_DOWN_BF_HO_SWITCH

Algorithmswitch for ratedecrease beforehandover

OFF When it is checked, it is allowed todecrease the bandwidth of the BEservices before handover happens. It isrecommended to open DCCC_SWITCHwhen using this function.

4 DCCC_SWITCH

DCCCalgorithmswitch

ON When it is checked, dynamic channelreconfiguration control algorithm isapplied in the RNC.

5 DL_INNER_LOOP_POWER_CTRL_SWITCH

Downlink innerloop powercontrolactivationswitch

ON When it is checked, the inner loopdownlink power control status is set toActive. Otherwise, it is set to Inactive.

6 DOWNLINK_BLIND_DETECTION_SWITCH

Downlink blinddetectionswitch

ON When it is checked, the downlink blindtransport format detection function isused for single SRB and AMR + SRBbearers. Note that the UE is only requiredto support blind transport formatdetection is the restrictions in 3GPP25.212 section 4.3.1 are fulfilled.

7 FRC_FP_MODE_SWITCH

FP mode switch ON When it is checked, the FP mode in Iubis set to normal mode. Otherwise, it is setto silent mode.

8 FRC_PDCP_RFC2507_HC_SWITCH

PDCP IPHCheadercompressionswitch

OFF When it is checked and the IP headercompression license is enabled, the IPheader compression algorithm will beapplied in the RNC.

9 FRC_PDCP_RFC3095_HC_SWITCH

PDCP ROHCheadercompressionswitch

OFF When it is checked and the robust headercompression license is enabled, therobust header compression algorithmwill be applied in the RNC.



No.


DefaultSetting

Description

10

HANDOVER_TO_UTRAN_CONFIGURATION_SWITCH

Defaultconfigurationswitch for inter-RAT handoverto UTRAN

ON When it is checked, the defaultconfigurations of signaling and RABswhich are defined in 3GPP 25.331 areused first when the UE performshandover from GSM to WCDMA.Otherwise, those default configurationsare not applied, instead the RB, TrCH andPhyCH included in the HANDOVERTO UTRAN COMMAND message isused.

11

IGNORE_RLC_CAP_SWITCH

Capabilityalgorithmswitch ignoringRLC of UE

ON When it is checked, the RAB Assignmentrequest and the subsequent RB Setupshould be continued when the RLC AMcapability of UE cannot meet theminimum RLC buffer requirementdefined by the RLC TX/RX WINDOWLIMITs of the RAB to be setup,Otherwise, the RAB Assignment requestshould be rejected.

12

IMS_SUPPORT_ACTIVATION

IMS supportactivationswitch

ON When it is checked and the IMS licenseis enabled, the RNC supports IMS.

13

IU_QOS_NEG_SWITCH

Iu QoSnegotiationswitch

OFF When it is checked, Iu QoS negotiationfunction is applied for PS domain ifalternative RAB parameters are presentin RANAP RAB ASSIGNMENTREQUEST or RELOCATIONREQUEST message.

14

IU_QOS_RENEG_SWITCH

IU QoS re-negotiationswitch

OFF When it is checked and the IU QOSRENEQ license is enabled, RNCsupports RAB MODIFY REQUESTprocedure when the QoS of real-timetraffic can not be guaranteed according tocell conditions.

15

IUB_OVERBOOKING_SWITCH

Iuboverbookingswitch

OFF When the wireless environment is poor,some TFs are banned for high speed RABto limit the speed and then reduce thetransmission power. When it is checked,IUB overbooking function is applied inSRNC.

16

IUUP_V2_SPT_SWITCH

IUUp V2 SPTswitch

OFF When it is checked and the Support IUUPVersion 2 license is enabled, RNCsupports the TFO/TRFO function.




No.


DefaultSetting

Description

17

LOSSLESS_RELOCIN_SWITCH

Losslessrelocationswitch

OFF When it is checked and UE supportslossless relocation, RNC configuresPDCP to support lossless relocation.

18

MULTI_RAB_SWITCH

Single domainsupportingmulti servicesswitch

ON When it is checked, multi-RABscombination of 2CS, 2CS+1PS, 1CS+2PS and 2PS are supported in the RNC.

19

PDCP_IPV6_HEAD_COMPRESS_SWITCH

IPv6 packetheadercompressionswitch

OFF When it is checked and the PDCP headercompression function is enabled, PDCPheader compression algorithm for IPv6 isapplied in the RNC

20

PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH

UE statetransitionswitch for PSBE service

OFF When it is checked, UE RRC statetransitions (CELL_FACH/CELL_PCH/URA_PCH) for services are allowed inthe RNC.

21

PS_NON_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH

UE StateTransitionswitch for PSNon-BE service

OFF When it is checked, UE RRC statetransitions to CELL_FACH for real-timeservices are allowed in the RNC.

22

RAB_DOWNSIZING_SWITCH

RABdownsizingswitch

ON When it is checked, RAB downsizingfunction is applied for determining initialbit rate according to cell resources.

23

RATE_ADJ_BY_DL_TCP_SWITCH

Algorithmswitch for rateadjustment bylimiteddownlinkpower

OFF When it is checked, it is allowed todynamically reconfigure the bandwidthof BE services according to the downlinktransmitted code power. It isrecommended to open DCCC_SWITCHwhen using this function.

24

RLC_RETRANS_MEASURE_SWITCH

RLC retransfermeasure switch

ON When downlink TCP (transmitted codepower) is restricted, and the RLC re-transmitted ratio or re-transmittedmaximum number of BE service in AMmode exceeds a specified threshold, thebandwidth of the BE service is trigged todecrease. When this switch is checked,the RLC re-transmitted ratio or re-transmitted maximum number of BEservice in AM mode is measured in TCPalgorithm.



No.


DefaultSetting

Description

25

RSC_FEEDBK_AFTER_SETUPRAB_FAIL_SWITCH

RSC feedbackafter setup RABfailure switch

OFF When it is checked, the cell left SF isbrought back if the RAB setup fails forlack of CELL SF and then the RAB setuptries again with lower speed to fit thefeedback SF.

10.1.2 Handover Algorithm SwitchesThe algorithms of the handover algorithm switches are listed here.

Parameter IDHoSwitch

Parameter Meaning

Table 10-2 List of handover algorithm switches

No. SwitchID

SwitchMeaning

DefaultSetting

Description

1 6F6G_SWITCH

6F6Gmeasurement controlswitch

OFF When it is checked and the UE processes macro-diversity, the RNC starts the 6F6G measurement.When the UE has more than two links in the activeset, the UE triggers the radio link synchronizationparameters measurement.When the timing difference between the radiolinks exceeds a certain threshold, UE reports 6Fevent and trigger a timer; if the timing differencebetween the radio links is below the threshold, UEreports 6G event. Otherwise, when the timerexceeds the specified interval, UE will release oneor more radio links.




No. SwitchID

SwitchMeaning

DefaultSetting

Description

2 ACT_SET_QUAL_SWITCH

Active setqualitymeasurement switch

ON When it is checked, the active set qualitymeasurement is allowed. After the RB setup iscomplete (RRC setup is complete ifSIGNAL_HO_SWITCH is ON), the RNCinitiates signal quality measurement to all the cellsin Active Set. If the integrated signal quality of allthe cells in Active Set is below a certain threshold,UE reports 2D event. Then RNC will initiate thecompressed mode and send inter-frequencymeasurement or inter-RAT measurement, or bothto trigger inter-frequency or inter-RAT handoverbased on the coverage and the UE's capability.

3 CMCF_DL_HLS_SWITCH

Compressedmode DLhigher-layerschedulingswitch

ON When it is checked, the DL higher-layerscheduling for compressed mode is allowed.

4 CMCF_UL_HLS_SWITCH

Compressedmode ULhigher-layerschedulingswitch

ON When it is checked, the UL higher-layerscheduling for compressed mode is allowed.

5 CMCF_UL_PRECFG_TOLERANCE_SWITCH

Compressedmode ULpreconfigured statetoleranceswitch

OFF When it is checked, the disaccord betweencompressed mode method and current traffic isallowed.

6 CMCF_WITHOUT_UE_CAP_REPORT_SWITCH

Compressedmodewithout uecapabilityreportswitch

OFF When it is checked, for those neighbor cells whosefrequency band dose not include in the UE'smeasurement capability as compress mode need.

7 DETSET_ADD_TO_ACTSET_SWITCH

Detect setadd to activeset switch

OFF(ONsuggested)

When it is checked, the cells in Detected Set canbe added to Active Set when RNC receives theirvalid event reports. The cells in the detected setallowed to be added to the active set must be theneighboring intra-frequency cells of a cell in theactive set.



No. SwitchID

SwitchMeaning

DefaultSetting

Description

8 DETSET_RPRT_SWITCH

Detect setreportswitch

OFF(ONsuggested)

When it is checked, the detected cell is allowed tosend the intra-frequency measurement report toRNC.

9 HCS_SPD_EST_SWITCH

HCS speedestimationswitch

OFF When it is checked, RNC evaluates the UE'smoving speed when it is in an HCS cell, andinitiates inter-layer handover by fast-mobilitydecision or by fast-mobility decision according toUE's speed.

10 HO_BEYOND_UE_CAP_ADD_TO_MC_SWITCH

Neighborcell beyondUEcapabilitymeasurement switch

OFF When it is checked, then the neighbor cell whosefrequency band is not included in the UE'smeasurement capability will also send in the inter-frequency measurement control.

11 IUR_SHO_DIVCTRL_FIELD_SUPP_SWITCH

Iur soft-handoverdiversitysupportswitch

OFF When it is checked, the Iur diversity supportswitch is configured according to the diversityswitch of this RNC. Otherwise, according to theservices. It is set to MUST (for BE traffic) andMAY (for other services).

12 INTER_FREQ_HHO_SWITCH

Inter-frequencyhardhandoverswitch

ON When it is checked, the inter-frequencymeasurement is allowed or the inter-frequencyhard handover based on cell load is allowed.

13 INTRA_FREQUENCY_HARD_HANDOVER_SWITCH

Intra-frequencyhardhandoverswitch

ON When it is checked, the intra-frequency hardhandover is allowed under the followingconditions:l The BE service is set up on DCH and the bit

rate of BE service or combined servicesexceeds the threshold for soft handoverdownlink bit rate.

l The UE reports event 1D when the softhandover switch is off.

l The UE hands over cross RNCs while there areno Iur interfaces between them.




No. SwitchID

SwitchMeaning

DefaultSetting

Description

14 INTER_RAT_CS_OUT_SWITCH

Inter-RAThandoverout switchfor CSservice

ON When it is checked and the license is enabled,RNC initiates inter-RAT measurement to triggerinter-RAT handover of the CS domain fromUTRAN.

15 INTER_RAT_PS_OUT_SWITCH

Inter-RAThandoverout switchfor PSservice

ON When it is checked and the license is enabled,RNC initiates inter-RAT measurement to triggerinter-RAT handover of the PS domain fromUTRAN.When UE has more than one connections with thecells in active set, it initiates the radio linksynchronization measurement.

16 SOFT_HANDOVER_SWITCH

Softhandoverswitch

ON When it is checked, the soft or softer handover isallowed. When receiving an event 1A, 1B, 1C, or1D report, the RNC starts to add, remove orreplace soft handover cells.

17 NCELL_COMBINE_SWITCH

NCellcombining

OFF When it is checked, measurement object is chosenfrom neighbour cells of all the cell in the ActiveSet and limited by 32. Otherwise, measurementobject is chosen from neighbour cells of the BestCell and limited by 32.

18 PS_3G2G_CELLCHG_NACC_SWITCH

PS 3G->2Gcell changeNACCswitch

OFF When it is checked, and inter-RAT handover ofthe PS domain from UTRAN use cell change ordermethod, inter-RAT handover support NACC(Network Assisted Cell Change) function.

19 PS_3G2G_RELOCATION_SWITCH

PS 3G->2Greallocationswitch

OFF When it is checked, inter-RAT handover of the PSdomain from UTRAN uses relocation method,otherwise, cell changes order method.

20 SERVICE_HO_BASED_ON_RNC_SWITCH

Servicehandoverbased onRNC setting

OFF When it is checked, service attribute of inter-rathandover is based on RNC.



No. SwitchID

SwitchMeaning

DefaultSetting

Description

21 SIGNAL_HO_SWITCH

Signalhandoverswitch

OFF When it is checked, the RNC initiates the qualitymeasurement of active set after the RRC setup iscomplete (before RB setup). In this way RNC cantrigger inter-frequency or inter-RAT handoverwhen the RRC setup is complete. Thus UE can behanded over to an inter-frequency or inter-RATneighboring cell more quickly when UE is locatedat the edge of the cell or the signal quality of theradio link is bad.SIGNAL_HO_SWITCH is not used to triggerinter-frequency or inter-RAT hand over when UEonly has signal connection. It is used to send activeset quality measurement once RRC connection isset up and RB is not setup. If the active set qualitymeasurement has been sent,SIGNAL_HO_SWITCH affcts nothing.When the timing difference between the radiolinks exceeds a certain threshold, UE reports event6F and trigger a timer; if the timing differencebetween the radio links is below the threshold, UEreports event 6G. Otherwise, when the timerexceeds the specified interval, UE releases one ormore radio links.

22 SIGNAL_IUR_INTRA_HO_SWITCH

Signalingintrahandovercontrol overIur

OFF When it is checked, the intra-frequency handoverover IUR is allowed if UE only has the signalconnection.

23 SNA_RESTRICTION_SWITCH

SNArestrictionswitch

OFF When it is checked, RNC controls the UEs that areactive in the CN configuration. Those UEs areallowed to access and move only in the cells withpermission.

24 FDD_MULTI_BAND_NCELL_MEAS_SWITCH

Multi bandneighborcellmeasurement

OFF When it is checked, the inter frequencymeasurement control contains inter frequenciesneighbor cells whose frequency is not in thefrequency band which the UE can support.




No. SwitchID

SwitchMeaning

DefaultSetting

Description

25 SRNSR_DSCR_IUR_RESRCE_SWITCH

SRNSrelocation orDSCRswitch forIur resourceoptimization

OFF When it is checked, RNC initiates SRNSrelocation or DSCR of certain UEs under thefollowing conditions to optimize resources overthe Iur interface:1. UE only has connections with cells in the

DRNC.2. The Iur transmission resources are congested.3. The service of UE is the same as the service that

is carried by the congestion link.

26 SRNSR_DSCR_LOC_SEPRAT_SWITCH

SRNSrelocation orDSCRswitch forseparatedlocation

ON When it is checked, RNC triggers RNS relocationor DSCR when SRNC and CRNC are separatedand all the intra-frequency neighbouring cells ofthe best cell are not under SRNC.

27 SRNSR_DSCR_PROPG_DELAY_SWITCH

SRNSrelocation orDSCRswitch fordelayoptimization

OFF When it is checked, RNC initiates SRNSrelocation under the following conditions toreduce link delay at the network side to enhanceservice quality:1. SRNC and CRNC are separated.2. The link delay does not meet the Qos

requirement for the current service.

28 SRNSR_DSCR_SEPRAT_DUR_SWITCH

SRNSrelocation orDSCRswitch forseparatedduration

ON When it is checked, RNC triggers RNS relocationor DSCR when the separated time between SRNCand CRNC exceeds a certain threshold.

10.1.3 Power Control Algorithm SwitchesThe algorithms and the default states of the power control algorithm switches are listed here.

Parameter IDPcSwitch



Parameter Meaning

Table 10-3 List of power control algorithm switches

No.


DefaultSetting

Description

1 AMR_MODE_INDUCE_BLER_TARGET_ALTER_SWITCH

Alteringswitch of targetBLER valueinduced byAMR mode

OFF When it is checked, the BLER targetvalue comes from the BLER targetvalue of the AMR modes specified inthe AMRC parameter table. Otherwise,it comes from the BLER target valuespecified in TYPRAB.

2 DOWNLINK_POWER_BALANCE_SWITCH

Downlinkpower balanceswitch

ON When it is checked, DPB(DownlinkPower Balance) algorithm is applied toRNC. Downlink power drift amongdifferent RLs, which is caused by TPCbit error or other reasons, could reducethe gain of soft handover. DPB ismainly used to balance the downlinkpower of different RLs for an UE inorder to achieve the best gain of softhandover.

3 FP_MUTI_RLS_IND_SWITCH

Multi RLSindicatorswitch

ON when it is checked, RNC will informNodeB about the change of RLS'snumber with FP inner band signaling.

4 INNER_LOOP_DL_LMTED_PWR_INC_SWITCH

Limited powerincrease in theinner looppower controlswitch

OFF When it is checked, limited powerincrease algorithm is applied in theinner loop power control.

5 SIG_DCH_OLPC_SWITCH

Signalingtransmissionparticipating inthe outer looppower controlswitch formultipleDCHs.

OFF This switch is used to determinewhether SIG DCH joins the uplinkOLPC (outside loop power control)procedure if there are more than oneDCH. When it is checked, SIG DCHjoins OLPC procedure. However, ifthere is only one DCH, SIG DCH joinsOLPC procedure no matter whetherthis switch is checked or not.

6 OLPC_SWITCH Outer looppower controlswitch

ON When it is checked, RNC updates theuplink SIR TARGET of RLS on theNodeB side by IUB DCH FP signals.




No.


DefaultSetting

Description

7 OLPC_UL_SIR_ERR_REL_SWITCH

UE releasedlinked to ULSIR errorswitch

OFF When it is checked, if the SIRERR ishigh and the cell is overloaded, UE isreleased.

8 RL_RECFG_SIR_TARGET_CARRY_SWITCH

SIRTargetswitch for RLreconfiguration

ON This switch is used to determinewhether current converged UL SIRTarget should be taken intoconsideration when deciding the newInitial UL SIR Target during the RLreconfiguration. The switch is validonly when OLPC_SWITCH is on.

10.1.4 HSPA Algorithm SwitchesThe algorithms of the HSPA algorithm switches are listed here.

Parameter ID

HspaSwitch

Parameter Meaning

Table 10-4 List of HSPA algorithm switches

NO.


DefaultSetting

Description

1 HSDPA_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH

HSDPA statetransferswitch

OFF When it is checked, UE RRC state transitionsto CELL_FACH for the DCCC algorithm ofHSDPA services are allowed in the RNC.l When the RAB on HS-DSCH is BE service,

the PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH isrequiured to checked simultaneously.

l When the RAB on HS-DSCH is PS real-time traffic, thePS_NON_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCHis requiured to checked simultaneously.

2 PS_STREAMING_ON_HSDPA_SWITCH

Streamingservice onHSDPAswitch

OFF When it is checked, PS streaming traffic can bemapped to HS-DSCH when the downlink maxbit rate is more than or equal to the streamingon HSDPA threshold.



NO.


DefaultSetting

Description

3 HSDPA_FLOW_CONTROL_SWITCH

HSDPA flowcontrolswitch

OFF When it is checked, the HSDPA (AM mode)flow control function is applied in SRNC.

4 HSUPA_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH

HSUPA statetransitionswitch

OFF When it is checked, UE RRC state transitionsto CELL_FACH for the DCCC algorithm ofHSUPA services are allowed in the RNC.l When the RAB on E-DCH is BE service, the

PS_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCH isrequired to check simultaneously.

l When the RAB on E-DCH is PS real-timetraffic, thePS_NON_BE_STATE_TRANS_SWITCHis required to check simultaneously.

5 HSUPA_PO_UPDATE_SWITCH

HSUPA POupdateswitch

OFF When it is checked and the OLPC algorithmswitch is open, the RNC adjusts the E-DCHpower offset periodically.

6 PS_STREAMING_ON_E_DCH_SWITCH

PS streamingon E-DCHswitch

OFF When it is checked, PS streaming traffic can bemapped to E-DCH when the uplink max bit rateis more than or equal to the streaming onHSUPA threshold.

7 H2D_FOR_LOWR5_NRNCCELL_ADD_SWITCH

H2D beforethe low R5NRNC celladded

OFF When it is checked, channel switch of HS-DSCH to DCH is needed before addingneighbor RNC with version lower than R5 cellto active set.

8 HSUPA_TTI_2MS_SWITCH

2 ms TTIswitch forHSUPAservice

OFF When it is checked, the 2ms TTI could beapplied to HSUPA traffic.

9 HSUPA_DCCC_SWITCH

DCCCswitch forHSUPAservice

OFF When it is checked, DCCC is available for theHSUPA service.

10

PS_CONVERSATION_ON_HSDPA_SWITCH

PSconversationservice onHSDPAswitch

OFF When it is checked, PS conversation traffic canbe mapped to HS-DSCH when the downlinkmax bit rate is more than or equal to theconversation on HSDPA threshold.




NO.


DefaultSetting

Description

11

PS_CONVERSATION_ON_E_DCH_SWITCH

PSconversationservice on E-DCH switch

OFF When it is checked, PS conversation traffic canbe mapped to E-DCH when the uplink max bitrate is more than or equal to the conversationon HSUPA threshold.

10.1.5 DRD Algorithm SwitchesThe algorithms of the DRD algorithm switches are listed here.

Parameter IDDrdSwitch

Parameter Meaning

Table 10-5 List of DRD algorithm switches

No. Switch ID SwitchMeaning

DefaultSetting

Description

1 COMB_SERV_DRD_SWITCH

Combinationservice DRDswitch

OFF Only when this switch is on, canDRD be done if combinationservice needs retry.

2 DRD_SWITCH DRD switch OFF This is the general DRDalgorithm switch, only whenthis switch is on, can the otherDRD sub-switches be on.

3 HSDPA_DRD_SWITCH

HSDPA DRDswitch

OFF Only when this switch is on, canDRD be done if HSDPAservice needs retry.

4 RAB_DCCC_DRD_SWITCH

DCCC DRDswitch

OFF Only when this switch is on, canDRD be done if RAB DCCCflow needs retry.

5 RAB_MODIFY_DRD_SWITCH

RAB modifyDRD switch

OFF Only when this switch is on, canDRD be done if RAB modifyflow needs retry.

6 HSUPA_DRD_SWITCH

HSUPA DRDswitch

OFF When it is checked, DRD istriggered for the HSUPAservice that needs retry.



No. Switch ID SwitchMeaning

DefaultSetting

Description

7 RAB_SETUP_DRD_SWITCH

RAB setupDRD switch

ON When it is checked, DRD istriggered for the RAB setupprocess that needs retry.

8 INTRA_HO_D2H_DRD_SWITCH

Intra-handoverD2H DRDswitch

ON After the intra-handoverprocess is completed, when theUE needs D2H retry forhandover-triggering, the blind-Ho DRD cell is allowed toselect for D2H retry only if theswitch is on.

9 INTER_HO_D2H_DRD_SWITCH

Inter-handoverD2H DRDswitch

ON After the inter-handoverprocess is completed, when theUE needs D2H retry forhandover-triggering, the blind-Ho DRD cell is allowed toselect for D2H retry only if theswitch is on.

10.2 Cell Algorithm SwitchesOn the RNC LMT, cell-oriented algorithm switches are added uniformly through ADDCELLALGOSWITCH, the state of each algorithm switch is queried through LSTCELLALGOSWITCH, and the algorithm switches are modified through MODCELLALGOSWITCH.

10.2.1 Cell Algorithm SwitchesThe algorithms and default states of the cell algorithm switches are listed here.

10.2.2 Uplink Admission Control Algorithm SwitchThis parameter is used to control UL CAC algorithm.

10.2.3 Downlink Admission Control Algorithm SwitchThis parameter is used to control DL CAC algorithm.

10.2.1 Cell Algorithm SwitchesThe algorithms and default states of the cell algorithm switches are listed here.

Table 10-6 List of cell algorithm switches


DefaultSetting

Description

Cell CAC algorithm switchNBMCACALGOSWITCH





DefaultSetting

Description

CRD_ADCTRL

NodeB creditadmissioncontrolalgorithm

ON Only IUB_CONG_CAC_SWITCH which isset by SET CACALGOSWITCH commandis switched on and this switch is also on, theNodeB credit admission control algorithm isvalid.

HSDPA_ADCTRL

HSDPAadmissioncontrolalgorithm

OFF Control HSDPA admission control algorithm.

HSDPA_GBP_MEAS

HSDPA HS-DSCH requiredpowermeasurement

OFF Control HSDPA HS-DSCH Required Powermeasurement.

HSDPA_PBR_MEAS

HSDPA HS-DSCH Providedbit ratemeasurement

OFF Control HSDPA HS-DSCH Provided Bit Ratemeasurement.

HSUPA_ADCTRL

HSUPAadmissioncontrolalgorithm

OFF Control HSUPA admission control algorithm.

MBMS_ADCTRL

MBMSadmissioncontrolalgorithm

OFF Control MBMS admission control algorithm.

DOFFC Default DPCHoffsetconfigurationalgorithm

ON Default DPCH offset configuration algorithm.

Cell LDC algorithm switchNBMLDCALGOSWITCH

INTRA_FREQUENCY_LDB

Intra-frequencyload balancealgorithm

OFF It is also named cell breathing algorithm.Basedon the cell load, this algorithm changes the pilotpower of the cell to control the load betweenintra-frequency cells.

PUC Potential usercontrolalgorithm

OFF ased on the cell load, this algorithm changes theselection/reselection parameters of a cell tolead the UE to a lighter loaded cell.

ULOLC Uplink overloadcontrolalgorithm

OFF When the cell is overloaded in UL, thisalgorithm reduces the cell load in UL by quickTF restriction or UE release.




DefaultSetting

Description

DLOLC Downlinkoverload controlalgorithm

OFF When the cell is overloaded in DL, thisalgorithm reduces the cell load in DL by quickTF restriction or UE release.

ULLDR Uplink loadrearrangementalgorithm

OFF When the cell is heavily loaded in UL, thisalgorithm reduces the cell load in UL by usinginter-frequency load handover, BE service ratereduction, uncontrollable real-time serviceQoS renegotiation, CS inter-RAT handover,and PS inter-RAT handover.

DLLDR Downlink loadrearrangementalgorithm

OFF When the cell is heavily loaded in DL, thisalgorithm reduces the cell load in DL by usinginter-frequency load handover, BE service ratereduction, uncontrollable real-time serviceQoS renegotiation, CS inter-RAT handover,and PS inter-RAT handover.

OLC_EVENTMEAS

OLC eventmeasure

OFF Specifies whether condition to trigger loadcontrol uses event measurement alone or infersfrom the period measurement report.

CELL_CODE_LDR

Codereshufflingalgorithm

OFF When the cell is heavily loaded in DL, thisalgorithm reduces the cell load in DL by usingBE service rate reduction and code treereshuffling.

CELL_CREDIT_LDR

Creditreshufflingalgorithm

OFF When the cell credit is heavily loaded, thisalgorithm reduces the credit load of the cell byusing BE service rate reduction, uncontrollablereal-time service QoS renegotiation, CS inter-RAT handover, and PS inter-RAT handover.

Mac-hs reset algorithm switch

NBMMACHSRESETALGOSELSWITCH

Mac-hs Resetalgorithmswitch

ALGORITHM_DEPEND_ON_LCG

Value range: ALGORITHM_REQUIRED,ALGORITHM_DEPEND_ON_LCGl ALGORITHM_REQUIRED: Always reset

the mac-hs no matter the cells in question arein the same NodeB or not.

l ALGORITHM_DEPEND_ON_LCG:Reset the mac-hs only when the cells inquestion are in the different local cell group.

10.2.2 Uplink Admission Control Algorithm SwitchThis parameter is used to control UL CAC algorithm.




Parameter IDNBMUlCacAlgoSelSwitch

Value RangeALGORITHM_OFF, ALGORITHM_FIRST, ALGORITHM_SECOND,ALGORITHM_THIRD

Physical Value RangeALGORITHM_OFF: switches off the uplink admission control algorithm;

ALGORITHM_FIRST: uses the load prediction algorithm for uplink admission;

ALGORITHM_SECOND: uses the total service normalized factor algorithm for uplinkadmission;

ALGORITHM_THIRD: The loose call admission control algorithm is used in uplink CAC.

Parameter SettingThe default setting is ALGORITHM_SECOND.

When the change range of uplink back noise is wide or the RTWP reported by the NodeB isinvalid, it is necessary to use the total service normalized factor algorithm.

10.2.3 Downlink Admission Control Algorithm SwitchThis parameter is used to control DL CAC algorithm.

Parameter IDNBMDlCacAlgoSelSwitch

Value RangeALGORITHM_OFF, ALGORITHM_FIRST, ALGORITHM_SECOND,ALGORITHM_THIRD

Physical Value RangeALGORITHM_OFF: switches off the uplink admission control algorithm;

ALGORITHM_FIRST: uses the load prediction algorithm for downlink admission;

ALGORITHM_SECOND: uses the total service normalized factor algorithm for downlinkadmission;

ALGORITHM_THIRD: The loose call admission control algorithm is used in downlink CAC.

Parameter SettingThe default setting is ALGORITHM_FIRST.

If TCP measurement is invalid, the total service normalized factor algorithm is adopted.



10.3 Other Algorithm SwitchesAt this time, there are some other algorithm switches, such as Iub CAC algorithm switch, Iubbandwidth-restricted BE service rate reduction algorithm switch, and intra-frequencymeasurement control information indication.

10.3.1 Iub CAC Algorithm SwitchesThis parameter is used to control the Iub Call Admission Control (CAC) algorithm.

10.3.2 Iub Bandwidth Congestion Control Algorithm SwitchThis parameter is used to control the Iub bandwidth congestion algorithm.

10.3.3 Intra-Frequency Measurement Control Information IndicationThis parameter defines whether the intra-frequency measurement control information should bedelivered through the system information.

10.3.4 Inter-Frequency/Inter-RAT Measurement IndicationThis parameter defines whether inter-frequency/inter-RAT measurement control information isto be delivered in the system information.

10.3.5 FACH Measurement IndicatorThis parameter indicates whether the FACH measurement occasion period length coefficientshould be delivered through the system information.

10.3.1 Iub CAC Algorithm SwitchesThis parameter is used to control the Iub Call Admission Control (CAC) algorithm.

Parameter ID

CacSwitch

Value Range

Table 10-7 CAC algorithm switches

Algorithmswitch

Switch ID Description Relevant Commands

NODEB_CREDIT_CAC_SWITCH

NodeBcredit CACswitch

The system performs CACbased on the usage state ofNodeB credit. When the idleNodeB's credit is not enough,the system refuses new accessrequests.

Set it through SETCACALGOSWITCH andquery it through LSTCACALGOSWITCH.





Parameter IDIUBCongCtrlSwitch

Value RangeEnum (ON, OFF)


Parameter SettingThe default value is OFF.

When this switch is open, the Iub bandwidth restriction algorithm works, so that when theoccupied bandwidth of Iub interface exceeds the Iub congestion trigger threshold, the algorithmuses LDR to periodically reduce some BE service rates or AMR service rates until the occupiedbandwidth is lower than the Iub congestion release threshold.

Impact on the Network Performancel In case that the transmission resource of Iub interface is scarce and the carrier wants to

admit more users by sacrificing some user perception, this switch shall be ON.l When the transmission resources are abundant, this switch shall preferably be OFF.

Relevant CommandsSet the parameter through ADD NODEBALGOPARA, query it through LSTNODEBALGOPARA, and modify it through MOD NODEBALGOPARA.

10.3.3 Intra-Frequency Measurement Control InformationIndication

This parameter defines whether the intra-frequency measurement control information should bedelivered through the system information.

Parameter IDIntraFreqMeasInd

Value RangeEnum (REQUIRE, NOT_REQUIRE)

Physical Value RangeREQUIRE: the intra-frequency measurement control information is delivered in SIB11;

NOT_REQUIRE: the intra-frequency measurement control information is not delivered inSIB11.



Parameter SettingThe default setting is REQUIRE.

Relevant CommandsSet this parameter through ADD CELLMEAS, query it through LST CELLMEAS, and modifyit through MOD CELLMEAS.

10.3.4 Inter-Frequency/Inter-RAT Measurement IndicationThis parameter defines whether inter-frequency/inter-RAT measurement control information isto be delivered in the system information.

Parameter IDInterFreqInterRATMeasInd

Value RangeEnum (NOT_REQUIRE, INTER_FREQ,INTER_RAT, INTER_FREQ_AND_INTER_RAT)

Physical Value RangeNOT_REQUIRE: the inter-frequency or inter-RAT measurement control information is notrequired;

INTER_FREQ: the inter-frequency measurement control information is required;

INTER_RAT: the inter-RAT measurement control information is required;

INTER_FREQ_and_INTER_RAT: the inter-frequency and inter-RAT measurement controlinformation is required.

Parameter SettingThe default setting is INTER_FREQ_AND_INTER_RAT. That is, Inter-frequency FDDmeasurement indicator and Inter-RAT measurement indicators are set to TRUE in thesystem message. This switch is oriented to cells.


10.3.5 FACH Measurement IndicatorThis parameter indicates whether the FACH measurement occasion period length coefficientshould be delivered through the system information.

Parameter IDFACHMeasInd




Value RangeREQUIRE, NOT_REQUIRE

Physical Value RangeREQUIRE：The measurement occasion about inter-frequency or inter-RAT were broadcastedby SIB11.

NOT_REQUIRE：The measurement occasion about inter-frequency or inter-RAT were notbroadcasted by SIB11.

Parameter SettingIf inter-freq or inter-RAT measurement control information was broadcast through the systeminformation, some UEs in CELL_FACH state need the FACH measurement occasion periodlength coefficient for measurement.

When the parameter InterFreqInterRATMeasInd is set to NOT_REQUIRE, this parameter isneedless.




11 Transmission Resource ManagementParameters

About This Chapter

The common configurable transmission parameters are listed here.

11.1 Transmission Common ParametersThe common configurable transmission parameters are listed here.

11.2 Iub Admission Control ParametersThe Iub admission control parameters are listed here.

11.3 Iub Congestion Control ParametersThe common configurable Iub congestion control parameters are listed here.

RANNetwork Optimization Parameter Reference 11 Transmission Resource Management Parameters


11.1 Transmission Common ParametersThe common configurable transmission parameters are listed here.

Table 11-1 List of transmission common parameters


Default Value Relevant Command

1 AAL2PATHT AAL2PATHtype

If there existsHSDPA service,it needs toconfigueHSDPA

Set: ADD AAL2PATHQuery: LST AAL2PATHor DSP AAL2PATHModify: MODAAL2PATH

2 IPPATH IP PATH type NRT Set: ADD IPPATHQuery: LST IPPATH orDSP IPPATHModify: MOD IPPATH

3 PHB Per-Hopbehavior

ANY

11.1.1 AAL2 Path TypeThis parameter is the expected type of the service carried on an AAL2 path.

11.1.2 IP Path TypeThis parameter is used to set the IP path type.

11.1.3 Per-Hop BehaviorThis parameter used to set the IP per hop behavior for IPPATH.

11.1.1 AAL2 Path TypeThis parameter is the expected type of the service carried on an AAL2 path.

Parameter IDAAL2PATHT

Value RangeR99, HSPA


Parameter SettingThis parameter defines the AAL2 path type. It describes whether the service is R99 or HSPAcarrier on path. HSPA service and non-HSPA service can not carrier on the same AAL2 path.If the system needs to support HSPA service, we must configure a HSPA type AAL2 path.

11 Transmission Resource Management ParametersRAN



Impact on the Network PerformanceHSPA channel high peak vs. average value decides the same high peak Vs. average value forHSPA service in Iub interface. The burst HSPA service affects voice and R99 data service if itis not treated diversify on transmission.

Relevant CommandsSet this parameter through ADD AAL2PATH, query it through LST AAL2PATH or DSPAAL2PATH, and modify it through MOD AAL2PATH.

11.1.2 IP Path TypeThis parameter is used to set the IP path type.

Parameter IDIPPATHT

Value RangeEnum( RT, NRT, HSPA RT, HSPA NRT)

Physical Value RangeRT means real time type, NRT means non real time type. HSPA RT means HSPA real time type.HSPA NRT means HSPA non real time type.

Parameter SettingThe default value is NRT.


Relevant CommandsSet this parameter through ADD IPPATH, query it through LST IPPATH or DSP IPPATH,and modify it through MOD IPPATH.

11.1.3 Per-Hop BehaviorThis parameter used to set the IP per hop behavior for IPPATH.

Parameter IDPHB

Value RangeEnum (BE, AF1, AF2, AF3, AF4, EF, ANY)




Parameter SettingThe default value is ANY.

PHB is used to set the user priority, the priority increase by degrees from BE to EF. If it is ANY,the DSCP of IP is set according to PHB setting, not according to DSCP setting.

Impact on the Network PerformanceDifferent services use different PHBs. The network provides different services according todifferent PHBs, and configures IP path respectively to realize different transmission.

For example, if the IP path type is RT/HSDPA_RT, then use high level DSCP; If the IP pathtype is NRT/HSDPA_NRT, then use low level DSCP. Different DSCPs is mapped to differentPHBs.

Relevant CommandsSet the parameter through ADD IPPATH, query it through LST IPPATH or DSP IPPATH,and modify it through MOD IPPATH.

11.2 Iub Admission Control ParametersThe Iub admission control parameters are listed here.

Table 11-2 List of Iub admission control parameters

ParameterID

ParameterMeaning


FWDHORSVBWBWDHORSVBW

ForwardhandoverreservedbandwidthBackwardhandoverreservedbandwidth

80 kbits/s Set the parameters through ADDAAL2PATH / ADD IPPATH;modify them through MODAAL2PATH / MOD IPPATH;query them through LST AAL2PATH /DSP AAL2PATH / LST IPPATH / DSPIPPATH.

11.2.1 Reserved Bandwidth for Forward/Backward HandoverThis group of parameters reflect the Iub bandwidth reserved for user switchover. They are thethreshold parameters used by new users for the access of Iub resources. When a new user gainsaccess to the Iub resources through a path, the access of the new user is denied if the remainingbandwidth of the path is smaller than the bandwidth reserved for user switchover.

11.2.1 Reserved Bandwidth for Forward/Backward HandoverThis group of parameters reflect the Iub bandwidth reserved for user switchover. They are thethreshold parameters used by new users for the access of Iub resources. When a new user gains




access to the Iub resources through a path, the access of the new user is denied if the remainingbandwidth of the path is smaller than the bandwidth reserved for user switchover.

Parameter IDFWDHORSVBW

BWDHORSVBW


Physical Value Range0 to 100000 kbit/s

Parameter SettingThe default value of each parameter is 80.

This group of parameters reflect the Iub bandwidth reserved for user switchover. To ensure thehigh success ratio of switchover, you need to set these parameters according to the actualswitchover service rate.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe greater these parameters are set, the more resources are reserved for user switchover. Thiscan ensure the high success ratio of user switchover whereas may waste resources. The smallerthese parameters are set, the more difficult it is to ensure the success ratio of user switchover.

Relevant CommandsSet the parameters through ADD AAL2PATH / ADD IPPATH, modify them through MODAAL2PATH / MOD IPPATH, and query them through LST AAL2PATH / DSPAAL2PATH / LST IPPATH / DSP IPPATH.

11.3 Iub Congestion Control ParametersThe common configurable Iub congestion control parameters are listed here.



Table 11-3 List of Iub congestion control parameters

No.

ParameterID

ParameterMeaning


1 FWDCONGBWBWDCONGBW

ForwardcongestionthresholdBackwardcongestionthreshold

160 kbit/s Set the parameters through ADDAAL2PATH/ADD IPPATH, modifythem through MOD AAL2PATH/MODIPPATH, and query through LSTAAL2PATH/DSP AAL2PATH/LSTIPPATH/DSP IPPATH

2 FWDCONGCLRBWBWDCONGCLRBW

ForwardcongestionclearthresholdBackwardcongestionclearthreshold

240 kbit/s

3 IubCongCtrlSwitch

IUBcongestioncontrolswitch

OFF Set this parameter through ADDNODEBALGOPARA, modify itthrough MOD NODEBALGOPARA,and query it throughLSTNODEBALGOPARA

4 IubCongCtrlTimerLen

IUBcongestioncontroltimerlength[s]

60 s

5 GeneralCommChFactor

Generalcommonchannelfactor[%]

70%

6 CMBCommChFactor

CMBcommonchannelfactor[%]

100%

7 MBMSCommChFactor

MBMScommonchannelfactor[%]

100%

8 SRBFactor SRB factor[%]

50%

9 TelephonyFactor

Telephonyfactor[%]

70%




No.

ParameterID

ParameterMeaning


10

R99ConvFactor

R99conversation servicefactor[%]

100%

11

R99StreamFactor

R99streamingservicefactor[%]

100%

12

R99InterFactor

R99interactiveservicefactor[%]

50%

13

R99BkgrndFactor

R99background servicefactor[%]

50%

14

HsdpaStreamFactor

HSDPAstreamingservicefactor[%]

100%

15

HsdpaInterFactor

HSDPAinteractiveservicefactor[%]

100%

16

HsdpaBkgrndFactor

HSDPAbackground servicefactor[%]

100%

17

HsupaStreamFactor

HSUPAstreamingservicefactor[%]

100%

18

HsupaInterFactor

HSUPAinteractiveservicefactor[%]

100%

19

HsupaBkgrndFactor

HSUPAbackground servicefactor[%]

100%

11.3.1 Forward/Backward Congestion Threshold



If the available forward bandwidth is less than or equal to FWDCONGBW, the forwardcongestion alarm is emitted. If the available backward bandwidth is less than or equal toBWDCONGBW, the backward congestion alarm is emitted.

11.3.2 Forward/Backward Congestion Clear ThresholdIf the available forward bandwidth is greater than FWDCONGCLRBW, the forward congestionalarm is cleared. If the available backward bandwidth is greater than BWDCONGCLRBW, thebackward congestion alarm is cleared.


11.3.4 Timer Length for Iub Bandwidth Restriction Service Rate ReductionAfter the Iub bandwidth is restricted, you can start the timer that is used for reducing servicerate. By using the timer, you can periodically select the users of the BE service and the AMRvoice service and reduce the rate of the services for solving the Iub congestion problem.

11.3.5 Iub Congestion FactorsThese parameters are Iub factors used to apply the Iub bandwidth when different services setup.

11.3.1 Forward/Backward Congestion ThresholdIf the available forward bandwidth is less than or equal to FWDCONGBW, the forwardcongestion alarm is emitted. If the available backward bandwidth is less than or equal toBWDCONGBW, the backward congestion alarm is emitted.

Parameter ID

FWDCONGBW

BWDCONGBW

Value Range

0 to 100,000


0 to 100,000 kbit/s

Parameter Setting

The default values for these parameters are both 160 kbit/s.


The higher the values are, the easier to trigger congestion control threshold. The BE servicesand AMR data rates decrease process begin. But if they are too high, the transport utilizationrate is low, at the same time, it has a bad effect on the end user perception.




Relevant CommandsSet the parameters through ADD AAL2PATH / ADD IPPATH, modify them through MODAAL2PATH / MOD IPPATH, and query through LST AAL2PATH / DSP AAL2PATH /LST IPPATH / DSP IPPATH.

11.3.2 Forward/Backward Congestion Clear ThresholdIf the available forward bandwidth is greater than FWDCONGCLRBW, the forward congestionalarm is cleared. If the available backward bandwidth is greater than BWDCONGCLRBW, thebackward congestion alarm is cleared.

Parameter IDFWDCONGCLRBW

BWDCONGCLRBW


Physical Value Range0 to 100,000 kbit/s

Parameter SettingThe default values are both 240 kbit/s.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe higher the values are, the easier the congestion alarm is cleared. But an overly high valuemay lead to a low transport utilization rate, and at the same time, the congestion control is nottriggered.

Relevant CommandsSet the parameters through ADD AAL2PATH / ADD IPPATH, modify them through MODAAL2PATH / MOD IPPATH, and query through LST AAL2PATH / DSP AAL2PATH /LST IPPATH / DSP IPPATH.


Parameter IDIUBCongCtrlSwitch

Value RangeEnum (ON, OFF)




None.

Parameter Setting

The default value is OFF.

When this switch is open, the Iub bandwidth restriction algorithm works, so that when theoccupied bandwidth of Iub interface exceeds the Iub congestion trigger threshold, the algorithmuses LDR to periodically reduce some BE service rates or AMR service rates until the occupiedbandwidth is lower than the Iub congestion release threshold.


l In case that the transmission resource of Iub interface is scarce and the carrier wants toadmit more users by sacrificing some user perception, this switch shall be ON.

l When the transmission resources are abundant, this switch shall preferably be OFF.

Relevant Commands

Set the parameter through ADD NODEBALGOPARA, query it through LSTNODEBALGOPARA, and modify it through MOD NODEBALGOPARA.

11.3.4 Timer Length for Iub Bandwidth Restriction Service RateReduction

After the Iub bandwidth is restricted, you can start the timer that is used for reducing servicerate. By using the timer, you can periodically select the users of the BE service and the AMRvoice service and reduce the rate of the services for solving the Iub congestion problem.

Parameter ID

IUBCONGCTRLTIMERLEN

Value Range

1 to 255


1 to 255 (unit: s)

Parameter Setting

The default setting is 60 s.

You need to set this parameter based on the effect of solving the Iub resource congestion problem.





The greater this parameter is, the longer time is spent on solving the Iub congestion problem andthe lower the congestion control frequency is. If the value set for this parameter is too small, theIub congestion control frequency is rather high, which is easy to cause the ping-pang effect.

Relevant Commands

Set the parameter through ADD NODEBALGOPARA, modify it through MODNODEBALGOPARA, and query it through LST NODEBALGOPARA .

11.3.5 Iub Congestion FactorsThese parameters are Iub factors used to apply the Iub bandwidth when different services setup.

Parameter ID

GeneralCommChFactor

CMBCommChFactor

MBMSCommChFactor

SRBFactor

TelephonyFactor

R99ConvFactor

R99StreamFactor

R99InterFactor

R99BkgrndFactor

HsdpaStreamFactor

HsdpaInterFactor

HsdpaBkgrndFactor

HsupaStreamFactor

HsupaInterFactor

HsupaBkgrndFactor

Value Range

1 to 100


1% to 100%, step 1%



Parameter SettingThese parameters are set according to the congestion condition. The default values are as listedin Table 11-4.

Table 11-4 Iub Congestion Factor Configuration

Parameter Name Parameter ID Default Value

General common channelfactor[%]

GeneralCommChFactor 70%

CMB common channelfactor[%]

CMBCommChFactor 100%

MBMS common channelfactor[%]

MBMSCommChFactor 100%

SRB factor[%] SRBFactor 50%

Telephony factor[%] TelephonyFactor 70%

R99 conversation servicefactor[%]

R99ConvFactor 100%

R99 streaming service factor[%]

R99StreamFactor 100%

R99 interactive service factor[%]

R99InterFactor 50%

R99 background servicefactor[%]

R99BkgrndFactor 50%

HSDPA streaming servicefactor[%]

HsdpaStreamFactor 100%

HSDPA interactive servicefactor[%]

HsdpaInterFactor 100%

HSDPA background servicefactor[%]

HsdpaBkgrndFactor 100%

HSUPA streaming servicefactor[%]

HsupaStreamFactor 100%

HSUPA interactive servicefactor[%]

HsupaInterFactor 100%

HSUPA background servicefactor[%]

HsupaBkgrndFactor 100%

Impact on the Network PerformanceServices feature should be considered when setting these parameters.




l If these parameters are greater, the applied Iub bandwidth is big, but part of Iub bandwidthmaybe wasted.

l If they are lower, the Iub bandwidth is congested and the service quality is poor.

Relevant CommandsSet the parameters through ADD NODEBALGOPARA, query them through LSTNODEBALGOPARA, and modify them through MOD NODEBALGOPARA.



12 Parameters Configured on NodeB LMT

About This Chapter

The parameters configured on the NodeB LMT described here mainly consist of the HSDPAflow control parameters, the HSDPA MAC-hs scheduling algorithm parameters, the HSUPAMAC-e scheduling algorithm parameters, the HSUPA power control parameters and the localcell management parameters.

12.1 HSDPA Flow Control ParametersThe common configurable HSDPA flow control parameters are listed here.

12.2 HSDPA MAC-hs Scheduling Algorithm ParametersThe common configurable HSDPA MAC-hs scheduling algorithm parameters are listed here.

12.3 HSUPA MAC-e Scheduling Algorithm ParametersThe HSUPA MAC-e scheduling algorithm parameters configurable on the NodeB LMT arelisted here.

12.4 HSUPA Power Control ParametersHSUPA power control parameters include power control algorithm switches for downlinkcontrol channel, fixed and dynamic power control mode algorithm parameters.

12.5 Local Cell Management ParametersThe local cell management parameters consist of cell radius and cell handover radius.

RANNetwork Optimization Parameter Reference 12 Parameters Configured on NodeB LMT


12.1 HSDPA Flow Control ParametersThe common configurable HSDPA flow control parameters are listed here.

Table 12-1 List of HSDPA flow control parameters

No.



1 FlowControlAlgorithmSwitch

HSDPAbandwidthadjustmentswitch

AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRLpath

Set the parameterthroughSETHSDPAFLOWCTRLPARA (BTS3812E,BTS3812A,BTS3812AE,BBU3806,BBU3806C),and query it through LSTHSDPAFLOWCTRLPARA (BTS3812E,BTS3812A,BTS3812AE, BBU3806,BBU3806C).

2 FrameDiscardRateThreshold

Frame discardrate thresholdon Iub interface

0.1%

3 DlTrDelayJitterThldBase

Time delaythreshold

4 (8 ms)

12.1.1 HSDPA Bandwidth Adjustment SwitchThis parameter difines the NodeB flow control scheme. It decides whether the congestion controlis implemented on RNC or on the NodeB.

12.1.2 Frame Discard Rate Threshold on Iub InterfaceThis parameter defines the frame discard rate on the Iub interface, that is the packet discard ratedue to code error when the transport network is idle. If the discard rate measured at the receiverexceeds the threshold, then it is judged that the Iub interface is congested. Otherwise, it isregarded as packet discarded due to code error other than congestion.

12.1.3 Time Delay Threshold on Iub InterfaceThis parameter defines the time delay of frame transmission when the transport network is lessbusy. The Iub congestion is triggered when the time delay measured at the NodeB exceeds thethreshold. Otherwise, it is considered as common time delay of the transport network other thancongestion.

12.1.1 HSDPA Bandwidth Adjustment SwitchThis parameter difines the NodeB flow control scheme. It decides whether the congestion controlis implemented on RNC or on the NodeB.

Parameter IDFlowControlAlgorithmSwitch

Value RangeSIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL, AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL, NO_FLOW_CTRL

12 Parameters Configured on NodeB LMTRAN



Physical Value RangeSIMPLE_FLOW_CTR: Based on the configured Iub bandwidth and the bandwidth occupied byR99 users, traffic is allocated to HSDPA users when the physical bandwidth restriction is takeninto account.

AUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRLNode: Based on the flow control of SIMPLE_FLOW_CTRL,traffic is allocated to HSDPA users when the delay and packet loss on the Iub interface are takeninto account.

NO_FLOW_CTRL: The NodeB does not allocate bandwidth according to the configuration ordelay on the Iub interface. The RNC allocates the bandwidth according to the bandwidth on theUu interface reported by the NodeB.

Parameter SettingThis parameter should be configured according to concrete scenarios, and is set toAUTO_ADJUST_FLOW_CTRL by default.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThis parameter helps implement the end to end congestion control when HSDPA data istransmitted on Iub interface, thus the Iub bandwidth utilization rate is improved and thetransmission reliability is enhanced. The switch is set to OPEN by default.

Relevant CommandsSet the parameter throughSET HSDPAFLOWCTRLPARA (BTS3812E, BTS3812A,BTS3812AE, BBU3806,BBU3806C), and query it through LSTHSDPAFLOWCTRLPARA (BTS3812E, BTS3812A, BTS3812AE, BBU3806,BBU3806C).

12.1.2 Frame Discard Rate Threshold on Iub InterfaceThis parameter defines the frame discard rate on the Iub interface, that is the packet discard ratedue to code error when the transport network is idle. If the discard rate measured at the receiverexceeds the threshold, then it is judged that the Iub interface is congested. Otherwise, it isregarded as packet discarded due to code error other than congestion.

Parameter IDFrameDiscardRateThreshold

Value RangeInteger [0 to 1000]

Physical Value Range0 to 1, step is 0.001

Parameter SettingThe default value is 0.001 when the Iub interface adopts ATM networking.



When the Iub interface adopts IP networking, it is set to the discard target of the IP transmissionnetwork.

Impact on the Network PerformanceIf the parameter is set too low, the dynamic adjustment algorithm may judge the frames discardeddue to the network code error as congestion, thus decreases the bandwidth utilization rate. If thethreshold is set too high, the sensitivity to clear Iub congestion decreases.

Relevant CommandsSet the parameter throughSET HSDPAFLOWCTRLPARA (BTS3812E, BTS3812A,BTS3812AE, BBU3806,BBU3806C), and query it through LSTHSDPAFLOWCTRLPARA (BTS3812E, BTS3812A, BTS3812AE, BBU3806,BBU3806C).

12.1.3 Time Delay Threshold on Iub InterfaceThis parameter defines the time delay of frame transmission when the transport network is lessbusy. The Iub congestion is triggered when the time delay measured at the NodeB exceeds thethreshold. Otherwise, it is considered as common time delay of the transport network other thancongestion.

Parameter IDDlTrDelayJitterThldBase

Value RangeInteger [0 to 100]

Physical Value Range0 ms to 100 ms, step is 1 ms

Parameter SettingThe parameter setting consisits of two parts: the time delay of Iub transport network + 10 ms

l Part one:The transmission delay period while data is transmitted on HS-DSCH, which consists ofthe delay of data buffering in each processing unit and the delay of transmission throughthe network. The time delay of ATM transmission network differs from that of the IPtransmission network. It is recommended to send data frames when the network is lessbusy, and get the transmission delay differences among labeled samples at the NodeBreceiver. (The NodeB with enhanced performance can get the time delay of data frametransmission.)But there is no test result at present, and it is arranged for the time being as follows:For Iub interface with ATM networking: 0 ms;For Iub interface with IP networking: the time delay target of IP transport network.

l Part two, the 10 ms:




According to HS-DSCH INTERVAL (10 ms to 80 ms), when a data frame is transmittedin a network not congested, the transmission delay may be up to 80 ms, but we take theminimum value 10 ms as a benchmark.


If the threshold is set too low, the regular time delay of Iub interface transmission may beconsidered that Iub congestion happens, reducing the Iub bandwidth utilization rate. If theparameter is set too high, it is not easy to clear the congestion decreases, and the Iub transmissiondelay may be increased.

Relevant Commands

Set the parameter throughSET HSDPAFLOWCTRLPARA (BTS3812E, BTS3812A,BTS3812AE, BBU3806,BBU3806C), and query it through LSTHSDPAFLOWCTRLPARA (BTS3812E, BTS3812A, BTS3812AE, BBU3806,BBU3806C).

12.2 HSDPA MAC-hs Scheduling Algorithm ParametersThe common configurable HSDPA MAC-hs scheduling algorithm parameters are listed here.

Table 12-2 List of HSDPA MAC-hs scheduling algorithm parameters

No.



1 RSCALLOCM Resourceallocatemethod, 0:code priority(applied inpower-limitedmacro cells); 1:power priority(applied incode-limitedmicro cells)

0 Set the parameterthroughSETMACHSPARA(BTS3812E, BTS3812A,BTS3812AE, BBU3806,BBU3806C), and query itthrough LSTMACHSPARA(BTS3812E, BTS3812A,BTS3812AE, BBU3806,BBU3806C).

2 SM Schedulingmethod (EPF,PF, RR,MAXCI)

EPF

3 MXRETRAN Maximumretransmissioncount

4

4 PWRMGN Power margin 5 (5%)

5 SCCHPWRCM HS-SCCHpower controlmethod

0 (adaptive powercontrol based onCQI)



No.



6 SCCHPWR When the HS-SCCH power iscontrolled byfixedconfiguration,this parameteris the fixedpower value ofHS-SCCH;when the HS-SCCH adoptsthe adaptivepower controlbased on CQI,this parameteris the HS-SCCH initialtransmitpower. Thevalue is anoffset in dBrelevant to thetransmit powerof PCPICH.

28 (–3dB), step is0.25

7 SCCHFER Target FER ofHS-SCCHpower control.If the measuredHS-SCCHFER is greaterthan the targetFER, raise thetransmit powerof HS-SCCH,otherwiselower transmitpower of HS-SCCH.

10 (1%), step is0.25




No.



8 IBLER When theinitial BLERexceeds thetarget BLER,raise thetransmit powerof HS-PDSCH,otherwise,lower thetransmit powerof HS-PDSCH.

0 (the CQIadjustment isclosed)

9 RSCLMSW Resourcelimitingswitch, 0:Open; 1: Close

OPEN

10 DYNCODESW Dynamic codeswitch

OPEN

11 16QAMSW 16QAM switch OPEN

12 CQIFA CQI filterAlpha

0 (no filter)

13 SPIGBR GBR for SPI(kbit/s)

See the table Set the parameter throughSET MACHSSPIPARA(BTS3812E, BTS3812A,BTS3812AE, BBU3806,BBU3806C), and query itthrough LSTMACHSSPIPARA(BTS3812E, BTS3812A,BTS3812AE, BBU3806,BBU3806C).

14 SPIWEIGHT Weight of SPI(%)

See the table

15 SPIRSCRATIO Resourcelimiting ratiofor SPI,available onlywhen theresourcelimiting switchis on

See the table

12.2.1 Resource Allocate MethodResource allocate method, 0: code priority (applied in power-limited macro cells); 1: powerpriority (applied in code-limited micro cells).

12.2.2 Scheduling MethodThis parameter defines the scheduling method of MAC-hs.

12.2.3 Maximum Retransmission CountThis parameter defines the maximum retransmission count of the MAC-hs HARQ process.

12.2.4 Power MarginThis parameter defines the power margin for DCH when the HSDPA adopts the dynamic powercontrol.



12.2.5 HS-SCCH Power Control MethodThis parameter sets the power control method of HS-SCCH.

12.2.6 HS-SCCH Fixed Power or Initial Transmit PowerWhen the HS-SCCH power is controlled by fixed configuration, this parameter is the fixed powervalue of HS-SCCH; when the HS-SCCH adopts the adaptive power control based on CQI, thisparameter is the HS-SCCH initial transmit power. The value is an offset in dB relevant to thetransmit power of PCPICH.

12.2.7 Target HS-SCCH FERThis parameter is the target FER of HS-SCCH power control. When the measured FER is greaterthan the target FER, raise the transmit power of HS-SCCH, otherwise, lower the transmit powerof HS-SCCH.

12.2.8 Initial BLER of Data TransferWhen the initial BLER exceeds the target BLER, raise the transmit power of HS-PDSCH,otherwise, lower the transmit power of HS-PDSCH.

12.2.9 Resource Limiting SwitchThis is the resource limiting switch. It decides whether to restrain a single user's maximumresource usage in a congested cell.

12.2.10 HSDPA Dynamic Code SwitchThis parameter decides whether to open the HSDPA dynamic code switch controlled by NodeB.

12.2.11 16QAM SwitchThis parameter decides whether to open the HSDPA 16QAM switch controlled by NodeB.

12.2.12 CQI Filter AlphaThe CQI reported from UE is taken into the filtering processing within the NodeB to get a stablevalue.

12.2.13 GBR for SPIServices with different SPIs are configured with different GBRs.

12.2.14 Weight for SPIThis parameter is used when users are in priority compositor.

12.2.15 Resource Limiting Ratio for SPIThis parameter defines the maximum power resource ratio for different SPIs when the cell is incongestion state.

12.2.1 Resource Allocate MethodResource allocate method, 0: code priority (applied in power-limited macro cells); 1: powerpriority (applied in code-limited micro cells).

Parameter IDRSCALLOCM

Value Range0, 1




Physical Value Range0, 1

Parameter Setting0

Impact on the Network PerformanceUnder the power limited circumstances, the code is firstly allocated to save power resources forother users; while the code is limited, firstly allocate the power to save code resources for otherusers.

Relevant CommandsSet the parameter throughSET MACHSPARA (BTS3812E, BTS3812A, BTS3812AE,BBU3806, BBU3806C), and query it through LST MACHSPARA (BTS3812E, BTS3812A,BTS3812AE, BBU3806, BBU3806C).

12.2.2 Scheduling MethodThis parameter defines the scheduling method of MAC-hs.

Parameter IDSM

Value RangeEPF, PF, RR, MAXCI

Physical Value RangeEPF (Enhanced PF, PF based on GBR), PF, RR (Round Robin), MAXCI (MAX C/I)

Parameter SettingThe default setting is EPF.

Impact on the Network PerformanceRR (Round Robin): the network schedule each user in turn without considering user's CQI. Thecell thoughput is poor;

MAX C/I: Users with high CQI are considered with priority, that is, user with the highest C/Ican get the service. The Max C/I scheduling method provides the highest cell throughput andfrequency utilization rate with the sacrifice of user fairness. Users with low CQI do not have thechance to transfer data. So from users' point, this scheduling method is of the least fairness;

PF: the current available data transmission rate and the history rate are both in consideration.Thus, users with nice CQI and users with a long waiting history will be taken into account at thesame time. This is a compromise of cell throughput priority and user fairness priority methods.



EPF: The SPI of user, the GBR configured, the current service rate and CQI are all taken intoaccount. This method is relatively prior to the above ones on the aspect of fairness for users andsystem capacity.

Relevant Commands

Set the parameter throughSET MACHSPARA (BTS3812E, BTS3812A, BTS3812AE,BBU3806, BBU3806C), and query it through LST MACHSPARA (BTS3812E, BTS3812A,BTS3812AE, BBU3806, BBU3806C).

12.2.3 Maximum Retransmission CountThis parameter defines the maximum retransmission count of the MAC-hs HARQ process.

Parameter ID

MXRETRAN

Value Range

0 to 10


0 to 10 times

Parameter Setting

4


If the parameter is set too low, it is more likely for the MAC-hs to discard packets when networkquality is poor. Then the RLC retransmission is required to ensure the data transmitted correctly,thus the data transmission delay is increased. If it is set too high, the queue may be blocked dueto some packets retransmitted frequently.

Relevant Commands


12.2.4 Power MarginThis parameter defines the power margin for DCH when the HSDPA adopts the dynamic powercontrol.

Parameter ID

PWRMGN




Value Range0 to 100

Physical Value Range0 to 100%

Parameter Setting5

Impact on the Network PerformanceIt is a power margin allocated for DCH, and is available only when the HSDPA adopts thedynamic power control algorithm. If it is set overly great, the power may be wasted. If it is settoo low, the power control requirements of DCH may not be met.

Relevant CommandsSet the parameter throughSET MACHSPARA (BTS3812E, BTS3812A, BTS3812AE,BBU3806, BBU3806C), and query it through LST MACHSPARA (BTS3812E, BTS3812A,BTS3812AE, BBU3806, BBU3806C).

12.2.5 HS-SCCH Power Control MethodThis parameter sets the power control method of HS-SCCH.

Parameter IDSCCHPWRCM

Value Range0, 1

Physical Value Range0 means the adaptive power control based on CQI; 1 means the HS-SCCH power is fixed.

Parameter SettingThe default value is 0, that is, the adaptive power control based on CQI.

Impact on the Network PerformanceThe HS-SCCH power control has a significant effect on data transmission.l If the HS-SCCH power is overly allotted, the available power of HS-PDSCH decreases,

and the cell throughout and user throughout declines.l If the HS-SCCH power is allotted insufficiently, the HS-SCCH decoding failure increases,

and the cell throughout and user throughout declines.



Relevant Commands

On the NodeB LMT, set it through SET MACHSPARA (BTS3812E, BTS3812A,BTS3812AE, BBU3806, BBU3806C), and query it through LST MACHSPARA(BTS3812E, BTS3812A, BTS3812AE, BBU3806, BBU3806C).

12.2.6 HS-SCCH Fixed Power or Initial Transmit PowerWhen the HS-SCCH power is controlled by fixed configuration, this parameter is the fixed powervalue of HS-SCCH; when the HS-SCCH adopts the adaptive power control based on CQI, thisparameter is the HS-SCCH initial transmit power. The value is an offset in dB relevant to thetransmit power of PCPICH.

Parameter ID

SCCHPWR

Value Range

0 to 80


-10 dB to 10 dB

Parameter Setting

The default value is 28, that is -3 dB. The step is 0.25 dB.


l When the HS-SCCH power is configured to a fixed value, if the HS-SCCH power is overlyallotted, the available power of HS-PDSCH decreases, and the cell throughout and userthroughout declines; if the HS-SCCH power is allotted insufficiently, the HS-SCCHdecoding failure increases, and the cell throughout and user throughout declines.

l When the HS-SCCH adopts the adaptive power control based on CQI, if this parameter isset too high, the HS-SCCH power is wasted before the power control takes effect; if theparameter is set too low, the HS-SCCH decoding failure increases before the power controltakes effect, weakening the data transmission performance.

Relevant Commands


12.2.7 Target HS-SCCH FERThis parameter is the target FER of HS-SCCH power control. When the measured FER is greaterthan the target FER, raise the transmit power of HS-SCCH, otherwise, lower the transmit powerof HS-SCCH.




Parameter IDSCCHFER

Value Range1 to 999

Physical Value Range1% to 99.9%

Parameter SettingThe default value is 10, namely 1%.

Impact on the Network Performancel When the HS-SCCH power is configured to a fixed value, if the HS-SCCH power is overly

allotted, the available power of HS-PDSCH decreases, and the cell throughout and userthroughout declines; if the HS-SCCH power is allotted insufficiently, the HS-SCCHdecoding failure increases, and the cell throughout and user throughout declines.

l When the HS-SCCH adopts the adaptive power control based on CQI, if this parameter isset too high, the HS-SCCH power is wasted before the power control takes effect; if theparameter is set too low, the HS-SCCH decoding failure increases before the power controltakes effect, weakening the data transmission performance.

Relevant CommandsOn the NodeB LMT, set it through SET MACHSPARA (BTS3812E, BTS3812A,BTS3812AE, BBU3806, BBU3806C), and query it through LST MACHSPARA(BTS3812E, BTS3812A, BTS3812AE, BBU3806, BBU3806C).

12.2.8 Initial BLER of Data TransferWhen the initial BLER exceeds the target BLER, raise the transmit power of HS-PDSCH,otherwise, lower the transmit power of HS-PDSCH.

Parameter IDIBLER

Value Range1 to 50


Parameter SettingThe default value is 10 (10%).




If the IBLER is too high, retransmission is more probable, and delay increases. Otherwise,retransmission is less probable, and power efficiency declines. When the power is not restrictedby scenarios, lower IBLER to increase effective throughput rate.

Relevant Commands


12.2.9 Resource Limiting SwitchThis is the resource limiting switch. It decides whether to restrain a single user's maximumresource usage in a congested cell.

Parameter ID

RSCLMSW

Value Range

0/1


OPEN/CLOSE

Parameter Setting

0 (OPEN)


If the switch is closed, it is likely to occur that a vast majority of the cell resources are taken upby users with high priority but poor CQI.

Relevant Commands


12.2.10 HSDPA Dynamic Code SwitchThis parameter decides whether to open the HSDPA dynamic code switch controlled by NodeB.

Parameter ID

DYNCODESW




Value Range

OPEN, CLOSE


OPEN, CLOSE

Parameter Setting

The HSDPA dynamic code makes the physical layer channel codes be fully utilized. It issuggested that the switch be set to OPEN all the time.


The HSDPA dynamic code makes the physical layer channel codes be fully utilized, but it willnot exceed the code number defined with the HSDPA license.

Relevant Commands

On the NodeB LMT, set the parameter through SET MACHSPARA (BTS3812E,BTS3812A, BTS3812AE, BBU3806, BBU3806C), and query it through LSTMACHSPARA (BTS3812E, BTS3812A, BTS3812AE, BBU3806, BBU3806C).

12.2.11 16QAM SwitchThis parameter decides whether to open the HSDPA 16QAM switch controlled by NodeB.

Parameter ID

16QAMSW

Value Range

OPEN, CLOSE


OPEN, CLOSE

Parameter Setting

A high thoughput can be guaranteed with the HSDPA 16QAM switch open. It is suggested thatthe switch be open all the time.


A high throughput can be guaranteed with the HSDPA 16QAM switch open. It is suggested thatthe switch be open all the time.



Relevant Commands


12.2.12 CQI Filter AlphaThe CQI reported from UE is taken into the filtering processing within the NodeB to get a stablevalue.

Parameter ID

CQIFA

Value Range

0 to 99


0% to 99%, step is 1%

Parameter Setting

The default setting is 0 (0%).

The filtering adopts the following method:

where, a is the CQIFA, if a is set to 0, the CQI filter algorithm switch is closed.


The higher the CQIFA, the value after filtering is more stable. The lower the CQIFA is, the valuechange after filtering is more apparent. If the CQIFA is set to 0, the CQI filter algorithm switchis closed.

Relevant Commands


12.2.13 GBR for SPIServices with different SPIs are configured with different GBRs.

Parameter ID

SPIGBR





Physical Value Range0 to 16777215 bit/s

Parameter SettingTable 12-3 shows the parameter setting.

Table 12-3 GBR, weight and resource limiting ratio for SPI

SPINo SPIGBR SPIWEIGHT SPIRSCRATIO

0 64 80 15

1 64 80 15

2 64 80 15

3 64 80 15

4 64 80 15

5 64 80 15

6 64 90 15

7 64 100 15

8 64 100 15

9 64 100 15

10 64 100 15

11 64 80 15

12 64 80 15

13 128 90 20

14 256 100 25

15 128 100 20

Impact on the Network PerformanceThis parameter is configured to spare more service resources for high priority users.

Relevant CommandsSet the parameter through SET MACHSSPIPARA (BTS3812E, BTS3812A, BTS3812AE,BBU3806, BBU3806C), and query it through LST MACHSSPIPARA (BTS3812E,BTS3812A, BTS3812AE, BBU3806, BBU3806C).



12.2.14 Weight for SPIThis parameter is used when users are in priority compositor.

Parameter IDSPIWEIGHT

Value Range0 to 100


Parameter SettingSee List of GBR, weight and resource limiting ratio for SPI

Impact on the Network PerformanceThis parameter is configured to make more scheduling chances for high priority users.

Relevant CommandsSet the parameter through SET MACHSSPIPARA (BTS3812E, BTS3812A, BTS3812AE,BBU3806, BBU3806C), and query it through LST MACHSSPIPARA (BTS3812E,BTS3812A, BTS3812AE, BBU3806, BBU3806C).

12.2.15 Resource Limiting Ratio for SPIThis parameter defines the maximum power resource ratio for different SPIs when the cell is incongestion state.

Parameter IDSPIRSCRATIO

Value Range0 to 100


Parameter SettingRefer to the maximum transmit power for a single link when the GBR is the same as the bearingrate of R99 services. Huawei's current benchmark for maximum transmit power of a single linkis as follows: -8 dB (1.6%) for 8 kbit/s, -6 dB (2.5%) for 16 kbit/s, -2 dB (6.3%) for 64 kbit/s,0 dB (10%) for 128 kbit/s, 2 dB (15.8%) for 256 kbit/s and 4 dB (25%) for 384 kbit/s.





The resource limiting ratio decides the maximum rate a user can get at the edge of a cell. Thisparameter is configured to have more resources allocated to high priority users.

Relevant Commands

Set the parameter through SET MACHSSPIPARA (BTS3812E, BTS3812A, BTS3812AE,BBU3806, BBU3806C), and query it through LST MACHSSPIPARA (BTS3812E,BTS3812A, BTS3812AE, BBU3806, BBU3806C).

12.3 HSUPA MAC-e Scheduling Algorithm ParametersThe HSUPA MAC-e scheduling algorithm parameters configurable on the NodeB LMT arelisted here.

Table 12-4 List of HSUPA MAC-e scheduling algorithm parameters

No.


Relevant Command

1 AGTHRESHOLD

If the SG of requested ratesand that of current rates aregreater than this threshold,then the AG can be sent tothe UE.

3 On the NodeB LMT, setthe parameterthroughSETMACEPARA(BTS3812E,BTS3812A,BTS3812AE,BBU3806,BBU3806C), and queryit through LSTMACEPARA(BTS3812E,BTS3812A,BTS3812AE,BBU3806,BBU3806C).

2 RAVGINITVALUE

It is the initial value ofcalculated average rate.

16 kbit/s

3 GbrEnable If the switch is on, whetherthe user real rate is GBRrate needs to be affirmedduring the GBR userscheduling. The schedulingalgorithm ensures the GBRrate for GBR users withoutconsidering the uplink load.

OPEN

4 WSPI Sort SPI switch OPEN

5 WRATE Sort rate weight 0.5

6 WRSN Sort rate RSN weight 0.5

12.3.1 AG ThresholdIf the SG of requested rates and that of current rates are greater than this threshold, then the AGcan be sent to the UE.

12.3.2 Average Rate Initial ValueIt is the initial value of calculated average rate.

12.3.3 GBR Schedule Switch



If the switch is on, whether the user real rate is GBR rate needs to be affirmed during the GBRuser scheduling. The scheduling algorithm ensures the GBR rate for GBR users withoutconsidering the uplink load.

12.3.4 Sort Rate WeightThis is the weight of rate for priority calculation.

12.3.5 Sort Rate RSN WeightThis parameter is the RSN weight for priority calculation.

12.3.1 AG ThresholdIf the SG of requested rates and that of current rates are greater than this threshold, then the AGcan be sent to the UE.

Parameter IDAGTHRESHOLD

Value Range0 to 31

Physical Value Range0 to 31


Impact on the Network PerformanceIf the RG is satisfied to the SI request of UE, setting the AG threshold can decrease the resourceoccupation of AGCH channel.l If the AG threshold is too low, it increases the occupation on AGCH channel, and the power

consumption is greater than that of RGCH channel.l If the AG threshold is too high, the UE data rate increases more slowly.

Relevant CommandsOn the NodeB LMT, set or modify this parameter through SET MACEPARA (BTS3812E,BTS3812A, BTS3812AE, BBU3806, BBU3806C), and query it through LST MACEPARA(BTS3812E, BTS3812A, BTS3812AE, BBU3806, BBU3806C).

12.3.2 Average Rate Initial ValueIt is the initial value of calculated average rate.

Parameter IDRAVGINITVALUE




Value Range

0 to 1400


0 to 1400 kbit/s

Parameter Setting

The default value is 16 kbit/s.


Whether this parameter is too high or too low, the real rate has little effect on the average rate.

Relevant Commands

On the NodeB LMT, set or modify this parameter through SET MACEPARA (BTS3812E,BTS3812A, BTS3812AE, BBU3806, BBU3806C), and query it through LST MACEPARA(BTS3812E, BTS3812A, BTS3812AE, BBU3806, BBU3806C).

12.3.3 GBR Schedule SwitchIf the switch is on, whether the user real rate is GBR rate needs to be affirmed during the GBRuser scheduling. The scheduling algorithm ensures the GBR rate for GBR users withoutconsidering the uplink load.

Parameter ID

GBREnable

Value Range

0, 1


OPEN, CLOSE

Parameter Setting

The default value is OPEN.


If the GBR switch is OPEN, the RNC overload control is needed to be configured as an actionwhich can be triggered by RTWP measurement value.




12.3.4 Sort Rate WeightThis is the weight of rate for priority calculation.

Parameter IDWRATE

Value Range0 to 10


Parameter Setting5

Impact on the Network PerformanceThis parameter is used to calculate the UE priority. If it is set too low, the influence the rate hason priority may be weakened. If it is set too high, the RSN's influence is weakened.

Relevant CommandsSet the parameter throughSET MACEPARA (BTS3812E, BTS3812A, BTS3812AE,BBU3806, BBU3806C), and query it through LST MACEPARA (BTS3812E, BTS3812A,BTS3812AE, BBU3806,BBU3806C).

12.3.5 Sort Rate RSN WeightThis parameter is the RSN weight for priority calculation.

Parameter IDWRSN

Value Range0 to 10





Parameter Setting

5


This parameter is used to calculate the UE priority. If it is set too low, the influence from RSNon the priority may be weakened. If it is set too high, then influence from the rate may beweakened.

Relevant Commands

Set the parameter throughSET MACEPARA (BTS3812E, BTS3812A, BTS3812AE,BBU3806, BBU3806C), and query it through LST MACEPARA (BTS3812E, BTS3812A,BTS3812AE, BBU3806,BBU3806C).

12.4 HSUPA Power Control ParametersHSUPA power control parameters include power control algorithm switches for downlinkcontrol channel, fixed and dynamic power control mode algorithm parameters.

12.4.1 Power Control Algorithm Switches for Downlink Control ChannelThe common configurable HSUPA power control algorithm switches for downlink controlchannel are listed here.

12.4.2 Fixed Power Control Mode Algorithm ParametersThe common configurable HSUPA fixed power control mode algorithm parameters are listedhere.

12.4.3 Dynamic Power Control Mode Algorithm ParametersThe common configurable HSUPA dynamic power control mode algorithm parameters are listedhere.

12.4.1 Power Control Algorithm Switches for Downlink ControlChannel

The common configurable HSUPA power control algorithm switches for downlink controlchannel are listed here.

Table 12-5 List of power control algorithm switches for downlink control channel

No. ParameterID

ParameterMeaning

DefaultValue

RelevantCommand

Level

1 EAGCHPCMOD

E-AGCHHPC mode

FIXED Set or modify:SETMACEPARA(BTS3812E,BTS3812A,BTS3812AE,BBU3806,BBU3806C)

NodeB

2 SERGCHPCMOD

E-RGCHHPC modefor serviceradio links

FIXED



No. ParameterID

ParameterMeaning

DefaultValue

RelevantCommand

Level

3 NSERGCHPCMOD

Query:LSTMACEPARA(BTS3812E,BTS3812A,BTS3812AE,BBU3806,BBU3806C)

E-RGCHHPC modefor non-service radiolinks

FIXED

4 SEHICHPCMOD

E-HICH HPCmode forservice radiolinks

FIXED

5 NSEHICHPCMOD

E-HICH HPCmode for non-service radiolinks

FIXED

12.4.1.1 E-AGCH HPC ModeThis is the E-AGCH channel power control algorithm switch. If it is FIXED, the transmissionpower is set according to P-CPICH power and fixed power offset; if it is DYNAMIC, thetransmission power is set according to DCH power of the UE.

12.4.1.2 E-RGCH HPC Mode for Service Radio LinksIt is the RGCH power control algorithm switch of EDCH serving RLS. If it is FIXED, thetransmission power is set according to P-CHPICH power and fixed power offset; if it isDYNAMIC, the transmission power is set according to DCH power of the UE.

12.4.1.3 E-RGCH HPC Mode for Non-service Radio LinksIt is the RGCH power control algorithm switch of EDCH non-serving RLS. If it is FIXED, thetransmission power is set according to P-CHPICH power and fixed power offset; if it isDYNAMIC, the transmission power is set according to DCH power of the UE.

12.4.1.4 E-HICH HPC Mode for Service Radio LinksIt is the HICH power control algorithm switch of RLS that contains serving RL. If it is FIXED,the transmission power is set according to P-CHPICH power and fixed power offset; if it isDYNAMIC, the transmission power is set according to DCH power of the UE.

12.4.1.5 E-HICH HPC Mode for Non-service Radio LinksIt is the HICH power control algorithm switch of RLS that does not contain serving RL. If it isFIXED, the transmission power is set according to P-CHPICH power and fixed power offset; ifit is DYNAMIC, the transmission power is set according to DCH power of the UE.

E-AGCH HPC Mode

This is the E-AGCH channel power control algorithm switch. If it is FIXED, the transmissionpower is set according to P-CPICH power and fixed power offset; if it is DYNAMIC, thetransmission power is set according to DCH power of the UE.

Parameter ID

EAGCHPCMOD




Value RangeFIXED, DYNAMIC

Physical Value RangeFixed, Dynamic

Parameter SettingThis parameter has not been optimized, the value FIXED is suggested.

Impact on the Network PerformanceFixed power control mode is easy to realize, but it may waste NodeB transmission power. If thedynamic power control mode is used, the power utilization is more efficient. But if the parameteris set unreasonably, it may lead to power waste or the demodulation requirement may not besatisfied.


E-RGCH HPC Mode for Service Radio LinksIt is the RGCH power control algorithm switch of EDCH serving RLS. If it is FIXED, thetransmission power is set according to P-CHPICH power and fixed power offset; if it isDYNAMIC, the transmission power is set according to DCH power of the UE.

Parameter IDSERGCHPCMOD







Relevant Commands


E-RGCH HPC Mode for Non-service Radio Links

It is the RGCH power control algorithm switch of EDCH non-serving RLS. If it is FIXED, thetransmission power is set according to P-CHPICH power and fixed power offset; if it isDYNAMIC, the transmission power is set according to DCH power of the UE.

Parameter ID

NSERGCHPCMOD

Value Range

FIXED, DYNAMIC


Fixed, Dynamic

Parameter Setting

This parameter has not been optimized, the value FIXED is suggested.


Fixed power control mode is easy to realize, but it may waste NodeB transmission power. If thedynamic power control mode is used, the power utilization is more efficient. But if the parameteris set unreasonably, it may lead to power waste or the demodulation requirement may not besatisfied.

Relevant Commands


E-HICH HPC Mode for Service Radio Links

It is the HICH power control algorithm switch of RLS that contains serving RL. If it is FIXED,the transmission power is set according to P-CHPICH power and fixed power offset; if it isDYNAMIC, the transmission power is set according to DCH power of the UE.

Parameter ID

SEHICHPCMOD









E-HICH HPC Mode for Non-service Radio LinksIt is the HICH power control algorithm switch of RLS that does not contain serving RL. If it isFIXED, the transmission power is set according to P-CHPICH power and fixed power offset; ifit is DYNAMIC, the transmission power is set according to DCH power of the UE.

Parameter IDNSEHICHPCMOD








12.4.2 Fixed Power Control Mode Algorithm ParametersThe common configurable HSUPA fixed power control mode algorithm parameters are listedhere.

Table 12-6 List of fixed power control mode algorithm parameters

No. ParameterID

ParameterMeaning

DefaultValue


1 EAGCHPOWER

E-AGCHpower

-132, thatis, -13.2dB

Set or modify:SETMACEPARA(BTS3812E,BTS3812A,BTS3812AE,BBU3806,BBU3806C)Query:LSTMACEPARA(BTS3812E,BTS3812A,BTS3812AE,BBU3806,BBU3806C)

NodeB

2 SERGCHPOWER

E-RGCHpower forservice radiolinks

-210, thatis, -21 dB

3 NSERGCHPOWER

E-RGCHpower for non-service radiolinks

-173, thatis, -17.3dB

4 SEHICHPOWER

E-HICH powerfor serviceradio links

-197, thatis, -19.7dB

5 NSEHICHPOWER

E-HICH powerfor non-serviceradio links

-136, thatis, -13.6dB

12.4.2.1 E-AGCH PowerIt is the AGCH power offset compared to the P-CPICH power in the fixed power control mode.

12.4.2.2 E-RGCH Power for Service Radio LinksIt is the RGCH power offset of EDCH serving RLS compared to the P-CPICH power in thefixed power control mode.

12.4.2.3 E-RGCH Power for Non-service Radio LinksIt is the RGCH power offset of EDCH non-serving RLS compared to the P-CPICH power in thefixed power control mode.

12.4.2.4 E-HICH Power for Service Radio LinksIt is the HICH power offset of RLS that contains the serving RL compared to the P-CPICHpower in the fixed power control mode.

12.4.2.5 E-HICH Power for Non-service Radio LinksIt is the HICH power offset of RLS that does not contain the serving RL compared to the P-CPICH power in the fixed power control mode.




E-AGCH PowerIt is the AGCH power offset compared to the P-CPICH power in the fixed power control mode.

Parameter IDEAGCHPOWER



Parameter SettingThe default value is -132, that is, -13.2 dB.

Impact on the Network Performancel If this parameter is too low, the demodulation performance of AGCH channel cannot satisfy

the demodulation requirement.l If this parameter is too high, the NodeB transmission power is wasted too much.


E-RGCH Power for Service Radio LinksIt is the RGCH power offset of EDCH serving RLS compared to the P-CPICH power in thefixed power control mode.

Parameter IDSERGCHPOWER



Parameter SettingThe default value is -210, that is, -21 dB.






E-RGCH Power for Non-service Radio LinksIt is the RGCH power offset of EDCH non-serving RLS compared to the P-CPICH power in thefixed power control mode.

Parameter IDNSERGCHPOWER



Parameter SettingThe default value is -173, that is, -17.3 dB.




E-HICH Power for Service Radio LinksIt is the HICH power offset of RLS that contains the serving RL compared to the P-CPICHpower in the fixed power control mode.

Parameter IDSEHICHPOWER




Value Range

-350 to 150



Parameter Setting

The default value is -197, that is, -19.7 dB.


l If this parameter is too low, the demodulation performance of AGCH channel cannot satisfythe demodulation requirement.

l If this parameter is too high, the NodeB transmission power is wasted too much.

Relevant Commands


E-HICH Power for Non-service Radio Links

It is the HICH power offset of RLS that does not contain the serving RL compared to the P-CPICH power in the fixed power control mode.

Parameter ID

NSEHICHPOWER

Value Range

-350 to 150



Parameter Setting

The default value is -136, that is, -13.6 dB.







12.4.3 Dynamic Power Control Mode Algorithm ParametersThe common configurable HSUPA dynamic power control mode algorithm parameters are listedhere.

Table 12-7 List of dynamic power control mode algorithm parameters

No. ParameterID

ParameterMeaning

DefaultValue


1 EAGCHPWROFFSET

E-AGCHpower offset

142, thatis, -3.5dB

Set or modify:SETMACEPARA(BTS3812E,BTS3812A,BTS3812AE,BBU3806,BBU3806C)Query:LSTMACEPARA(BTS3812E,BTS3812A,BTS3812AE,BBU3806,BBU3806C)

NodeB

2 SERGCHPWROFFSET

E-RGCHpower offsetfor serviceradio links

100, thatis, -7 dB

3 NSERGCHPWROFFSET

E-RGCHpower offsetfor non-service radiolinks

105, thatis, -5.75dB

4 SEHICHPWROFFSET

E-HICHpower offsetfor serviceradio links

96, thatis, -8 dB

5 NSEHICHPWROFFSET

E-HICHpower offsetfor non-service radiolinks

116, thatis, -3 dB

12.4.3.1 E-AGCH Power OffsetIt is the AGCH power offset compared to the P-CPICH power in the dynamic power controlmode.

12.4.3.2 E-RGCH Power Offset for Service Radio LinksIt is the RGCH power offset of EDCH serving RLS compared to the P-CPICH power in thedynamic power control mode.

12.4.3.3 E-RGCH Power Offset for Non-Service Radio LinksIt is the RGCH power offset of EDCH non-serving RLS compared to the P-CPICH power in thedynamic power control mode.

12.4.3.4 E-HICH Power Offset for Service Radio Links




It is the HICH power offset of RLS that contains the serving RL compared to the P-CPICHpower in the dynamic power control mode.

12.4.3.5 E-HICH Power Offset for Non-Service Radio LinksIt is the HICH power offset of RLS that does not contain the serving RL compared to the P-CPICH power in the dynamic power control mode.

E-AGCH Power OffsetIt is the AGCH power offset compared to the P-CPICH power in the dynamic power controlmode.

Parameter IDEAGCHPWROFFSET

Value Range0 to 255

Physical Value Range-32 dB to 31.75 dB, step 0.25 dB

Parameter SettingThe default value is 142, that is, 3.5 dB.




E-RGCH Power Offset for Service Radio LinksIt is the RGCH power offset of EDCH serving RLS compared to the P-CPICH power in thedynamic power control mode.

Parameter IDSERGCHPWROFFSET

Value Range0 to 255




Parameter SettingThe default value is 100, that is, -7 dB.




E-RGCH Power Offset for Non-Service Radio LinksIt is the RGCH power offset of EDCH non-serving RLS compared to the P-CPICH power in thedynamic power control mode.

Parameter IDNSERGCHPWROFFSET

Value Range0 to 255


Parameter SettingThe default value is 105, that is, -5.75 dB.







E-HICH Power Offset for Service Radio LinksIt is the HICH power offset of RLS that contains the serving RL compared to the P-CPICHpower in the dynamic power control mode.

Parameter IDSEHICHPWROFFSET

Value Range0 to 255






E-HICH Power Offset for Non-Service Radio LinksIt is the HICH power offset of RLS that does not contain the serving RL compared to the P-CPICH power in the dynamic power control mode.

Parameter IDNSEHICHPWROFFSET

Value Range0 to 255








Relevant Commands


12.5 Local Cell Management ParametersThe local cell management parameters consist of cell radius and cell handover radius.

Table 12-8 List of local cell management parameters

No.

ParameterID

ParameterMeaning

DefaultValue

Relevant Command

1 RADIUS Cell radius 29 km On the NodeB LMT, set the parameterthrough MOD LOCELL (BTS3812E,BTS3812A, BTS3812AE, BBU3806,BBU3806C), and qurey it through LSTLOCELL (BTS3812E, BTS3812A,BTS3812AE, BBU3806, BBU3806C).

2 HORAD Cell handoverradius

0 m

12.5.1 Cell RadiusThis parameter describes the radius of a NodeB cell. Cell radius affects the demodulation of theuplink board and the configuration of the parameters related to the access part.

12.5.2 Cell Handover RadiusThis parameter describes the cell handover radius, which can be configured on the NodeBconsole.

12.5.1 Cell RadiusThis parameter describes the radius of a NodeB cell. Cell radius affects the demodulation of theuplink board and the configuration of the parameters related to the access part.

Parameter ID

RAD

Value Range

150 to 180000





150 m to 180 km, with step length as 1 m

Parameter Setting

The default value is 29000, which stands for 29 km.

You can set and adjust a value for this parameter based on the network planning and networkoptimization result. In case the cell radius cannot be determined precisely, the set cell radiusmust be greater than the required cell radius. The set cell radius, however, should be properlygreat. Otherwise, the extra network resources are wasted and the system processing delay occurs.Based on the data provided by relevant products, the handover synchronization time increasesby a maximum of 60 ms if the cell radius changes its value in increments of 3.75 km.

CAUTIONl When using the RRU, you must set the sum of the cell radius and the fiber transmission

delay as the cell radius.

l If the access board of the NodeB is configured to support multiple sectors, the maximumof the configurable cell radius is 30 km.


The setting of this parameter must be the same as the result of network planning.

Relevant Commands

On the NodeB LMT, set the parameter through MOD LOCELL (BTS3812E, BTS3812A,BTS3812AE, BBU3806, BBU3806C) and query it through LST LOCELL (BTS3812E,BTS3812A, BTS3812AE, BBU3806, BBU3806C).

12.5.2 Cell Handover RadiusThis parameter describes the cell handover radius, which can be configured on the NodeBconsole.

Parameter ID

HORAD

Value Range

0 to 180000


0 to 18 km, with step length as 1 m.



Parameter SettingThe default value is 0. The inner radius of a cell handover radius must be at least 78.125 m, thatis, 1 chip, shorter than the cell radius.

You can set and adjust a value for this parameter based on network planning and networkoptimization result. In case the cell handover range cannot be determined precisely, the valueset for the cell handover radius must be smaller than the minimum cell handover radius requiredfor network planning. The set value, however, should be properly small. Otherwise, the systemprocessing delay may occur.

CAUTIONWhen using the RRU, you must set the sum of the actual cell handover radius and the fibertransmission delay as the cell handover radius.

Impact on the Network PerformanceIf the value set for this parameter exceeds the planned value range of a cell, the NodeB fails tohandle the users on the radius smaller than the set value. This results in that the actual handoverrange is smaller than the planned one.

Relevant CommandsOn the NodeB LMT, set the parameter through MOD LOCELL (BTS3812E, BTS3812A,BTS3812AE, BBU3806, BBU3806C) and query it through LST LOCELL (BTS3812E,BTS3812A, BTS3812AE, BBU3806, BBU3806C).




ran+network+optimization+parameter+reference ran6.1 (2)

Documents

transport channel reconfiguration

huawei technologies proprietary

primary mouse button

initial transmit power

random access process

dch rrc hho process

fastfading resistance capability

mod cellinterfr eqhocov